SECTION 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-9 · 2018-04-09 · 07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A 6-1 SECTION 6 Book 2, Section 6 with Appendix 6A and 6B CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLE OF

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-1

SECTION 6

Book 2, Section 6 with Appendix 6A and 6B

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 6-9

6.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 6-9

6.1 Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions ............................................................................ 6-10 6.1.2 Beryllium Oxide ............................................................................................................ 6-11

6.2 Fault Isolation ................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.1 REX/SDP Cabinet (Unit 1, Unit 2) Fault Isolation ........................................................ 6-13

6.2.1.1 Fault Monitoring .................................................................................................. 6-13 6.2.1.2 REX/SDP Automatic Fault Isolation .................................................................... 6-13 6.2.1.3 REX/SDP Manual Fault Isolation using Built In Test Equipment (BITE) .............. 6-16 6.2.1.3.1 Stability Test ........................................................................................................ 6-17 6.2.1.3.2 Configuring the Manual Stability Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation ...... 6-18 6.2.1.3.3 Noise Test ........................................................................................................... 6-22 6.2.1.3.4 Configuring the Manual Noise Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation .......... 6-23 6.2.1.3.5 End-To-End Test ................................................................................................. 6-26 6.2.1.3.6 Configuring the Manual End to End Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation . 6-26 6.2.1.4 Other REX/SDP Manual Fault Isolation ............................................................... 6-32

6.2.2 Transmitter RF Cabinet and Power Supply Cabinet (Unit 3, Unit 4) Fault Isolation ..... 6-33 6.2.2.1 Automatic Fault Isolation of LRUs ....................................................................... 6-33 6.2.2.2 Duty Cycle and Pulse Width Faults ..................................................................... 6-33 6.2.2.3 Reverse Power Faults ......................................................................................... 6-33 6.2.2.4 Forward Power Fault ........................................................................................... 6-33

6.2.3 Waveguide Assembly (Unit 6) Fault Isolation .............................................................. 6-35 6.2.3.1 Automatic Fault Isolation of Line Replaceable Items (LRIs) ................................ 6-35 6.2.3.2 Manual Fault Isolation of LRIs ............................................................................. 6-35 6.2.3.3 Waveguide Couplers ........................................................................................... 6-35 6.2.3.4 Waveguide Circulator .......................................................................................... 6-35 6.2.3.5 Waveguide Receiver Protector (Limiter) .............................................................. 6-36 6.2.3.6 Coaxial Receiver Protector (Limiter) .................................................................... 6-36 6.2.3.7 Coaxial BITE Components .................................................................................. 6-36

6.2.4 Common Equipment Cabinet (CEC) Unit 7 Fault Isolation .......................................... 6-37 6.2.4.1 Automatic Fault Isolation ..................................................................................... 6-37 6.2.4.2 Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) Manual Fault Isolation .................. 6-37 6.2.4.3 UPS Manual Fault Isolation ................................................................................. 6-38 6.2.4.4 SCDI Manual Fault Isolation ................................................................................ 6-38 6.2.4.5 Ethernet Manual Fault Isolation ........................................................................... 6-38 6.2.4.6 MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server Manual Fault Isolation ....................................... 6-39

6.2.5 RCP Fault Isolation ...................................................................................................... 6-39 6.2.6 APG Fault Isolation ...................................................................................................... 6-40

6.2.6.1 APG Status Monitoring Functions ....................................................................... 6-40 6.2.6.2 Antenna And Pedestal Control Functions ............................................................ 6-43 6.2.6.3 APG Corrective Maintenance .............................................................................. 6-45

6.2.7 MSSR Equipment Fault Isolation ................................................................................. 6-57 6.2.8 SDT / SIU Fault Isolation ............................................................................................. 6-57 6.2.9 Site UPS Fault Isolation ............................................................................................... 6-57 6.2.10 Engine Generator Fault Isolation ................................................................................. 6-57

6.3 On-Site PSR Removal and Installation Procedures ...................................................... 6-58

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-2

6.3.1 REX/SDP Cabinet, Unit 1 / Unit 2 ................................................................................ 6-65 6.3.1.1 Replace RF Assembly 1A1, 2A1 ......................................................................... 6-65 6.3.1.1.1 Replace RF Assembly A1 STC attenuator module: A1Z1, A2Z1, A3Z1, Bandpass filter:

A1FL1, A2FL1, A3FL1, 30dB Low Noise Amp: A1AR1, A2AR1, A3AR1 ............ 6-68 6.3.1.1.2 Replace RF Assembly Interface Regulator card CCA A4 .................................... 6-68 6.3.1.1.3 Replace RF Assembly Target Hi / Low Switch (S2) ............................................ 6-68 6.3.1.1.4 Replace RF Assembly Test Switch S1 ................................................................ 6-68 6.3.1.2 Replace Stability Monitor 1A2, 2A2 ..................................................................... 6-71 6.3.1.3 Replace Weather Downconverter 1A3, 2A3 ........................................................ 6-75 6.3.1.4 Replace Target Downconverter 1A4, 2A4 ........................................................... 6-77 6.3.1.5 Replace Local Oscillator 1A5, 2A5 ...................................................................... 6-79 6.3.1.5.1 Quartz Oscillator Transfer ................................................................................... 6-82 6.3.1.6 Replace Upconverter 1A6, 2A6 ........................................................................... 6-85 6.3.1.7 - 6.3.1.15 Reserved .................................................................................................. 6-86 6.3.1.16 Replace Cabinet UPS 1A10, 2A10 ...................................................................... 6-87 6.3.1.17 Cabinet Smart -UPS 1A10, 2A10 ........................................................................ 6-91 .3.1.18 Replace Cabinet UPS Battery Pack 1A10BT1, 2A10BT1 ................................... 6-94 6.3.1.19 Replace REX Power Supply 1A11A2, 2A11A2 ................................................... 6-97 6.3.1.20 Replace NTIA Filter Assembly 1A12, 2A12 ....................................................... 6-100 6.3.1.21 Replace Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10, 2A9A10 .............................................. 6-103 6.3.1.22 Replace DSP CCA 1A9A8, 2A9A8 .................................................................... 6-106 6.3.1.23 Replace SDP SBC CCA 1A9A1, 2A9A1 ........................................................... 6-109 6.3.1.24 Replace SDP Power Supply 1A9A13, 2A9A13 ................................................. 6-113 6.3.1.25 Replace SDP Fan Tray Assembly (Hybricon) 1A9A26, 2A9A26 ....................... 6-115 6.3.1.26 Replace I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24, 2A9A24 .................................................. 6-118 6.3.1.27 Replace SDP Chassis 1A9, 2A9 ....................................................................... 6-126

6.3.2 Transmitter RF Cabinet, Unit 3 .................................................................................. 6-136 6.3.2.1 Replace Tx Amplifier Module 3A1 to 3A4 and 3A6 to 3A9 ................................ 6-136 6.3.2.2 Replace Tx Driver Module 3A5, 3A10 ............................................................... 6-139 6.3.2.3 Replace Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11, 3A12 .......................................... 6-142 6.3.2.4 Replace 1:4 Divider 3A14, 3A15 ....................................................................... 6-144 6.3.2.5 Replace Waveguide Combiner 3A17 ................................................................ 6-149 6.3.2.6 Replace Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1, 3CP2, 3CP3, 3CP4 ........................ 6-155 6.3.2.7 Replace Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1, 3S2 ................................................. 6-161 6.3.2.8 Replace Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3, 3S4 ............................................... 6-167 6.3.2.9 Replace 1:2 Divider 3A16 .................................................................................. 6-173

6.3.3 Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet, Unit 4 ................................................................. 6-179 6.3.3.1 Replace AC Distribution Unit 4A1 ..................................................................... 6-179 6.3.3.2 Replace DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1 ................................................................... 6-187 6.3.3.3 Replace Tx Control CCA 4A2A2, 4A2A5 ........................................................... 6-194 6.3.3.4 Replace Tx Status CCA 4A2A3, 4A2A6 ............................................................ 6-197 6.3.3.5 Replace RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4, 4A2A7 ......................................................... 6-200 6.3.3.6 Replace TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 (Second Level Engineering Activity Only) .. 6-203 6.3.3.7 Replace Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A1, 4A3A2 ........................ 6-211 6.3.3.8 Replace TCMM Fan Assembly 4A3A3 .............................................................. 6-213 6.3.3.9 Replace Tx Power Supply 4A4A1, 4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1,

4A7A2 ............................................................................................................... 6-215 6.3.3.10 Replace Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3, 4A7A3 .............................................. 6-218 6.3.3.11 Replace Tx Drive Sample 1:2 Divider/Video Detector 4A20A1, 4A20A2........... 6-221 6.3.3.12 Replace Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT2, 4A20AT6 ............................ 6-224 6.3.3.13 Replace Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4 ................................ 6-227 6.3.3.14 Replace Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1, 4A20DC2 .................................. 6-231 6.3.3.15 Replace Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1 ...................................................... 6-235 6.3.3.16 Removal and Replacement AC Power Indicators 4A1DS1 and 4A1DS2 ............. 239

6.3.4 Microwave Assembly, Unit 6 ......................................................................................... 243

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-3

6.3.4.1 Replace Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider 6A1 ................................................ 243 6.3.4.2 Replace Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2 .......................................... 246 6.3.4.3 Replace Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3, 6A4 ................................. 249 6.3.4.4 Replace Forward Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT1 ............................................... 252 6.3.4.5 Replace Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT2, 6AT3 .................................... 254 6.3.4.6 Replace High Power Load 6AT4 .......................................................................... 256 6.3.4.7 Replace Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination 6AT5 ...................................... 260 6.3.4.8 Replace Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT6, 6AT7 ..................................... 262 6.3.4.9 Replace Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination 6AT8 ................................ 264 6.3.4.10 Replace Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1, 6B2 ........................................................ 266 6.3.4.11 Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2] ...................................................... 268 6.3.4.12 Replace Circulator Assembly 6HY3 ..................................................................... 275 6.3.4.13 Replace Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1 ............................................................ 279 6.3.4.14 Replace Coax Transfer Switch 6S2, 6S3 ............................................................. 285 6.3.4.15 Replace Receiver Protector 6Z1, 6Z2 .................................................................. 288 6.3.4.16 Replace RF Power Limiter 6Z3, 6Z4, 6Z5, 6Z6 .................................................... 291

6.3.5 Common Equipment Cabinet, Unit 7 ............................................................................ 293 6.3.5.1 Replace Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1, 7A2 ......................... 293 6.3.5.2 Replace Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3 ................................................... 301 6.3.5.3 Replace HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation 7A4, 7A5 .................................................... 305 6.3.5.3.1 Restore HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation Software ..................................................... 310 6.3.5.4 Replace HP-Z440 SCDI Keyboard 7A4A2, 7A5A2 ......................................... 6-325 6.3.5.5 Replace SCDI Mouse 7A4A3, 7A5A3 ............................................................. 6-326 6.3.5.6 Replace SCDI Monitor 7A4A4, 7A5A4 .............................................................. 6-326 6.3.5.7 Replace SCDI Printer 7A4A5 ............................................................................ 6-327 6.3.5.8 Replace Ethernet Switch 7A6A1, 7A9A1 ........................................................... 6-328 6.3.5.9 Replace Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A6PS1, 7A9PS1 ............................... 6-331 6.3.5.10 Replace MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7, 7A10 [PSR Build 12 or Higher] . 6-334 6.3.5.11 Replace MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7, 7A10 [PSR Build 11 or Lower] .. 6-337 6.3.5.12 Replace Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12, 7A13 ......................... 6-340 6.3.5.13 Replace FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 ................................................................. 6-344 6.3.5.14 Replace Latching Relay Box 7A16, 7A17 .......................................................... 6-351 6.3.5.15 Replace FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1, 7PS2 ............................................... 6-356 6.3.5.16 Replace FMAC Modules ................................................................................... 6-358

6.3.6 Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15 ............................................................................... 6-362 6.3.6.1 Replace Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15 (ACS 600 or ACS 800) .................... 6-362

6.3.7 Pedestal Interface Panel Unit 16 ............................................................................... 6-369 6.3.7.1 Replace Pedestal Interface Panel PWB 16A1 ................................................... 6-369

6.3.8 Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18 ................................................................................ 6-372 6.3.8.1 Replace Compressor Dehydrator, Unit 18 ......................................................... 6-372

6.3.9 Pedestal Local Control Panel Unit 34 ........................................................................ 6-377 6.3.9.1 Replace Encoder Power Supply 34PS1, 34PS2 ............................................... 6-377 6.3.9.2 Replace Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply 34PS3 ....................................... 6-380 6.3.9.3 Replace Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply 34PS4 ...................................... 6-383 6.3.9.4 Replace Oil Level Transition Module 34A1 ....................................................... 6-386 6.3.9.5 Replace Obstruction Light Relay 34K1 .............................................................. 6-390 6.3.9.6 Replace Pedestal Room Enable Relay 34K2 .................................................... 6-392 6.3.9.7 Replace Polarizer Select Relay 34K3................................................................ 6-394 6.3.9.8 Replace Sump Heater Relay 34K4 ................................................................... 6-396 6.3.9.9 Replace Pedestal Temperature Relay 34K5 ..................................................... 6-398 6.3.9.10 Replace Remote OMT Printer 50A18 ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.

6.3.10 Remote OMT Unit 52 or Unit 54 ................................................................................ 6-400 6.3.10.1 Replace HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation 52A1, 54A1 ................................ 6-400 6.3.10.2 Restore HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation Software ................................. 6-403 6.3.10.3 Replace HP-Z440 Remote OMT Keyboard 52A2, 54A2 .................................... 6-418

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-4

6.3.10.4 Replace Remote OMT Mouse 52A3, 54A3 ..................................................... 6-419 6.3.10.5 Replace Remote OMT Monitor 52A4, 54A4 ................................................... 6-420

6.3.11 Radar Control Panel (RCP) Unit 56 Unit 57 or Unit 60 .............................................. 6-422 6.3.11.1 Replace Radar Control Panel 56A1, 57A1, 60A1 .............................................. 6-422

6.3.12 Miscellaneous Support Procedures ........................................................................... 6-424 6.3.12.1 Wx Receiver Gain Calibration ........................................................................... 6-424 6.3.12.2 Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration ..................................................... 6-430 6.3.12.3 Waveguide Bolt Torquing .................................................................................. 6-438 6.3.12.4 Reserved ............................................................................................................. 6-438 6.3.12.5 Selected Encoder Alignment ............................................................................. 6-439 6.3.12.6 Standby Encoder Alignment .............................................................................. 6-442

6.3.13 Radar Certification Parameter Setup ......................................................................... 6-445 6.3.13.1 Online MDS Test Signal Setup .......................................................................... 6-445 6.3.13.2 Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ............................... 6-450 6.3.13.3 Tx Forward Power Certification Setup ............................................................... 6-458 6.3.13.4 Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment ........................ 6-460 6.3.13.5 Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup.................................... 6-467 6.3.13.6 Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup ..................................................... 6-473 6.3.13.7 Driver Forward Power Video Detector Alignment .............................................. 6-482

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-5

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 6-1. Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Caution Symbol ............................................................... 6-10 Figure 6-2. Manual Fault Isolation Test Path .......................................................................................... 6-16 Figure 6-3. DASR Stability Filters ........................................................................................................... 6-17 Figure 6-4. Manual Stability Test Control Screen ................................................................................... 6-18 Figure 6-5. REX/SDP Channel A Manual Noise Tests Screen ............................................................... 6-23 Figure 6-6. REX/SDP Channel End-To-End Tests Screen ..................................................................... 6-27 Figure 6-7. RF Assembly 1 A 1 [2 A 1] ................................................................................................... 6-69 Figure 6-8. RF Assembly 1A1 [2A1] ....................................................................................................... 6-70 Figure 6-9. Stability Monitor 1A2 [2A2] ................................................................................................... 6-73 Figure 6-10. Stability Monitor 1A2 [2A2] ................................................................................................. 6-74 Figure 6-11. Weather Downconverter 1A3 [2A3] .................................................................................... 6-76 Figure 6-12. Target Downconverter 1A4 [2A4] ....................................................................................... 6-78 Figure 6-13. Local Oscillator 1A5 [2A5] .................................................................................................. 6-81 Figure 6-14. Quartz Oscillator Transfer .................................................................................................. 6-84 Figure 6-15. Upconverter 1A6 [2A6] ....................................................................................................... 6-86 Figure 6-16. Cabinet Original UPS 1A10 [2A10] .................................................................................... 6-90 Figure 6-18. Cabinet UPS Battery Pack 1A10BT1 [2A10BT1] ............................................................... 6-96 Figure 6-19. Rex Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2] ................................................................................ 6-99 Figure 6-20. Filter Assembly 1A12 [2A12] ............................................................................................ 6-102 Figure 6-21. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] – Front View ............................................................................ 6-105 Figure 6-22. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] – Front View ............................................................................ 6-108 Figure 6-23. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] – Front View ............................................................................ 6-111 Figure 6-24. DIP Switch S1 ................................................................................................................... 6-112 Figure 6-25. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] Front View ............................................................................... 6-114 Figure 6-26. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] Front View ............................................................................... 6-117 Figure 6-27. REX/SDP Cabinet Unit 1 [Unit 2] – Front View ................................................................ 6-122 Figure 6-28. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] – Front View ............................................................................ 6-123 Figure 6-29. I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] – Shown in Chassis, ASDP Chassis Back View . 6-124 Figure 6-30. I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] – Side View .......................................................... 6-125 Figure 6-31. SDP Chassis (Hybricon) 1A [2A9] – Front View ............................................................... 6-133 Figure 6-32. SDP Chassis (Hybricon) 1A9 [2A9] – Rear View ............................................................. 6-134 Figure 6-33. SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] Front View ..................................................... 6-135 Figure 6-34. Tx Amplifier Module 3A1 [3A2, 3A3, 3A4, 3A6, 3A7, 3A8, 3A9] ...................................... 6-138 Figure 6-35. Tx Driver Module 3A5 [3A10] ........................................................................................... 6-141 Figure 6-36. Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11 [3A12] ...................................................................... 6-143 Figure 6-37. 1:4 Divider 3A14 [3A15] .................................................................................................... 6-147 Figure 6-38. 1:4 Divider 3A14 [3A15] .................................................................................................... 6-148 Figure 6-39. Waveguide Combiner 3A17 .............................................................................................. 6-152 Figure 6-40. Waveguide Combiner 3A17 .............................................................................................. 6-153 Figure 6-41. Waveguide Combiner 3A17 .............................................................................................. 6-154 Figure 6-42. Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1 {3CP2} [3CP3 {3CP4}] ................................................. 6-158 Figure 6-43. Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1 {3CP2} [3CP3 {3CP4}] ................................................. 6-159 Figure 6-44. Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1 {3CP2} [3CP3 {3CP4}] ................................................. 6-160 Figure 6-45. Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1 [3S2] ............................................................................. 6-164 Figure 6-46. Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1 [3S2] ............................................................................. 6-165 Figure 6-47. Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1 [3S2] ............................................................................. 6-166 Figure 6-48. Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3 [3S4] ........................................................................... 6-170 Figure 6-49. Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3 [3S4] ........................................................................... 6-171 Figure 6-50. Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3 [3S4] ........................................................................... 6-172 Figure 6-51. 1:2 Divider 3A16 ............................................................................................................... 6-176 Figure 6-52. 1:2 Divider 3A16 ............................................................................................................... 6-177 Figure 6-53. 1:2 Divider 3A16 ............................................................................................................... 6-178 Figure 6-54. AC Distribution Unit 4A1 ................................................................................................... 6-184 Figure 6-55. AC Distribution Unit 4A1 ................................................................................................... 6-185

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-6

LIST OF FIGURES (Continued) Figure 6-56. AC Distribution Unit 4A1 ................................................................................................... 6-186 Figure 6-57. DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1 ................................................................................................. 6-191 Figure 6-58. DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1 ................................................................................................. 6-192 Figure 6-59. DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1 ................................................................................................. 6-193 Figure 6-60. Tx Control CCA 4A2A2 [4A2A5] ....................................................................................... 6-196 Figure 6-61. Tx Status CCA 4A2A3 [4A2A6] ........................................................................................ 6-199 Figure 6-62. Tx RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4 [4A2A7]................................................................................. 6-202 Figure 6-63. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 ................................................................................................. 6-206 Figure 6-64. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 ................................................................................................. 6-207 Figure 6-65. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 ................................................................................................. 6-208 Figure 6-66. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 ................................................................................................. 6-209 Figure 6-67. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 ................................................................................................. 6-210 Figure 6-68. Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A1 [4A3A2] .................................................... 6-212 Figure 6-69. TCMM Fan Assembly 4A3A3 ........................................................................................... 6-214 Figure 6-70. Tx Amplifier Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A1]6-217 Figure 6-71. Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3 [4A7A3] .......................................................................... 6-220 Figure 6-72. 1:2 Divider/Video Detector 4A20A1 [4A20A2] .................................................................. 6-223 Figure 6-73. Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT2 [4A20AT6] ........................................................ 6-226 Figure 6-74. Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4 ............................................................. 6-229 Figure 6-75. Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4 ............................................................. 6-230 Figure 6-76. Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1 [4A20DC2] .............................................................. 6-233 Figure 6-77. Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1 [4A20DC2] .............................................................. 6-234 Figure 6-78. Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1 ...................................................................................... 237 Figure 6-79. Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1 ...................................................................................... 238 Figure 6-80. AC Distribution Panel Unit 4A1 ............................................................................................ 240 Figure 6-81. Top view of Unit 4 Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet ........................................................ 240 Figure 6-82. Inside view of AC Distribution Unit 4A1 ............................................................................... 241 Figure 6-83. Back of AC Indicator ............................................................................................................ 241 Figure 6-84. Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider 6A1 ............................................................................. 245 Figure 6-85. Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2 ....................................................................... 248 Figure 6-86. Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 [6A4] ............................................................. 251 Figure 6-87. Forward Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT1 ............................................................................ 253 Figure 6-88. Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT2 [6AT3] ................................................................ 255 Figure 6-89. High Power Load 6AT4 ....................................................................................................... 258 Figure 6-90. High Power Load 6AT4 ....................................................................................................... 259 Figure 6-91. Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination 6AT5 ................................................................... 261 Figure 6-92. Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT6 [6AT7] ................................................................. 263 Figure 6-93. Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination 6AT8 ............................................................. 265 Figure 6-94. Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1 [6B2]..................................................................................... 267 Figure 6-95. Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2] .................................................................... 271 Figure 6-96. Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2] .................................................................... 272 Figure 6-97. Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2] .................................................................... 273 Figure 6-98. Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2] .................................................................... 274 Figure 6-99. Circulator Assembly 6HY3 ................................................................................................... 277 Figure 6-100. Circulator Assembly 6HY3 ................................................................................................. 278 Figure 6-101. Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1 ....................................................................................... 282 Figure 6-102. Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1 ....................................................................................... 283 Figure 6-103. Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1 ....................................................................................... 284 Figure 6-104. Coax Transfer Switch 6S2 [6S3] ....................................................................................... 287 Figure 6-105. Receiver Protector 6Z1 [6Z2] ............................................................................................ 290 Figure 6-106. RF Power Limiter 6Z3, 6Z4, 6Z5, 6Z6 ............................................................................... 292 Figure 6-107. Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1 [7A2] ................................................... 298 Figure 6-108. Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1 [7A2] ................................................... 299 Figure 6-109. Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1 [7A2] ................................................... 300

XX/XX/XXXX SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-7

LIST OF FIGURES (Continued) Figure 6-110. Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3 .............................................................................. 303 Figure 6-111. Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3 .............................................................................. 304 Figure 6-112. SCDI Workstation 7A4 [7A5] ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Figure 6-113. SCDI Workstation 7A4 [7A5] ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Figure 6-114. Map Selection Administration Menu ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. Figure 6-115. Ethernet Switch 7A6A1 [7A9A1] ..................................................................................... 6-330 Figure 6-116. Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A6PS1 [7A9PS1]......................................................... 6-333 Figure 6-117. MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7 [7A10] ................................................................... 6-336 Figure 6-118. MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7 [7A10] ................................................................... 6-339 Figure 6-119. Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12 [7A13] .................................................. 6-342 Figure 6-120. Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12 [7A13] .................................................. 6-343 Figure 6-121. FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 ............................................................................................ 6-348 Figure 6-122. FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 ............................................................................................ 6-349 Figure 6-123. FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 ............................................................................................ 6-350 Figure 6-124. Latching Relay Box 7A16 [7A17] .................................................................................... 6-354 Figure 6-125. Latching Relay Box 7A16 [7A17] .................................................................................... 6-355 Figure 6-126. FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1 [7PS2] ......................................................................... 6-357 Figure 6-127. Cabinet 7 ........................................................................................................................ 6-360 Figure 6-128. FMAC LRUs .................................................................................................................... 6-361 Figure 6-129. Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15 .................................................................................... 6-367 Figure 6-130. Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15 .................................................................................... 6-368 Figure 6-131. Pedestal Interface Panel PWB 16A1 .............................................................................. 6-371 Figure 6-132. Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18 ..................................................................................... 6-375 Figure 6-133. Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18 ..................................................................................... 6-376 Figure 6-134. Encoder Power Supply 34PS1 [34PS2] ......................................................................... 6-379 Figure 6-135. Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply 34PS3 .................................................................. 6-382 Figure 6-136. Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply 34PS4 ................................................................. 6-385 Figure 6-137. Oil Level Transition Module 34A1 .................................................................................. 6-389 Figure 6-138. Obstruction Light Relay 34K1 ......................................................................................... 6-391 Figure 6-139. Pedestal Room Enable Relay 34K2 ............................................................................... 6-393 Figure 6-140. Polarizer Select Relay 34K3 ........................................................................................... 6-395 Figure 6-141. Sump Heater Relay 34K4 ............................................................................................... 6-397 Figure 6-142. Pedestal Temperature Relay 34K5 ................................................................................ 6-399 Figure 6-143. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined. Figure 6-144. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined. Figure 6-145. Removed by SDR-ASR11-051 ....................................................................................... 6-421 Figure 6-146. Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] ....................................................................... 6-423 Figure 6-147. Beam and STC Overrides .............................................................................................. 6-426 Figure 6-148. Capture Radar Data to Disk ........................................................................................... 6-427 Figure 6-149. Trigger Connections ....................................................................................................... 6-434 Figure 6-150. Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration .................................................................. 6-435 Figure 6-151. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-436 Figure 6-152. Waveguide Bolt Torquing ............................................................................................... 6-438 Figure 6-153. Selected Encoder Alignment .......................................................................................... 6-441 Figure 6-154. Standby Encoder Alignment ........................................................................................... 6-444 Figure 6-155. Online MDS Test Signal Setup ....................................................................................... 6-448 Figure 6-156. Online MDS Test Signal Measurement .......................................................................... 6-449 Figure 6-157. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ........................................... 6-454 Figure 6-158. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Trigger Setup ........................................................ 6-455 Figure 6-159. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ........................................... 6-456 Figure 6-160. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-457 Figure 6-161. Trigger Connections ....................................................................................................... 6-462 Figure 6-161a. FMAC Module Locations .............................................................................................. 6-454 Figure 6-162. Tx Forward Power Certification Setup ............................................................................ 6-455 Figure 6-163. Tx Forward Power Certification ...................................................................................... 6-456

* *


6-8

LIST OF FIGURES (Continued) Figure 6-164. Tx Forward Power Certification Setup ............................................................................ 6-457 Figure 6-165. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-458 Figure 6-166. Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ........................................... 6-464 Figure 6-167. Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ........................................... 6-465 Figure 6-168. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-466 Figure 6-169. Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup ................................................ 6-470 Figure 6-170. Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector Setup .......................................................... 6-471 Figure 6-171. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-472 Figure 6-172. Trigger Connections ....................................................................................................... 6-477 Figure 6-173. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup .................................................................. 6-478 Figure 6-174. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup .................................................................. 6-479 Figure 6-175. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup .................................................................. 6-480 Figure 6-176. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-481 Figure 6-177. Trigger Connections ....................................................................................................... 6-485 Figure 6-178. Driver Forward Power Video Detector ............................................................................ 6-486 Figure 6-179. Driver Forward Video Detector ....................................................................................... 6-487 Figure 6-180. Test Equipment Setup .................................................................................................... 6-488

LIST OF TABLES

Table 6-1. REX/SDP Manual Stability Tests of Standby PSR Channel ......................................... 6-20 Table 6-2. Manual Noise Testing Configuration for Simulating FM/FI Tests ................................. 6-25 Table 6-3. Manual End-To-End Testing Configuration For Simulating FM Tests .......................... 6-28 Table 6-4. Manual End-To-End Testing Configuration for Simulation FI Tests ............................. 6-30 Table 6-5. LRU / LRI Replacement Procedures ............................................................................ 6-59 Table 6-6. TCMM Backplane A2A8 Cable Connections .............................................................. 6-205 Table 6-7. FMAC 7A1 [7A2] Cable Connections ............................................................................ 297 Table 6-8. CEC Fan 7A3 Wire Connections ................................................................................... 302 Table 6-9. Disk Partitions ................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. Table 6-10. Server Cable Connections ....................................................................................... 6-335 Table 6-11. Server Cable Connections ....................................................................................... 6-338 Table 6-12. FMAC Interface PWB Connections .......................................................................... 6-347 Table 6-13. Pedestal Interface Panel PWB Cable Connections .................................................. 6-370 Table 6-14. Oil Level Transition Module 34A1 Wire Transfer ...................................................... 6-387 Table 6-15. Disk Partitions .................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Table 6-16. Transmitter J1 Port Calibration ................................................................................. 6-437 Table 6-17. Transmitter Forward Power Certification Setup Worksheet...................................... 6-459 Table 6-18. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup Worksheet .......................................... 6-477

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-9

SECTION 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

6.0 GENERAL

Fault detection and fault isolation of the Primary Surveillance Radar (PSR) and Monopulse Secondary Surveillance Radar (MSSR) equipment is performed automatically. Diagnostic results are displayed on the Site Control and Data Interface (SCDI) monitor to the Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). In the event of a failure, the equipment is reconfigured automatically (if possible) to maintain radar service. Diagnostic tests can be used to confirm failure indications and completed repairs. Corrective action usually involves replacing a defective LRU.

NOTE: The terms “SCDI” (Site Control and Data Interface) and “OMT” (Operator Maintenance Terminal) are used interchangeably throughout this manual.

On detection of a failure condition in a PSR channel, the PSR channel will be declared failed. If the PSR channel is in an Online role with the alternate channel in an Online role and if Automatic Reconfiguration is enabled, the failed channel will assume the Maintenance role and the alternate channel will assume, or remain in, the Online selected role.

If a subsystem has a defective LRU, three things happen:

a subsystem block on the SCDI Main Screen is colored RED or AMBER, with an “!”

an alarm message is displayed on the SCDI Main Screen an audible alarm to alert the technician is sounded (if not disabled).

The maintenance technician can silence the alarm by clicking (pressing) the ACK button on the main status screen.

The maintenance technician may select either the Detailed Status Screen associated with the failed subsystem block, or the Receiver Exciter / Signal Data Processor (REX/SDP) Fault Isolation Screen for the REX/SDP. The subsystem Detailed Status Screen will indicate the failed LRU by coloring it RED. Similarly, the REX/SDP Fault Isolation Screen will indicate a failed REX/SDP LRU in same manner.

Left clicking on the failed LRU will allow the maintenance technician to determine LRU name, part number and location. The repair action will be to replace the failed LRU with a serviceable part from the depot. Refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in Paragraph 6.3 for LRU replacement.

Replacement of a failed LRU with a serviceable part will cause the Detail Status Screen indication for that LRU to return to a “GREEN” (serviceable) status. Similarly, manual initiation of the Automatic FI in the REX/SDP after the failed module has been replaced will result in successful completion of FI and all modules will return to the GREEN (serviceable) state.

More detailed manual fault isolation capabilities are available with the REX/SDP and discussed in later paragraphs of this Section.

If recommended Fault Isolation procedures do not isolate the fault, request Second Level Engineering Support. Refer to System O&M manual for further direction.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-10

6.1 Precautions

Personnel performing tests and repairs must observe safety precautions for the following:

Possible electric shock

RF radiation hazards

Disposal of dangerous devices or substances

Electrostatic discharge precautions.

6.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions

Special handling precautions are required for modules or Circuit Card Assemblies (CCAs) containing electrostatic discharge sensitive Integrated Circuits (ICs). Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive semiconductor devices can be permanently damaged through electrostatic discharge. To identify CCAs with electrostatic discharge sensitivity, the CCAs must be marked with either orange paint or have the electrostatic discharge sensitive caution symbol (See Figure 6-1).

Figure 6-1. Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Caution Symbol

A CCA with electrostatic discharge sensitive components must be kept in a conductive package until ready to use. The CCA must be removed from its protective package only at a grounded workstation, by a person wearing a grounded wrist strap. Turn off power before removing or installing CCAs in the next higher assembly.

Electrostatic discharge sensitive semiconductor devices consist of all integrated circuits and semiconductor devices classified as follows:

Class 1 devices are electrostatic discharge sensitive to voltage from 0 to 1000 volts.

Class 2 devices are electrostatic discharge sensitive to voltage from 1000 to 4000 volts.

Class 3 devices are electrostatic discharge sensitive to voltage greater than 4000 volts and are considered subject to the requirements of this standard.

All Class 1 devices have the design requirement of protective circuitry. All class 1 and class 2 devices are subject to the handling requirements described in the following paragraphs.

Grounded wrist straps must be used. Wrist straps must have a resistance of 800 Kohms to 1.5 Megaohms.

NOTE: Ensure that the wrist strap is attached to a cabinet grounding stud or a bare metal surface, such as a grounding cable.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-11

All bench, table and counter top grounding mats must be grounded through a 1-Megaohm-to-earth ground. All electrostatic discharge sensitive assemblies must be marked with orange paint or have the electrostatic discharge sensitive caution symbol. If soldering is required to replace an electrostatic discharge sensitive device, a grounded low voltage soldering iron must be used. Reference documents: MIL-STD-129, MIL-STD-883, and MIL-STD-38510.

6.1.2 Beryllium Oxide

Assemblies or modules containing Beryllium Oxide (BeO) are labeled with a warning stating that the unit contains BeO.

WARNING

Under no circumstances shall any person attempt to open, break, saw, file, grind or in any other way damage items containing Beryllium Oxide.

When shipping items containing Beryllium Oxide, care shall be taken to ensure that the items are adequately protected to avoid any possibility of damage. The outside of the package shall be clearly marked with the following text:

CAUTION

CONTENTS CONTAIN BERYLLIUM OXIDE

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-12

6.2 Fault Isolation

The following paragraphs address PSR fault isolation in the listed order:

REX/SDP - Units 1 and 2

Transmitter (RF and Power Supply Cabinets) - Units 3 and 4

Waveguide Assembly - Unit 6

Common Equipment Cabinet (CEC) - Unit 7

Radar Control Panel (RCP)

Antenna Pedestal Group (APG)

MSSR

Surveillance Data Translator (SDT) Surveillance Interface Unit (SIU)

Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) Engine Generator (EGEN)

General Fault Isolation Procedures

After isolating the faulty LRU or cable, proceed as follows:

Ensure that the LRU is correctly seated.

At the rear of the REX/SDP Cabinet, open the rear door and examine the mating connectors of the LRU for condition.

Ensure applicable LRUs are fully seated in the card cage, with no visible gaps.

Visually verify that all RF connectors are properly engaged.

At the front of the REX/SDP Cabinet, ensure that the mounting screws of the LRU are securely tightened.

If required, re-seat the LRU and repeat fault isolation procedures.

Inspect all cables of a faulty LRU for defects, damage (wear, chaffing, cuts or exposed wiring), correct routing and security. Replace any faulty cabling.

Where possible, install a serviceable LRU to confirm fault diagnosis.

If fault has not been corrected, request assistance from second level engineering.

NOTE: All displayed alarms, information messages and resultant corrective maintenance actions are listed in Appendix 6A.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-13

6.2.1 REX/SDP Cabinet (Unit 1, Unit 2) Fault Isolation

6.2.1.1 Fault Monitoring

Continuous fault and performance monitoring is being performed on the REX/SDP channel at all times except when fault isolation is running, the channel is idle, or the channel is running in fixed PRI. The continuous fault monitoring performs fault detection and performance monitoring of all LRUs within the REX/SDP cabinet. The fault monitoring tasks include the following:

Continuous monitoring of the REX/SDP PSU fault status, UPS fault status and REX module fault status.

Continuous monitoring of the REX/SDP X and Y azimuth counts.

Continuous fault monitoring of the SDP modules when Online.

Performs REX/SDP RF End to End, Noise, and Stability tests during operation. Performance results are sent to the SCDIs for display.

All detected faults and any End to End, Noise, and Stability test result, which are outside of the expected normal range, are reported and logged in both SCDIs event logs.

6.2.1.2 REX/SDP Automatic Fault Isolation

A failure of any of the following Line Replaceable Units will be detected and reported on the Fault Isolation screen for the REX/SDP, refer to Figure 4-26:

Upconverter

Downconverter

Local Oscillator

Stability Monitor

RF Assembly

Single Board Computer (SBC)

Radar Interface Card (RIC)

Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

Plug-in SDP Power Supply

SDP UPS

REX Power Supply Unit

I/O Transition CCA

The REX/SDP channel fault isolation results screen will indicate the failed LRU, either as RED for a primary fault or as YELLOW for a secondary fault. Usually, only a single primary faulted LRU is identified.

To minimize MTTR, the appropriate Corrective Maintenance action is to replace the primary fault failed item using the PSR Removal and Installation Procedures defined in Paragraph 6.3. If this does not affect a repair then replace the secondary fault item, again using the PSR Removal and Installation Procedures defined in Paragraph 6.3.

After the installation of a serviceable replacement LRU, the "Run Test" button shall be activated to initiate the Automatic Fault Isolation test routine. If the failure has been successfully repaired, the test will be

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-14

complete with all LRUs showing a green (serviceable) status. The radar channel may then be returned to an Online role.

Automatic fault Isolation tests are performed sequentially under software control and interrupted (test sequence halted) on detection of the first failure. If multiple failures exist, the Automatic Fault Isolation sequence must be repeated until the REX/SDP Fault Isolation screen indicates “GREEN” (Fault Isolation tests completed without failure).

The test sequence for Automatic Fault Isolation is as follows:

SBC Diagnostic Test,

FI VME Bus Test,

Local Oscillator and Upconverter Test,

IQ Data Buffer Test,

Beam STC Data Buffer Test,

RIC Register Test,

Azimuth Encoder Test,

STC RAM Segment End Test,

Tx Interface Test,

PRI Measurement Test,

Beam STC Override Test,

UPS Fault Isolation Test,

STC RAM Segment Signature Test,

Fault Monitors Test,

FPDP Block Transfer Test,

SDP Data Path Test,

End to End Test Executive,

End to End Test Over Range,

Doppler Filter Test,

STC Attenuator Test Executive,

STC RAM Timing Test,

Noise Test Executive,

Stability Test Executive,

Check Bus Error Test

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-15

NOTE: In the event of a severe internal component failure, it is possible that the failed PSR channel may not configure properly after reboot. On such an occasion, the REX/SDP icon on the SCDI screen may remain grey, and there may or may not be a definitive indication of the source of the failure condition on the FI screen or in the alarm logs. Should this occur, the following diagnostic sequence should be carried out:

Note any relevant diagnostic information contained on SCDI screens or in SCDI alarm/error logs; if this information provides a definitive indication of the faulty LRU, replace the LRU with a functioning unit, otherwise continue the sequence.

Restart the PSR channel by cycling the power on the signal processor chassis (turn power off, wait 5 seconds, and turn power back on).

Once the channel returns to the On-Line state, run Manual FI and attempt to ascertain which LRU has caused the fault. If the faulty LRU is identified on the SCDI screen or in alarm log messages, replace the LRU with a functioning unit otherwise continue in this sequence.

Power down the channel signal processor chassis. Replace the SBC card with a functioning spare. Power up the signal processor. When the channel returns to the On-Line state, use Manual FI to determine if the health is restored. If health is not restored continue in this sequence.

Power down the channel signal processor chassis. Return the original SBC card to its signal processor card slot (remove the functioning spare inserted in the previous step). Replace the DSP card with a functioning spare. Power up the signal processor. When the channel returns to the On-Line state, use Manual FI to determine if health is restored. If health is not restored, continue in the sequence.

Power down the channel signal processor chassis. Return the original DSP card to its signal processor card slot (remove the functioning spare inserted in the previous step). Replace the RIC card with a functioning spare. Power up the signal processor. When the channel returns to the On-Line state, use Manual FI to determine if health is restored.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-16

6.2.1.3 REX/SDP Manual Fault Isolation using Built In Test Equipment (BITE)

Automatic Fault Isolation tests may also be performed manually in the Maintenance role to verify the failed LRU, aid in troubleshooting down to further LRU levels as well as to verify that a test failure no longer exists following replacement of a failed item.

Additional Manual Fault Isolation tests using the BITE are available to assist in isolating PSR failures in parameters such as Stability, Noise Level and End-To-End Signal Levels.

Manual Stability, Manual Noise, and Manual End-To-End test screens are used to configure the Manual Fault Isolation Test Path hardware to enable the test operator to perform selected tests under manual control. See Figure 6-2. All test results are displayed for review.

Figure 6-2. Manual Fault Isolation Test Path

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-17

6.2.1.3.1 Stability Test

The purpose of the Stability Test is to provide a qualitative measure of amplitude and phase stability. The Stability Test does not attempt to measure actual system stability, but will provide poor results when amplitude noise, phase noise, or other instabilities are present.

The Stability Test verifies the pulses within a Coherent Processing Interval (CPI) are all in phase with each other and have equal amplitude. When all the pulses in a CPI are in phase with no variation in amplitude, there is no Doppler. When the pulses are out of phase or there is a change in amplitude on any of the pulses, Doppler is present.

Two Doppler filters are used to support the Stability Test. The first has a peak about 0 × of phase (no Doppler); while the second has a valley about 0 × of phase, see Figure 6-3.

“Zero” Doppler “Non-Zero” Doppler

Figure 6-3. DASR Stability Filters

A Stability Test injects a test signal and filters it through these two filters. Stability is calculated by subtracting the output of the Stability Non-Zero Doppler Filter (valley about 0 x of phase) from the output of the Stability Zero Doppler Filter (peak about 0x of phase). In this ideal case, the highest stability occurs when the signal has 0 x of phase, and decreases as the signal moves away from 0 x of phase. Results are averaged and protected against performing invalid mathematical operations (such as attempting the log of 0).

This approach makes the test immune to fluctuations in the amplitude of the test signal across CPIs, provided the output of both filters is not limited by the Noise Floor. An increase in signal amplitude on all pulses will be present on the output of both filters, and will subtract out. This includes the Pulse Compressor gain, which increases the signal through both the Stability Zero Doppler Filter and the Stability Non-zero Doppler Filter.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-18

6.2.1.3.2 Configuring the Manual Stability Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation

To access the Manual Stability test control screen set the REX/SDP channel to maintenance. From the PSR pop-up window select the Manual Stability Test option, see Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4. Manual Stability Test Control Screen

The Manual Stability test control window allows selection of one of three RF sources; Exciter output, Transmitter Driver output or Transmitter output. The Transmitter Output selection is only valid when the REX/SDP under test is the selected channel.

RF pulses from the selected sample can either be injected through the RF Assembly (High or Low beam for target channel only) or directly into the Downconverter.

Stability tests are initiated by activating the "Run Test" button and stopped by activating the "Stop Test" button.

This test facility will allow the operator to eliminate or isolate individual LRUs and RF paths as the cause of stability faults by selecting different RF sources and RF paths.

The faulty LRU must be replaced: refer to Paragraph 6.3.

The Manual Stability test control window allows the following selections to be tailored for confirming fault monitoring / fault isolation (FM/FI) failures and/or further fault isolation of degraded components where FM/FI does not fully identify faulty LRU.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-19

Manual Stability Test Control/Result Screen Selections

Control Description

Loopback Controls the Sample Select switch A2S1 within the Stability Monitor assembly. Exciter (Upconverter), Transmitter Driver and Transmitter Samples can be individually selected for stability testing.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual stage in the Exciter or Transmitter hardware has degraded the overall stability of the PSR System. In general terms, the stability of the Upconverter should be equal to or better than the Transmitter Driver, which should be better than that of the overall Transmitter.

NOTE: Transmitter sample selection is only valid for a selected REX/SDP channel.

Injection Controls the Test Path Select switches A1S1, A3S1 and A4S1 in the RF Assembly, Weather (Wx) Downconverter and Target Downconverter respectively. The selected sample can be injected through the RF Assembly (“Normal”) or directly into the Downconverters (“Bypass”) by bypassing the RF Assembly front end.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual stage within the receiver has degraded the overall stability of the PSR System. In general terms, the stability of the sample bypassing the RF Assembly (directly into DCON) should be equal to or better than the stability of the same sample looped through the RF Assembly.

NOTE: To avoid interference from Antenna returns, Receiver inputs should be terminated for testing through the RF Assembly on the selected PSR channel.

Beam Controls the Target Channel Beam Select switch A1S2 within the RF Assembly. For tests looped through the RF Assembly, operation of this control determines which Target Receiver (High or Low Beam) output is tested.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual receiver has degraded the overall stability of the Target channel. In general terms, both High and Low Beam Target channels should have equal stability.

NOTE: This control is only valid for tests looped through the RF Assembly.

There are various combinations available to the maintenance operator with corresponding results. Table 6-1 below illustrates the test configuration and the expected nominal test results for the Stability Tests performed as part of the FM/FI test suites. All FM/FI Stability tests can be simulated manually by setting the options defined in the Tables below.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-20

Table 6-1. REX/SDP Manual Stability Tests of Standby PSR Channel

Event ID

(Appendix 6) Test Description

Channel

Configuration Test Dependent Parameters

Expected Result

(dB)

Loopback Injection Beam

FM TEST

1633 High Beam SP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly Hi ≥ 55

High Beam SP Stability Test Selected Transmitter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

1634 High Beam LP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly Hi ≥ 55

High Beam SP Stability Test Selected Transmitter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

1635 Low Beam SP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly ≥ 55

1636 Low Beam LP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly ≥ 55

1637 Wx Beam SP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly Hi/Lo ≥ 55

Wx Beam SP Stability Test Selected Transmitter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

1638 Wx Beam LP Stability Test Standby Tx Driver RF Assembly Hi/Lo ≥ 55

Wx Beam LP Stability Test Selected Transmitter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

FI TEST

1703 RF Bypassed Stability Test Either Exciter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

1704 High/Wx RF Assy Stability Test

Either Exciter RF Assembly Hi ≥ 55

1705 Low/Wx RF Assy Stability Test

Either Exciter RF Assembly Lo ≥ 55

1706 Transmitter Driver Stability Test

Either Tx Driver Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

1707 Transmitter Amplifier Stability Test

Selected Transmitter Downconverter N/A ≥ 55

NOTE: During FM, stability testing of the selected REX/SDP channel loops the Transmitter Sample directly into the Downconverter Input. Any stability alarms in the Target Channel will be identified as “High Beam” faults even though there is no High or Low Beam associated with this test.

Tests in the Standby REX/SDP channel loop the Driver Sample through the RF Assembly. All receive paths are valid during these tests.

Each Target High and Target Low Beam Stability test has an associated Weather Channel test/result.

This test facility will allow the operator to eliminate or isolate individual LRUs and RF paths as the cause of Stability Test faults by selecting the different parameters. When used properly, the manual Stability Test control window provides a flexible tool for aiding in the troubleshooting and confirmation of faulty hardware within the REX/SDP.

Stability testing is the most sensitive test performed as part of the REX/SDP FM/FI Testing.

Failures and even variations in results between Target and Weather, Target High and Target Low

* *

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-21

and Injection samples can aid in determining where degradation within a component or path has affected system performance.

In general terms: Exciter Stability ≥ Tx Driver Stability ≥ Transmitter Stability Further Fault isolation down to cables, connectors and associated interfaces can be performed by manual means. While referring to the Manual Fault Isolation Test Path diagram Figure 6-2, ensure all cables and interconnects within the test path are firmly seated and replace any that appear to be faulty or degraded. Viewing the test results in continuous mode will aid in locating faulty and/or intermittent connection and hardware.

Where further fault isolation into the SDP is required, start by swapping SDP hardware (SBC, DSP, and RIC CCAs) between Target and Weather Channels of the REX/SDP in question. Re-run associated tests to determine any conditions that follow the hardware reconfiguration. Review Paragraph 6.3 for any Versa Module Eurocard (VME) Slot dependent LRUs.

Any faulty LRU must be replaced: refer to Paragraph 6.3.

All FM/FI simulated tests (not using the Tx Sample) can be performed on a standby REX/ SDP Channel. Perform Stability Testing on the standby REX/SDP Channel as follows:

1. At the Online selected SCDI (A) or (B), place the PSR channel to be tested to the maintenance standby role. (The alternate PSR channel is set to the Online selected role).

2. Select Fault Isolation ---> Manual Stability Tests from the pop-up menu and observe that the REX/SDP Stability Tests screen appears.

3. Perform the tests listed in Table 6-1 (except Transmitter related testing) by selecting test parameters from the table, and then clicking on the Run Test button. Verify that the result obtained for each test is greater than 55 dB for Long and Short Pulse with input into the Downconverter or RF Assembly.

4. Select Stop Test at the end of all tests.

All FM/FI simulated tests can be performed on a selected REX/SDP Channel. Perform Stability Testing on the selected REX/SDP Channel as follows:

WARNING

The steps in this procedure will configure both PSR Channels to maintenance. In this mode, Radar data is unavailable to ATC Operations.

1. At the Online selected SCDI (A) or (B), place the PSR channel to be tested to the maintenance-

selected role. (The alternate PSR channel is set to the maintenance standby role with Channel Processing set to idle). Select Fault Isolation → Manual Stability Tests from the pop-up menu and observe that the REX/SDP Stability Tests screen appears.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-22

2. Perform the tests listed in Table 6-1 by selecting test parameters from the table, and then clicking

on the Run Test button. Verify that the result obtained for each test is greater than 55 dB for Long and Short Pulse with input into the Downconverter or RF Assembly.

3. Select Stop Test at the end of all tests.

6.2.1.3.3 Noise Test

Noise Testing – General

Noise testing consists of isolating the receiver from the Antenna by asserting 72 dB of Sensitivity Time Control (STC) within the RF Assembly, taking range samples within a CPI, Doppler filtering them, converting them to a log value and subtracting the (theoretical) ideal noise floor of the receiver. The Noise Test result is displayed as a dB difference between the Noise Test average and the theoretical noise floor of the receiver. The Noise test result is equivalent to: Noise Test Result = Noise * Receiver Gain

= Noise at STC Attenuator (dBm) + Receiver Gain (dB)

= Noise At STC Attenuator + RF Assy Noise Gain + Cable W23 or W24 + DCON Gain + log (SDP Input Scaling) + log (Target Doppler Filter Noise Gain) {log (Wx Clutter Reject Filter Noise Gain)}

= -111.1dBm + 27.4dB - 0.9dB + 103.34dB + 66.23dB – 61.28dB {-41.26dB}

= 23.7 dB {43.7 dB}

Where:

Noise at STC Attenuator =10 * log (KTB) – Knf

= -114dBm – 2.9 dB

= -111.1 dBm

RF Assembly Gain (Noise) = LNA Gain – W1/W5 – Target Switch

= (+30 dB – 1.1 dB) – 0.5 dB - 1.0 dB

= 27.4 dB

Loss, cable W23 or W24 = -0.9 dB

DCON Gain = 103.34 dB

log (SDP Input Scaling) = 66.23 dB

log (Tgt DF Noise Gain) = 10 * log (S (coefficients2))

= - 61.28 dB {-41.26 dB}

NOTES: Items in { } indicate Weather Channel data/results.

See Figure 6-2: Manual Fault Isolation Test Path.

All test results are displayed as a dB difference relative to the theoretical Target and Weather noise floors calculated above.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-23

6.2.1.3.4 Configuring the Manual Noise Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation

To access the Manual Noise Test control screen set the REX/SDP channel to maintenance. From the PSR pop-up window select the Manual Noise Test option, see Figure 6-5

Figure 6-5. REX/SDP Channel A Manual Noise Tests Screen

The Manual Noise test control window allows the following selections to be tailored for confirming FM and FI failures and/or further fault isolation of degraded components, where FM/FI does not fully identify faulty LRM.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-24

Manual Noise Tests Screen Selections

Control Description

Pulse (Target/Weather) Select Short for tests bypassing Pulse Compression and Long for tests including Pulse Compression.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if the Pulse Compressor CCA has degraded the overall noise floor of the PSR System. In general terms, results should be the same.

Beam Controls the Target Channel Beam Select switch A1S2 within the RF Assembly. Operation of this control determines which Target Receiver (High or Low Beam) path is included in the test.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual receiver has degraded the overall noise floor of the Target channel. In general terms, both High and Low Beam Target channels should have equal noise floors.

Number of CPIs Sets the number of CPIs that are used to produce the noise test result.

Range Gate Index Controls the location (in range) where the noise samples are taken from. Each range gate corresponds to a 1/16 of a nmi. (48 range gates = 3 nmi).

Weather Filter Number Controls which Weather Filter is used in processing the Noise test samples for the Weather Channel.

Test Cycling Controls whether the test is performed once (single result displayed) or multiple times (results are displayed continuously).

Run/Stop Test Noise tests are initiated by activating the "Run Test" button and stopped by activating the "Stop Test" button.

There are various combinations available to the Maintenance operator with corresponding results. The table below illustrates the test configuration and the expected nominal test results for the Noise Tests performed as part of the FM & FI test suites. All FM/FI Noise tests can be simulated manually by setting the options defined in Table 6-2.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-25

Table 6-2. Manual Noise Testing Configuration for Simulating FM/FI Tests

Event ID

(Appendix 6A)

Test Description Test Dependent Parameters Nominal Result

Pulse

(T/W) Beam # CPIs Wx Fltr

dB

FM TESTS

1628 High Beam Absolute Noise Test Long HI 100 0 0 +/- 5

1629 Low Beam Absolute Noise Test Long LO 100 0 0 +/- 5

1630 Short Pulse Absolute Noise Test Short HI/LO 100 0 0 +/- 5

1631 Wx Beam Absolute Noise Test Long N/A 100 0 0 +/- 5

1632 High/low Beam Relative Noise Test Delta between High Beam Absolute Noise Alarm and Low Beam Absolute Noise Alarm

0 +/- 4

FI TESTS

1697 Downconverter Noise Test (Note 1) Short HI 100 0 0 +/- 5

1698 High Beam Short Pulse Noise Test Short HI 100 0 0 +/- 5

1699 High Beam Long Pulse Noise Test Long HI 100 0 0 +/- 5

1700 Low Beam Short Pulse Noise Test Short LO 100 0 0 +/- 5

1701 Low Beam Long Pulse Noise Test Long LO 100 0 0 +/- 5

1702 Relative Noise Test Delta between all SP and LP Noise tests in the High Beam, Low Beam and Wx channels.

0 +/- 4

This test facility will allow the operator to eliminate or isolate individual LRUs and RF paths as the cause of Noise Test faults by selecting different parameters and RF ranges. When used properly, the manual Noise Test control window provides a flexible tool for aiding in the troubleshooting and confirmation of faulty hardware within the REX/SDP.

All nominal results have associated software limits. Because the operating frequency, gain through the individual components and temperature can greatly impact results, nominal limits should be used as a guideline during troubleshooting. By performing the appropriate testing, comparisons between Target and Wx, Target High and Target Low results can aid in determining where degradation within a component or path has affected system performance.

Further Fault isolation down to cables, connectors and associated interfaces can be performed by manual means. While referring to the Manual Fault Isolation Test Path diagram of Figure 6-2, ensure all cables and interconnects within the test path are firmly seated and replace any that appear to be faulty or degraded. Viewing the test results in continuous mode will aid in locating faulty and/or intermittent connection and hardware.

Where further fault isolation into the SDP is required, start by swapping SDP hardware (SBC, DSP, and RIC CCAs) between Target and Wx Channels of the REX/SDP in question.

Re-run associated tests to determine any conditions that follow the hardware reconfiguration. Review Paragraph 6.3 for any VME Slot dependent LRUs.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-26

Any faulty LRU must be replaced refer: to Paragraph 6.3.

In the Noise Test, the BITE signal (Upconverter Sample) is injected into the front end of the receiver. The Target Channel and Wx Channel noise levels are given in dB.

All FM/FI simulated tests can be performed on a standby REX/SDP Channel. Perform Noise Testing on the standby REX/SDP Channel as follows:

1. At the Online selected SCDI (A) or (B) ensure that PSR channel being tested is still in maintenance standby.

2. Select Fault Isolation → Manual Noise Tests from the pop-up menu and observe that the REX/SDP Manual Noise Tests screen appears.

3. Perform the Noise Tests listed in Table 6-2 by selecting test parameters from the table on the screen and then clicking on the Run Test button. Verify that the results obtained for each test are 0 dB + 5 dB.

6.2.1.3.5 End-To-End Test

The purpose of the End-To-End Test is to provide an overall indication of the PSR Receiver operating parameters.

End-To-End test signals can be generated and looped through the entire Receiver section of the REX/SDP. Test signals are processed and analyzed to determine when system operating parameters are outside expected limits. Long Pulse and Short Pulse test signals at varied phase rates provide status of the Pulse Compression and Doppler Filtering characteristics within the SDP.

6.2.1.3.6 Configuring the Manual End to End Test Screen for Fault Verification/Isolation

To access the Manual End-To-End Test control screen set the REX/SDP channel to maintenance. From the PSR pop-up window select the Manual End-To-End Test option, see Figure 6-6.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-27

Figure 6-6. REX/SDP Channel End-To-End Tests Screen

The Manual End-To-End Test control window allows the following selections to be tailored for confirming FM and FI failures and/or further fault isolation of degraded components where FM/FI does not fully identify faulty LRM.

Manual End-To-End Test Screen Selections Control Description

Pulse (Target/Wx): Select Short for generating Short Pulse test targets and Long for generating Long Pulse test targets.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining the Pulse Compression performance of the PSR System.

Test Source: Controls the Sample Select switch A2S1 within the Stability Monitor assembly. Only Upconverter (UPCONV) test signals are generated for use in the End-To-End testing. Selecting “OFF” disables generation of the End-To-End test signal.

STC Controls the STC Attenuator within the Wx (A1Z1) and selected Target Channel (A2Z1 / A3Z1) receive paths. Settings 0 through 12 corresponding to attenuation values of 0dB to 72dB (6dB steps), are available.

Proper use of this control will aid in determining the performance of the STC within each of the receiver paths.

Downconverter Test Controls the DCON Test switches A3S1 and A4S1 in the Wx and Target Downconverters respectively. This control is used in conjunction with the “Test Path” control and should be set to “Signal” for tests run through the RF Assembly.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual stage within the

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-28

receiver has degraded the overall gain of the receiver.

Number of CPIs Sets the number of CPIs that are used to produce the average displayed End-To-End Test result.

Range Gate Index Controls the location (in range) where the End-To-End samples are taken. Each range gate corresponds to a 1/16 of a nmi. (48 range gates = 3 nmi).

Test Cycling Controls whether the test is performed once (single result displayed) or multiple times (results are displayed continuously).

Doppler This control sets the phase rate of the RF Test Target, from 0 to 360 ° in 22.5 ° steps.

NOTE: 16 versions of test waveforms exist within the Upconverter Waveform PROM, each 22.5 ° out of phase. To inject an RF Test Target with 0 ° of phase, the same test waveform is repeated for each pulse in the CPI. To inject an RF Test Target with 22.5 ° of phase, each pulse in the CPI uses the next version (i.e. phase difference between each successive pulse within the CPI is 22.5 °). Similarly, to inject an RF Test Target with 45 ° of phase, each pulse in the CPI uses the second next version (i.e. phase difference between each successive pulse within the CPI is 2 * 22.5 or 45°).

Test Path Controls the Test Path Select switch A1S1 in the RFAssembly. The selected sample can be injected through the RF Assembly (“Normal”) or directly into the Downconverters (“Bypass”) by bypassing the RF Assembly front end.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual stage within the Receiver has degraded the overall gain of the Receiver.

Beam Controls the Target Channel Beam Select switch A1S2 within the RF Assembly. Operation of this control determines which Target Receiver (High or Low Beam) path is included in the test.

Proper use of this control can aid in determining if an individual Receiver has degraded the overall gain of the Target channel. In general terms, both High and Low Beam Target channels should have the same gain.

Target Filter Controls which Target Doppler Filter is used to process the End-To- End Test Signal in the Target Channel.

Weather Filter Number Controls which Weather Doppler Filter is used to process the End-To-End

Test Signal in the Weather Channel.

Run/Stop Test End-To-End tests are initiated by activating the "Run Test" button and stopped by activating the "Stop Test" button.

There are numerous combinations available to the maintenance operator with corresponding results. The tables below illustrate the test configuration and the expected nominal test results for the End-To-End tests performed as part of the FM & FI test suites. All FM/FI End-To-End tests can be simulated manually by setting the options defined in the Tables below.

Table 6-3. Manual End-To-End Testing Configuration For Simulating FM Tests

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-29

Event ID

(Appendix 6A) FM Test Description Test Dependent Parameters

Expected Result

Pulse (T/W)

Test Source

STC DCONTest

Phase Rate

(Doppler)

Test Path

Beam Tgt

Filter Wx

Filter Nom. (dB)

Absolute End-To-End Tests

1596 High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 76.8

1605 Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 76.8

1614 Weather LP 0 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF HI/LO 0 0 76.8

1597 High Beam LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal 90 (4) RF HI 1 3 40.5

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-30

Table 6-3. Manual End-To-End Testing Configuration For Simulating FM Tests (Continued)

1606 Low Beam LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal -90 (12) RF LO 4 3 40.5

1615 Weather LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal 90 (4) RF HI/LO 1 3 43.5

1598 High Beam LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal -90 (12) RF HI 4 1 40.5

1607 Low Beam LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal 90 (4) RF LO 1 1 40.5

1616 Weather LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE Long Upconv 36 Signal -90 (12) RF HI/LO 4 1 40.6

1599 High Beam LP 54 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 54 Signal 135 (6) RF HI 2 2 22.4

1608 Low Beam LP 54 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 54 Signal -135 (10) RF LO 3 2 22.4

1617 Weather LP 54 dB Abs ETE Long Upconv 54 Signal 135 (6) RF HI/LO 2 2 22.7

1600 High Beam SP 0 dB Abs ETE Short Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 56.0

1609 Low Beam SP 0 dB Abs ETE Short Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 56.0

1618 Weather SP 0 dB Abs ETE Short Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF HI/LO 0 0 56.0

Relative End-To-End Tests

1601 High Beam LP 36 dB #1 Rel ETE High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - High Beam LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE 36.3

1610 Low Beam LP 36 dB #1 Rel ETE Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Low Beam LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE 36.3

1619 Weather LP 36 dB #1 Rel ETE Weather LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Weather LP 36 dB #1 Abs ETE 33.3

1602 High Beam LP 36 dB #2 Rel ETE High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - High Beam LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE 36.3

1611 Low Beam LP 36 dB #2 Rel ETE Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Low Beam LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE 36.3

1620 Weather LP 36 dB #2 Rel ETE Weather LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Weather LP 36 dB #2 Abs ETE 33.6

1603 High Beam LP 54 dB Rel ETE High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - High Beam LP 54 dB Rel ETE 54.4

1612 Low Beam LP 54 dB Rel ETE Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Low Beam LP 54 dB Rel ETE 54.4

1621 Weather LP 54 dB Rel ETE Weather LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Weather LP 54 dB Rel ETE 54.1

1604 High Beam LP/SP Rel ETE High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - High Beam SP 0 dB Abs ETE 20.8

1613 Low Beam LP/SP Rel ETE Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Low Beam SP 0 dB Abs ETE 20.8

1622 Weather LP/SP Rel ETE Weather LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Weather SP 0 dB Abs ETE 20.8

1623 High/low Beam Relative ETE High Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE - Low Beam LP 0 dB Abs ETE 0.0

Table 6-4. Manual End-To-End Testing Configuration for Simulating FI Tests

Event ID

(Appendix 6A) FI Test Description Test Dependent Parameters

Expected Result

Pulse(T/W)

Test Source

STC DCONTest

Phase Rate

(Doppler)

Test Path

Beam Tgt

Filter Wx

Filter Nom. (dB)

1688 Downconverter ETE Test Long Upconv 0 Test 0 (0) DCON N/A 0 0 75.9

1689 High/Weather RF Assy ETE Test Long Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 76.8

1690 Low/Weather RF Assy ETE Test Long Upconv 0 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 76.8

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-31

Table 6-4. Manual End-To-End Testing configuration for Simulating FI Tests (Continued)

1691 High/Weather Absolute STC Atten Test Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 Note1

1692 High/Weather Relative STC Atten Test Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 Note1

1693 High/Weather Incremental STC Atten Test

Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF HI 0 0 Note1

1694 Low/Weather Absolute STC Atten Test Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 Note1

1695 Low/Weather Relative STC Atten Test Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 Note1

1696 Low/Weather Incremental STC Atten Test

Long Upconv Note1 Signal 0 (0) RF LO 0 0 Note1

1708 End To End Range Test Short Upconv 0 Test 0 (0) DCON N/A 0 0 55.1

Note 1: Absolute, Relative and Incremental STC Testing is performed at each STC setting from 0dB (setting = 0) through to 72dB (setting = 12). The amplitude at each setting is used to produce results used by each test according to:

Absolute Testing:

Determines whether the absolute amplitude at each STC setting is within expected limits. Nominal expectations for the 0dB setting is 78.6 dB. Nominal expectations for the remainder of the settings decrease by 6dB with each increase of the STC value (i.e. 78.6, 72.6, 66.6, 60.6 for STC settings 0, 1, 2, 3).

Relative Testing:

Determines whether the absolute amplitude at each STC setting relative to the absolute amplitude at the 0dB setting is within expected limits. Based on Absolute Testing, expectations for this test are equivalent to the STC setting selected (i.e. 6dB for STC setting 1, 12 dB for STC setting 2 etc.). Incremental Testing:

Determines whether the absolute amplitude at each STC setting relative to the absolute amplitude at the previous STC setting is within expected limits. Based on Absolute Testing, expectations for this test are 6dB at all STC settings.

Note 2: Setting of the following controls should have no effect on the nominal results

obtained and can be varied within each test:

Number of CPIs

Range Gate Index

Test Cycling This test facility allows the operator to individually test the control and operation of RF test path switches and STC attenuators within the test path and generation of short and long RF test pulses with simulated phase rates at various ranges using different Doppler Filters. When used properly, the manual End to End control window provides a flexible tool for aiding in the troubleshooting and confirmation of faulty hardware within the REX/SDP.

All nominal results have associated software limits to compensate for the operating frequency, gain through the individual components and temperature for all manufactured systems. For troubleshooting purposes, limits for all test should be considered to be ± 4dB from the expected nominal results. By performing the appropriate testing, comparisons between Target and Weather,

Target High and Target Low results through each of the different paths can aid in determining where degradation within a component or path has affected system performance.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-32

Further Fault isolation down to cables, connectors and associated interfaces can be performed by manual means. While referring to the Manual Fault Isolation Test Path diagram of Figure 6-2, ensure all cables and interconnects within the test path are firmly seated and replace any that appear to be faulty or degraded. Viewing the test results in continuous mode will aid in locating faulty and/or intermittent connection and hardware.

Where further fault isolation into the SDP is required, start by replacing SDP hardware (SBC, DSP, and RIC CCAs) of the REX/SDP in question. Refer to REX/SDP Automatic Fault Isolation, Paragraph 6.2.1.2. Re-run associated tests to determine any conditions that follow the hardware reconfiguration. Review Paragraph 6.3 for any VME Slot dependant LRUs.

Any faulty LRU must be replaced: refer to Paragraph 6.3.

All FM/FI simulated tests can be performed on a standby REX/SDP Channel. Perform End-To-End Testing on the standby REX/SDP Channel as follows:

1. At the Online selected SCDI (A) or (B), ensure that PSR channel being tested is in the maintenance standby role.

2. Select Fault Isolation --> Manual End to End Tests from the pop-up menu and observe that the REX/SDP Manual End to End Tests screen appears.

3. Select Test Cycling -> Continuous.

4. Perform the appropriate tests by selecting test parameters from the tables above and then clicking on the Run Test button.

5. Verify that results for each test are consistent with expected results in the Tables.

6. Select Stop Test at end of each test result and before selecting the next set of test parameters from the tables.

7. Select Stop Test at the end of all tests. 6.2.1.4 Other REX/SDP Manual Fault Isolation

If a replacement module does not correct the fault indication, carry out a manual fault isolation procedure. This will involve physical examination of interfacing cables in association with electrical continuity checks.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-33

6.2.2 Transmitter RF Cabinet and Power Supply Cabinet (Unit 3, Unit 4) Fault Isolation

6.2.2.1 Automatic Fault Isolation of LRUs

Failure of any of the following LRUs will be detected and reported on the Detailed Status screen for the transmitter, refer to Figure 4-45.

RF Amplifier Module

Power Supply Unit

Fan Assembly

Transmitter Control and Monitor Module (TCMM) CCAs

RF Transfer Switches (part of the Waveguide Pallet)

The Corrective Maintenance action required is to replace the failed LRU, refer to Removal and Installation Procedures defined in Paragraph 6.3.

Installation of a serviceable item will result in the status on the Detailed Status screen returning to green (serviceable).


6.2.2.2 Duty Cycle and Pulse Width Faults

Duty Cycle faults are reported, if the transmitter BITE detects that the overall duty cycle exceeds 11.1%. If this fault is detected, manual fault isolation procedures will be required. This typically will include use of standard test equipment to examine timing signals between the RIC CCA and the Upconverter for erratic triggering, or for the presence of noise on these signals indicating wiring failures.

Pulse Width faults are reported, if the transmitter BITE detects that the normal sequence of a short pulse, followed by a long pulse in one PRI (Pulse Repetition Period), results in a total transmitter on-time of greater than 115 µsec. If this situation is detected, manual fault isolation procedures, using standard test equipment, will be required to examine the RF trigger signals sent to the transmitter. Erratic triggering or the presence of noise on these signals will indicate wiring failures. For pin numbers and jack names refer to Figure 2-21, Figure 2-24, Figure 2-27, and Figure 2-49. If a failure is isolated, replace faulty LRU in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.

6.2.2.3 Reverse Power Faults

A reverse power fault may result in the shutdown of the transmitter. This fault is declared when a high reverse power level is detected. If the fault condition occurs frequently or persists, it is indicative of a potential high insertion loss, mismatch in the waveguide or a fault in the monitoring circuit. Manual fault isolation procedures using standard test equipment will be required to identify the faulty waveguide element or LRU. If a failure is isolated, replace faulty LRU in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.

6.2.2.4 Forward Power Fault

A forward power fault is indicated when the output power of the transmitter falls below the minimum level for normal operations. Typically, this fault report occurs in conjunction with the failure of more than one amplifier module. If a fault is reported and all amplifier modules are confirmed to be operating normally,

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-34

proceed with a manual fault isolation using standard test equipment. Identify the location of a high insertion loss element in the waveguide combiner or waveguide elements, between the combiner and the Waveguide Assembly coupler. If a failure is isolated, replace the faulty LRU in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-35

6.2.3 Waveguide Assembly (Unit 6) Fault Isolation

6.2.3.1 Automatic Fault Isolation of Line Replaceable Items (LRIs)

A failure of any of the following modules will be detected and reported on the Detailed Status screen for the transmitter, refer to Chapter 4.

RF Transfer Switches

To replace the faulty item, refer to Paragraph 6.3.

Installation of a serviceable item should result in the status on the Detailed Status screen returning to green.


6.2.3.2 Manual Fault Isolation of LRIs

Manual fault isolation procedures using standard test equipment will be required to isolate faults in the following LRIs:

Waveguide Couplers

Waveguide Circulator

Waveguide Receiver Protector (Limiter)

Co-axial Receiver Protectors (Limiters)

Co-axial BITE components (Splitters, Detectors, etc.)

If a failure is isolated, replace the faulty LRI in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.

6.2.3.3 Waveguide Couplers

The typical failure mechanism for these LRIs is failure of one of the coupled ports. Using a power meter to isolate a faulty waveguide coupler, compare the power levels measured at both the forward and the reverse coupled ports. The relative power levels should be consistent with the coupled values marked on the waveguide coupler.

6.2.3.4 Waveguide Circulator

The typical failure mechanism for this LRI is an increased in the insertion loss/return loss. Using a power meter to isolate a faulty waveguide circulator, compare the power levels measured at the transmitter waveguide coupler and the antenna waveguide coupler. The difference in power levels is equivalent to the insertion loss/return loss of the waveguide circulator.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-36

6.2.3.5 Waveguide Receiver Protector (Limiter)

The typical failure mechanism of this LRI is an increase in the insertion loss. If it is suspected through an analysis of system performance involving a comparison of the receive levels in the redundant receiver cabinets that a waveguide receiver protector is failing then the component should be changed out and system performance reassessed.

6.2.3.6 Coaxial Receiver Protector (Limiter)

The typical failure mechanism of this LRI is an increase in insertion loss. If it is suspected through an analysis of system performance involving a comparison of the receive levels in the redundant receiver cabinets that a co-axial receiver protector is failing then the component should be changed out and system performance reassessed.

6.2.3.7 Coaxial BITE Components

These passive components can be fault isolated by removing the components from the system. Using standard test equipment, measure key parameters such as insertion loss.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-37

6.2.4 Common Equipment Cabinet (CEC) Unit 7 Fault Isolation

6.2.4.1 Automatic Fault Isolation

The auto fault isolation embedded within the CEC will identify specific LRUs as defective, based upon the BITE test points available or the system functionality affected by the failure. In these cases, the associated LRU box will turn red indicating the failed LRU. To Repair the faulty unit, refer to Paragraph 6.3. If the auto fault isolation does not indicate which LRU has failed, carry out the following manual fault isolation procedures.

6.2.4.2 Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) Manual Fault Isolation

The FMAC is comprised of individual modules performing varied functions. Fault isolation for each is as follows:

a. CPU Module

Verify power lamp is illuminated. If not, check power supply module.

Verify the run lamp is illuminated. If not, replace EEPROM module.

Replace the FMAC. Refer to Paragraph 6.3.5.1.

b. Serial Interface module

Verify that the front panel connector is fully seated.


c. Status Input Module

Verify the status LEDS for inputs are correct (compare with alternate FMAC).

Verify connections on Common Equipment Cabinet are secure.


d. Control Output Module

Verify the status LEDs for the output commands are correct (compare with alternate FMAC).

Verify that the common +24VDC or GND reference are connected to the module.

Verify connections on Common Equipment Cabinet are secure.


e. Azimuth Input module

Connect an Oscilloscope to the spare port of the Azimuth Output Module to verify data available.

If both FMACs provide no azimuth data, the problem is lack of encoder data, refer to fault isolation procedure in Paragraph 6.2.6.3.

If there is no azimuth to either the PSR or the MSSR from one FMAC only, replace the FMAC. Refer to Paragraph 6.3.5.1.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-38

f. Azimuth Output Module

Connect an Oscilloscope to the spare port of the Azimuth Input Module to verify the other module is outputting valid azimuth data.

If there is azimuth data, replace the FMAC. Refer to Paragraph 6.3.5.1.

g. Analog Multiplexer Module

Verify that the channel selection LEDS are strobing as the CPU selects each channel. If not, check cabling to MUX, then check CPU module.

6.2.4.3 UPS Manual Fault Isolation

Fault isolate as follows:

Verify that the UPS front panel indicators show input voltage is valid and it is normal operating mode.

If input voltage is out of spec, correct supply.

If UPS remains in bypass, replace unit, refer to Paragraph 6.3.1.16.

6.2.4.4 SCDI Manual Fault Isolation

The SCDI is a HP workstation running the SCDI applications under the CentOS operating system and serves as the interface between the technician and the radar system. If a SCDI fails, there will not be a menu indication. If the workstation does not boot the application, or the SCDI is not running correctly, perform the following steps.

Select Local Workstation Actions. Shutdown SCDI, then restart.

If the CentOS OS boots up (blue background) but no SCDI application starts, re-install the SCDI application software, paragraph 6.3.5.3.1 (ensure that the site adaptation data is restored from the alternate SCDI).

If software still not boot up, perform a complete installation of both Solaris & SCDI application, refer to paragraph 6.3.5.3.1 (ensure that the site adaptation data is restored from the alternate SCDI or backups).

If installing the software does not correct the problem, replace the SCDI. Refer to Paragraph 6.3.5.3.

6.2.4.5 Ethernet Manual Fault Isolation

Fault isolate as follows: Verify that Ethernet connections from the SCDI are correct.

Verify that the green activity lamp on the each transceiver is illuminated.

Verify that the PSR Ethernet connections are correct.

Verify that there are at least two active devices on the Ethernet

NOTE: A single SCDI with no other devices on the network cannot declare the Ethernet as serviceable.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-39

6.2.4.6 MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server Manual Fault Isolation

In the event of a communications link fault between the SCDI and the MSSR/RDR equipment, it is possible that either the interface hardware may be faulty or the HDLC drivers have failed as a result of excessive link errors.

Verify that the communications equipment connected to the common equipment cabinet is fully serviceable. Loss of transmit data clock can cause link failure on data lines.

Attempt to reset the MPS-800 server by performing the following actions. Downtime is recommended since on rare occasions the shutdown of one SCDI has caused an unrequested reboot of the other SCDI.

Take control at the working SCDI workstation.

Transition the affected SCDI to maintenance standby.

At the affected SCDI click on the grey background and select “Local Workstation Actions…”

Click the “SCDI Shutdown” button in the local workstation actions window.

Enter the site username and password when prompted and click “ENTER”. After some time the SCDI should show the “OK” prompt.

Turn off the affected MPS-800 server using the power switch located on the back of the unit. The switch can be accessed through the back door of cabinet 7.

NOTE: Be careful to turn off the correct MPS-800. The lower MPS is obscured from view by the mini-repeater shelf.

At the SCDI “OK” prompt type: boot and then press the Enter key.

Wait until the SCDI begins to boot Solaris (twirling cursor disappears), then turn on the MPS-800.

Wait at least 30 seconds. Verify communication with MSSR’s on affected SCDI, by observing the Communication Interface Screen, prior to transitioning the freshly booted SCDI to online selected.

If the fault has not cleared, replace the MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server. Refer to Paragraph 6.3.5.10 [Build 12 or higher] or paragraph 6.3.5.11 [Build 11 or lower].

6.2.5 RCP Fault Isolation

The following RCP faults can be isolated: communication error/fault, failure of any of the LEDs, failure of the audible alarm, button failure, power supply failure.

Communication failure is indicated by RED LED on panel indicator with all other LEDs off and continuous audible alarm present. Failure of the individual LEDs can be isolated by pressing LAMP TEST button. All LEDs should illuminate for 10 seconds. A failure of the audible alarm failure can be isolated by pressing VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN buttons, as each press outputs a sound for 1 second. Individual button faults can be isolated by pressing valid commands when Radar Control Panel is in control (TAKE CONTROL is GREEN). Requested state LEDs should be flashing. When power supply fails, no LEDs will be illuminated and no audible alarm will be present.

In case any of the above failures occur, replace the unit in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.

**

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-40

6.2.6 APG Fault Isolation

6.2.6.1 APG Status Monitoring Functions

Motor/Gearbox A and B (35A1) and (35A2)

Motor Controller A (14) and B (15)

Status readback is from the motor controller. Normally GREEN indication. RED indicates a failure of the motor controller, or interconnect malfunction between the motor controller and U7A15J52 CEC. Motor Controller is reset by a Motor Run Command.

Gearbox Oil Level A and B

Sensors 35A1A1S2 (35A2A1S2) are factory set. Optical site glass is for visual monitoring of oil level. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates low oil level, failure of the sensor, oil level transition module or interconnect malfunction between the sensor and U7A15J10 CEC.

Gearbox Oil Over Temperature A and B

Sensors 35A1A1S1 (35A2A1S1) are factory set at +100 ° C. Normally GREEN indication on the Operator Maintenance Terminal (OMT). RED indicates high gearbox oil temperature, failure of the sensor or interconnect malfunction between the sensor and U7A15J10 CEC.

Clutch Engaged A and B

Sensors 35A1S1 (35A2S1). Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates the clutch is not fully engaged, sensor is faulty/not properly adjusted or interconnect malfunction between the sensor and U7A15J52 CEC.

MAIN SUMP OIL LUBRICATION

Pedestal Oil Level

Sensor 35S2. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates the oil level is low, failure of the sensor or interconnect malfunction between the sensor and U7A15J10.

Pedestal Oil Under Temperature

Sensor 35S7 is factory set at -10 ° C. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED Indicates a low pedestal oil temperature, failure of the sensor, failure of the pedestal oil sump, heaters on, thermostat 35S5 factory set at +5 ° C, or interconnect malfunction between the sensor and U7A15J10.

WIND MONITOR

Wind Speed

Monitor 39A1. Indicator of wind speed in Knots. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT, with a numeric wind speed readout in knots. RED indicates excessive wind speed, (in excess of 90 knots). Failure of wind speed numeric, measurement would indicate failure of the Model 05103L Wind Monitor or interconnect malfunction between the Monitor and U7A15J7.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-41

INTERLOCKS

Antenna Safety Switch

Switch 35S1. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates the Switch has been opened, failure of the switch or its make/break monitor contacts or interconnect malfunction between the switch and U7A15J51.

NOTE: Safety Switch open or failure will also cause Interlock Complete icon to turn RED.

Antenna Hatch

Switch 39S1. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates the Hatch has been opened, failure of the hatch switch or interconnect malfunction between the switch and U7A15J51.

NOTE: Hatch Switch open or failure will also cause Interlock Complete icon to turn RED.

Antenna Stowed

Switch 35S3. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates the Stow Pin has been removed from its stored location, failure of the stow switch or interconnect malfunction between the switch and U7A15J51.

NOTE: Antenna Stowed Switch open or failure will also cause Interlock Complete icon to turn RED.

Handcrank Stored

Switch 35S4. Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates handcrank has been removed from its stored location, failure of the handcrank stored switch or interconnect malfunction between the switch and U7A15J10.

NOTE: Handcrank Stored Switch open or failure will also cause Interlock Complete icon to turn RED.

Antenna Interlock Complete

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT, if all interlocks (Antenna Safety Switch, Antenna Hatch, Antenna Stowed, and Handcrank Stored) are GREEN. If only the Antenna Interlock Complete is displayed as RED, this will indicate an interconnect malfunction between U34TB3PIN15 and U7A15J5.

ANTENNA STATUS

Air Compressor

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates failure of compressor, one or all of the compressor’s monitored statuses, (excessive run time, power failure, high pressure) or interconnect malfunction between U18TB1 and U7A15J11.

Air Dryer

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates failure of compressor dehydrator, dehydrator’s monitored status (humidity) or interconnect malfunction between U18TB1 and U7A15J11.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-42

Waveguide Pressure

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the compressor dehydrator’s monitored Low pressure status or interconnect malfunction between U18TB1 and U7A15J11.

Polarizer Switch (High Beam)

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the Hi Beam polarizer or interconnect malfunction between U37A2A2P1 and U7A15J51.

Polarizer Switch (Low Beam)

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the Lo Beam polarizer or interconnect malfunction between U37A2A1P1 and U7A15J51.

Beam Switch +5 vdc

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the power supply U34PS3 or interconnect malfunction between U34PS3P3 and U7A15J51.GREEN

Beam Switch – 70 Vdc

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the power supply U34PS4 or interconnect malfunction between U34PS4P4 and U7A15J51.

Obstruction Lights

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of one or more of the obstruction light lamps, failure of the light assembly U38A1 or interconnect malfunction between U38A1 and U7A15J51.

AZIMUTH ENCODERS X AND Y

Azimuth Encoder X

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the encoder, noisy encoder power supply or interconnect malfunction between 35B3J1 and U7J23.

Azimuth Encoder Y

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the encoder, noisy encoder power supply or interconnect malfunction between 35B4J1 and U7J24.

Azimuth Encoder X Power

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the X encoder power switch 34S1, interconnect malfunction between 34S1 and U34PS1P1, failure of encoder power supply U34PS1 or interconnect malfunction between U34PS1P1 and U7A15J51.

Azimuth Encoder Y Power

Normally GREEN indication on the OMT. RED indicates a failure of the Y encoder power switch 34S2, interconnect malfunction between 34S2 and U34PS2P1, failure of encoder power supply U34PS2 or interconnect malfunction between U34PS2P1 and U7A15J51.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-43

6.2.6.2 Antenna And Pedestal Control Functions

Polarization Linear

Linear is normally the selected mode of operation. Failure to successfully select Linear Polarization would normally indicate loss of the linear select control signal to one or both of the polarizer motors. Failure of one or both motors to transition after receiving the select signal would be indicated as a polarizer status failure. Loss of linear select control signal would indicate an interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U37A2A1J1 or U37A2A2J1.

Polarization Circular

Usually selected during high precipitation weather conditions. Failure to successfully select Circular Polarization would normally indicate loss of the circular select control signal to one or both of the polarizer motors. Failure of one or both motors to transition after receiving the select signal would be indicated as a polarizer status failure. Loss of circular select control signal would indicate an interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U37A2A1J1 or U37A2A2J1.

PEDESTAL ROOM CONTROL

Pedestal Room Control Enable

Normal mode of operation is disabled. Loss of Pedestal Room Control Enable, function would indicate failure of U34K2 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34K2.

Pedestal Room Control Disable

Normal mode of operation is disabled. Failure of Relinquish Control Function would indicate failure of U34S2, U34K2 or interconnect malfunction between U34K2 and U7A15J5.

ANTENNA ROTATION

Antenna Rotation Start

If all motor, lube and interlock status’s are GREEN, failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K1/U16K2 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17.

Antenna Rotation Stop

Failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K1/U16K2 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17.

Motor A Run

If all motor A and interlock statuses are GREEN, failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K1 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17, or a failed Motor or Motor Controller.

Motor A Stop

Failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K1 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-44

Motor B Run

If all motor B and interlock statuses are GREEN, failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K2 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17, or a failed Motor or Motor Controller.

Motor B Stop

Failure of this command would indicate failure of U16K2 or interconnect malfunction between U7A15J5 and U34J17.

AZIMUTH ENCODER SELECTION

On Line Azimuth Encoder X

If Encoder X status is GREEN, failure of this command would indicate function failure internal to the FMAC or communication between the FMAC and SCDI.

On Line Azimuth Encoder Y

If Encoder Y status is GREEN, failure of this command would indicate function failure internal to the FMAC or communication between the FMAC and SCDI.

Azimuth Encoder Autoreconfiguration Enable

Failure of this command would indicate a software failure within the SCDI.

Azimuth Encoder Autoreconfiguration Disable

Failure of this command would indicate a software failure within the SCDI.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-45

6.2.6.3 APG Corrective Maintenance

A failure in the APG subsystem may result in the APG box being declared failed (red) on the SCDI main screen, or just an exclamation mark ‘!’ indicated underneath the APG box. Depending upon the failure condition, an APG failure may not result in the loss of rotation, in which case the APG box may be red with a green ‘At Speed’ indication.

Fault Isolation Procedure

Location: Online Selected SCDI

NOTE: The detection of a fault condition will be listed in the SCDI alarm and information windows at the top of the SCDI. These messages will be time and date stamped.

1. Take Control.

2. Click on the APG box on the Main Status Display screen and select ‘Detailed Status & Control’. Observe the APG Detailed Status screen and note which indications are red.

3. Verify the failure indication(s) against those listed in the SCDI alarm and information windows.

4. Returning to the Main Status Display screen, click on the Online Selected SCDI box, select ‘Change Equipment Role – Swap’ and select ‘confirm’ in order to transition the online standby SCDI to online selected.

5. Click on the APG box and select the ‘Detailed Status & Control’ screen. Observe the APG Status screen and verify the same failure indications are displayed.

6. If the failure indications are no longer seen, return to the Main Status Display screen, click on the online selected SCDI box, select ‘Change Equipment Role – Swap’ and select ‘confirm’ in order to transition the online standby SCDI to online selected.

7. Click on the APG box and select the ‘Detailed Status & Control’ screen and confirm that the failure condition still exists.

8. If the APG status is different when alternate SCDI is selected then the FMAC is suspect. Replace the FMAC in accordance with the FMAC replacement procedure.

9. If the failure indication remains the same independent of selected SCDI the failure is external to the PSR common equipment cabinet.

10. If the failure indication is still seen, locate the failure indication against the following list and follow the indicated fault isolation guide lines.

Safety Interlocks

Motor A [B]

Oil System

Wind Speed Monitor

Antenna Status

Azimuth/Encoder Status

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-46

Safety Interlocks

NOTE: A broken Safety Interlock will result in a loss of rotation and PSR/MSSR radiation.

Four separate safety interlocks are fed to an Interlock Complete Status. Should any of these four interlocks indicate red (open), the probable causes could be:

the indicated hardware has been employed

the indicated hardware has failed, or

the status for the device is faulty.

The four interlock status indications are:


Antenna Hatch Switch

Antenna Stowed

Handcrank Stored

Any of these statuses being open (failed) will result in the combination Antenna Interlock Complete also being declared red (failed).

Set the safety switch in the pedestal room to the safe position to ensure no accidental restart of the system during fault isolation.

If an open status is declared, first confirm that the device has not been activated.

Ascend the stairs to the Pedestal room.

In Pedestal Room, determine whether the antenna safety switch, antenna hatch switch, hand crank or stow pin have been opened or removed.

Next, the hardware switch associated with the hardware device should be checked.

Follow the associated fault finding guide lines as indicated below:


The Antenna Safety Switch is used to physically disconnect the three phase AC power from the antenna motors.

Set to the safe (disconnected) position when performing maintenance on the APG or when accessing the antenna platform.

Status is from an auxiliary set of contacts attached to the actual safety switch, and opens and closes with the safety switch

Status is fed via the Platform Local Control Panel (PLCP), through the Pedestal Interface Panel (PIP) and into the FMAC. This Status is also monitored in the PLCP and is used as part of the ‘Antenna Interlock Complete’ status. The key to the antenna platform access door is kept within this switch. The door to this switch, and therefore access to the key, can only be opened with the switch in the safe position. This ensures power to the motors must be removed prior to accessing the antenna platform area.

Remove the power from the safety switch by powering off both Motor Controller AC feeds.

Using a digital voltmeter, verify the switch including the status contacts operate correctly when in the open and closed positions.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-47

If not, the faulty switch is to be replaced in accordance with the Safety Switch Removal and Installation Procedure (refer to Paragraph 6.3), the system restarted and correct operation verified.

If the switch is operating correctly, use the on-site equipment manuals to isolate the status discrepancy.

After correcting the cause of the fault indication, set the safety switch to unsafe and initialize the system.

Verify the system is operating correctly.

Antenna Hatch Switch

Antenna Hatch Switch is used to indicate whether the access door to the antenna platform area is open. This switch is a mechanical reed switch that closes when the door is closed. This door will also be locked, with the key kept within the safety switch.

Status is from the switch, and opens and closes with the door.

Status is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP and into the FMAC. This Status is also monitored in the PLCP and is used as part of the ‘Antenna Interlock Complete’ status.

Using a digital voltmeter verify the switch including the status contacts operate correctly when in the open and closed positions.

If not, the faulty switch is to be replaced in accordance with the Antenna Hatch Switch Removal and Installation Procedure (refer to Paragraph 6.3), the system restarted and correct operation verified.

If the switch is operating correctly, use the on-site equipment manuals to isolate the status discrepancy.


Antenna Stowed

Used to indicate whether the stow pin has been removed from its storage position in the pedestal. The stow pin is a mechanical stop to physically ensure the antenna cannot rotate. The pin is stored in the pedestal and can only be removed from the pedestal. When maintenance is to be performed on the APG, and rotation disabled, the stow pin is installed through a hole in the antenna into the non-rotating part pedestal. This ensures there is no possibility of the antenna moving during maintenance. When the stow pin is removed from its storage position in the antenna, a reed switch is disengaged. This status is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP and into the FMAC. This Status is also monitored in the PLCP and is used as part of the ‘Antenna Interlock Complete’ status.

Using a digital voltmeter verify the switch including the status contacts operate correctly when in the open and closed positions.

If not, the faulty switch should be replaced, the system restarted and correct operation verified.

If the switch is operating correctly, use the systems operations and maintenance manuals to isolate the status discrepancy.

Having corrected the cause of the fault indication set the safety switch to unsafe and reinitializes the system.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-48

Hand Crank Stored

Used to indicate whether the hand crank has been removed from its storage position in the pedestal. The hand crank is used to manually rotate the antenna by fixing the crank to one of the motors and physically turning the crank. When the hand crank is removed from its storage position in the pedestal (located in the pedestal room), a reed switch is disengaged. This status is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP and into the FMAC. This Status is also monitored in the PLCP and is used as part of the ‘Antenna Interlock Complete’ status.

Using DVM verify the switch including the status contacts operate correctly when in the open and closed positions.

If not, the faulty switch should be replaced, the system restarted and correct operation verified.

If the switch is operating correctly, use the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance manual to isolate the status discrepancy.

Having corrected the cause of the fault indication, set the safety switch to unsafe and reinitializes the system.


Motor A (Motor B)

Motor Current

The motor current is monitored by the motor controller and sent, as a voltage, via the PIP to the FMAC. The FMAC converts this into an analog current reading for display. If the motor current exceeds a pre-set value, as set in the motor controllers, the motor controller will shut the motor down.

Cycle the power to the motor controller by switching the circuit breaker off then on. Attempt to restart the motor. If the motor continues to indicate a fault, replace the motor in accordance with the Systems O&M Manual.

Verify the replacement motor is now serviceable.

If not, isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication using the site installation drawings and the System O&M Manual.

Motor Temp

This status is from the temperature sensor on the motor, and is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP to the FMAC. If a fault is detected, the motor will not shut down, but an alarm is indicated.

Cycle the power to the motor controller by switching the circuit breaker off then on. Attempt to restart the motor (the motor will not restart if the fault condition still exists).

If the motor continues to indicate a fault, replace the motor in accordance with the onsite equipment manuals.

Verify the replacement motor is now serviceable.

If not, isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication using the site installation drawings and the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-49

Controller

The controller status is generated within the controller itself using its own fault monitoring. This status is fed to the FMAC via the Pedestal Interface Panel. If the motor controller detects a fault, it will stop driving its associated motor and set the fault status indicator.

Should a failure indication be received, log on at the selected SCDI and attempt to restart the motor from the APG ‘Detailed Status and Control’ menu.

If the motor controller remains faulted (and the motor fails to restart) cycle the power to the motor controller by switching the circuit breaker off then on. Attempt to restart the motor controller from the selected SCDI.

Should the motor controller continue to remain faulted, replace the controller in accordance with the onsite equipment manuals.

Initialize the replacement motor and verify the correct operating settings in accordance with the System O&M Manual.

Verify the motor controller is now serviceable.

If not, isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication using the site installation drawings and the System O&M Manual.

Gear Box Oil

This status is from the oil level sensor on the gearbox, and is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP to the FMAC. If a fault is detected, the associated motor will not shut down, but an alarm will be indicated.

Add oil to the gearbox in accordance with the onsite equipment manuals.

If the gearbox continues to indicate a fault, use the site installation drawings and the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

Gear Box Temp

This status is from the temperature sensor on the gearbox, and is fed via the PLCP, through the PIP to the FMAC. If a fault is detected, the associated motor will not shut down, but an alarm will be indicated.

Stop then restart the motor (the motor will not restart if the fault condition still exists).

If the gearbox continues to indicate a fault, replace the gearbox in accordance with the onsite equipment manuals.

Verify the replacement gearbox is now serviceable.

If the gearbox continues to indicate a fault, use the site installation drawings and the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

Clutch Engaged

The clutch engaged status is monitored from the clutch assembly. The status indicates serviceable when the clutch is engaged. If this status is failed, the motor controller will shut down the associated motor.

If the clutch engaged status indicates failed, visually inspect the clutch and motor.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-50

Verify if the clutch is actually engaged and the motor driving the antenna.

If not, shut down the antenna in accordance with the operating procedure in chapter 4 and reengage the clutch.

Restart the antenna and verify that the failure indication is resolved.

If the clutch becomes disengaged again, replace the clutch in accordance with the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance manuals.

If the clutch is correctly engaged and operational, use the site installation drawings and ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual to locate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

Oil System

Pedestal Oil Level

This status is from the pedestal oil level sensor 35S2 located on the antenna pedestal in the pedestal room. The status is fed via the PLCP and the PIP to the FMAC. This fault condition is checked by the SCDI when an antenna rotation command is issued. If the failure is set, antenna rotation in inhibited.

If a fault condition exists, add oil to the pedestal in accordance with the onsite equipment manuals.

Verify the Oil level status is serviceable (green).

If not, refer to the Site Installation Drawings and the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual to determine if incorrect status is still being provided by the oil level sensor 35S2. If not, replace Pedestal Oil Sensor.

Gearbox Oil Level

Using a digital voltmeter check for 24 VDC between U34A1 terminals J & M for Gearbox A, or L & H for Gearbox B. If 24 VDC is not present, check cabling from U34J18 through to U7A15J10.CEC.

If 24 VDC is present:

Replace oil level sensor 351A1S2 for gearbox A or 35A2A1S2 for gearbox B. Check APG Detailed control and status screen for a GREEN oil level icon. If not GREEN:

Replace oil level transition module U34A1in accordance with Removal and Installation Procedure in Paragraph 6.3. Check APG Detailed status screen for a GREEN oil level icon. If not GREEN:

Refer to the Site Installation Drawings and the ASR-11 Antenna Pedestal Field Maintenance Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

Pedestal Oil Undertemperature

This status is from the pedestal oil temperature sensor located on the antenna pedestal in the pedestal room. This fault condition is checked by the SCDI when an antenna rotation command is issued. If the failure is set, antenna rotation is inhibited, and a one hour timer is activated to allow the oil to be heated. The status is fed via the PLCP and the PIP to the FMAC. After one hour, rotation is automatically started.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-51

If a fault condition exists after rotation has been enabled for some time, or occurs during normal operation, a sensor failure is suspected.

Replace the oil temperature sensor.

At the SCDI, check if the oil temperature alarm has cleared.

If not, refer to the Site Installation Drawings and System O&M Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

Wind Speed Monitor

Provides both a go/no go status on the wind speed and an analog value of the measured wind speed from the wind sensor in knots. Should the wind speed alarm be active, conduct a visual check of local site conditions to verify that high winds are present.

Check, using a local weather source (i.e. ATC personnel who have access to the local weather conditions or check local weather through the internet), to verify the current wind speed conditions.

If the alarm condition is not due to local weather conditions, troubleshoot the wind line driver and sensor. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for further details.

Verify the wind sensor reading is now representative of current conditions.

If the alarm is due to current weather conditions, a local decision must be made whether to shut down the radar system or not.

Antenna Status

Air Compressor

This status is fed directly from the Compressor Dehydrator to the FMAC. The status is set by the compressors own fault monitoring system. Failure does not prevent system operation and SCDI APG box remains serviceable, with an ! displayed on SCDI screen. A failure condition points directly to the compressor.

Should a failure be present, cycle the AC power to the Compressor Dehydrator by switching the circuit breaker off.

Should the fault condition persist, replace the Compressor Dehydrator, refer to Paragraph 6.3.8.1 and verify the fault condition is now corrected.


Air Dryer

This status is fed directly from the compressor/dehydrator to the FMAC. The status is set by the air dryer’s own fault monitoring system. Failure does not prevent system operation and SCDI APG box remains serviceable, with an ! displayed on the SCDI screen. A failure condition points directly to the air dryer.


Should the fault condition persist, replace the Compressor Dehydrator, refer to Paragraph 6.3.8.1 and verify the fault condition is now removed.

If not, refer to the Site Installation Drawings and System Operation and Maintenance Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-52

Waveguide Pressure

This status is fed directly from the compressor/dehydrator to the FMAC. The status is set by the Compressor Dehydrator’s own fault monitoring system. Failure is an indication that the waveguide pressure is outside tolerance. Corrective action may only require adjustment using the compressor/dehydrator pressure control, or may indicate a failure with the Compressor Dehydrator or a leak in the air feed or waveguide. Failure does not prevent system operation and SCDI APG box remains serviceable, with an ! on SCDI screen.


View the analog pressure meter located on the front of the Compressor Dehydrator unit and verify the meter reads 1.5 lbs p.s.i. If not, attempt to adjust the output pressure for this value.

Should the fault condition persist, replace the Compressor Dehydrator, refer to Paragraph 6.3.8.1 and verify the fault condition is now removed.

If the fault condition persists, a leak in the waveguide or air feed pipe is suspected.

Using small brush, gently apply leak detection compound fluid (ie: soapy water) to all the wave guide and air pipe joints to isolate the leaky joint.

Once the problem area is isolated, the leak must be removed. This may result in the removal of wave guide and therefore the loss of PSR data to ATC.

On completion of corrective maintenance, reinitialize the system and verify all fault conditions have been removed.


Polarizer (High Beam and Low Beam)

The polarizer status is determined by the FMAC. Status from both the high beam and low beam polarizers, as determined by the position of reed switches attached to the polarizers, are sent to the FMAC via the PLCP. These statuses are examined by the FMAC to determine the Polarizer switch status. It compares the incoming status and determines whether the polarizer is serviceable or failed.

If the polarizer is declared failed, take control at the selected SCDI and issue a command to change polarization.

Observe if polarization changes and the alarm indication clears.

Repeat the above command several times to verify the alarm either clears or remains faulted.

If the failure indication remains, shut down antenna rotation in accordance with Operating procedures in chapter 4.

Set the stow pin into the antenna stowed location.

Replace the polarizer motor, capacitor and diode in accordance with the ASR-11 S-Band Antenna manual.

Remove the stow pin and return to its holder in the pedestal.

Initialize the system and verify the polarizer switch is now serviceable.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-53

If not, shut down the antenna rotation again in accordance with the operating procedures in chapter 4.

Set the stow pin into the antenna stowed position.

Replace the Polarization and Beamswitch Control Box on the PSR Antenna in accordance with the removal and replacement procedures in the ASR11 Antenna Manual.

Remove the stow pin and return to its holder in the pedestal.

Initialize the system and verify the polarizer is now serviceable.

Refer the site installation drawings and the System O&M Manual to fault isolate polarizer status.

Beam Switch +5 VDC

This status is from the 5Vpower supply for the Weather Beam Switch located in the PLCP, and is fed to the FMAC via the PIP. A failure indication indicates a failed power supply.

Open the door to the PLCP.

Using a DVM, measure the 5V output voltage on the power supply terminal lugs.

Verify the 5V supply has failed.

If faulty, replace the faulty power supply in accordance with the Removal and Installation Procedures in Paragraph 6.3.9.2.

Verify the fault condition is now cleared.

If not, use the site installation drawings and the System O&M Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status signal.

Once rectified, initializes the system and verify the beam switch power supply is now declared serviceable.

Beam Switch –70 VDC

This status is from the -70v power supply for the weather beam switch located in the PLCP, and is fed to the FMAC via the PIP. A failure indication indicates a failed power supply.

Open the door to the PLCP.

Using DVM, measure the -70v output voltage on the power supply terminal lugs.

Verify the -70V supply has failed.

If faulty, replace the suspect power supply in accordance with the Removal and Installation Procedure in Paragraph 6.3.9.3.

If not, use the site installation drawings and the System O&M Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status signal.

Once rectified, initialize the system and verify the beam switch power supply is now declared serviceable.

Obstruction Lights

This status indicates when one or both obstruction light bulbs has failed. Failure does not prevent system operation and SCDI APG box remains serviceable, with an exclamation mark. A fault indication points directly to the bulb.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-54

NOTE: This procedure requires the ASR-11 system be taken out of service; therefore, coordination must be performed with Air Traffic Services to schedule downtime before this procedure is performed.

Procedure

Take Control of ASR-11 System and Power System Down:

If monitor only, take Control with SCDI A or SCDI B.

Set REX/SDP B to Maintenance Standby.

Set REX/SDP A to Maintenance Selected.

Set MSSR B to Maintenance Standby.

Set MSSR A to Maintenance Selected.

At the selected SCDI, open the APG Detailed Status and Control screen.

Select Stop Rotation button.

This will power off all transmitter power supplies and amplifiers.

WARNING

Use local lockout/tagout procedures when energizing, startup, or release of energy can occur. This is necessary to make sure that other personnel cannot start the power source during maintenance. Shock hazards can kill. Such procedures are a requirement from the latest version of Order 3900.19, FAA Occupational Safety and Health.

Turn Off AC Power to Obstruction Lights:

Locate the Power Distribution Panels (PDU) DP4 and DP5 in shelter.

Open door of DP4.

Set circuit breaker DP4 – CB8 to the “OFF” position.

Attach lockout tag device to Encoder circuit breaker DP4 – CB8.

Open door of DP5.

Set circuit breaker DP5 – CB8 to the “OFF” position.

Attach lockout tag device to Encoder circuit breaker DP5 – CB8.

With the obstruction lights’ AC power turned off, open the APG Status and Control Screen on the SCDI, and verify that the obstruction light status is red.

Replace the Obstruction Light Bulbs/Fixtures (Mast Installed on Antenna):

Inside the pedestal room, set the safety switch to the “OFF” position.

Attach lockout tag device to safety switch.

On the antenna platform, locate the antenna stow pin and lock the antenna in the stowed position.

Remove stowing hardware from antenna ladder.

Position and extend the antenna ladder so that the obstruction lights can be serviced.

Using the Personal Fall Protection device connected to the ladder’s center railing and to your body harness, climb up the ladder to the obstruction light fixture at top of the obstruction light mast.

* *

* *

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-55

Incandescent Obstruction Light:

o At the obstruction light fixture, remove obstruction light lens by releasing finger tabs.

o Install new light bulbs and replace the obstruction light lens.

LED Obstruction Light:

o At the LED obstruction light fixture, remove failed obstruction light fixture(s) from the adaptor by loosening the retaining bolts.

o Disconnect failed fixture(s) from AC power by separating the MATE-N-LOK connector.

o Connect replacement LED obstruction light fixture(s) to the AC power and re-install fixture(s) on to adaptor.

o Tighten both sets of retaining bolts securing the fixture(s) to adaptor.

Return the antenna ladder to the stowed position.

Replace the antenna ladder stowing hardware.

Remove the antenna stow pin and return it to its storage location.

Remove lockout tag device from the safety switch inside the pedestal room.

Set the safety switch inside the pedestal room to the “ON” position.

Replace the Obstruction Light Bulbs/Fixtures (Masts Installed on Platform Railing):

Inside the pedestal room, set the safety switch to the “OFF” position.

Attach lockout tag device to safety switch.

On the antenna platform, locate the antenna stow pin and lock the antenna in the stowed position.

Replaced failed bulb/fixture.

Incandescent Obstruction Light:

o At the obstruction light fixture, remove obstruction light lens by releasing finger tabs.

o Install new light bulbs and replace the obstruction light lens.

LED Obstruction Light:

o At each mast, remove failed LED obstruction light fixtures from the adaptor by loosening the retaining bolts.

o Disconnect fixture from AC power.

o Connect replacement LED obstruction light fixture to the AC power and re-install fixture on to adaptor.

NOTE: If the replacement LED fixture has a Molex container, remove connector.

o Tighten both sets of retaining bolts securing the fixture to adaptor.

Remove the antenna stow pin and return it to its storage location.

Remove lockout tag device from the safety switch inside the pedestal room.

Set the safety switch inside the pedestal room to the “ON” position.

Restore Obstruction Light AC Power:

Open the door on the Power Distribution Panel (DP5), located in the radar shelter.

Remove the lockout tag device on DP5 – CB8.

Set circuit breaker DP5 – CB8 to “ON.”

Close door on DP5.

Open the door on the Power Distribution Panel (DP4), located in the radar shelter.

*

*

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-56

Remove lockout tag device on DP4 – CB8.

Set circuit breaker DP5 – CB8 to “ON.”

Close door on the DP4.

With the obstruction lights’ power turned on, check to see if the obstruction lights are lit.

Open the APG Status and Control Screen on the SCDI, and verify that the obstruction light status is green.

Return the ASR-11 Radar to Service:

On the selected SCDI, set Antenna Rotation to Start.

All power supplies and amplifiers will come on.

Set MSSR A to Online Selected.

Set MSSR B to Online Standby.

Set REX/SDP A to Online Selected.

Set REX/SDP B to Online Standby.

Acknowledge all alarms and ensure green status.

Coordinate with Air Traffic Controllers to ensure that the system is serviceable and then release control.

Azimuth Encoder Status

Azimuth Encoder X [Y]

The encoder data streams are fed to both PSR and MSSR channels. The selected data stream is from encoder X by default. The REX/SDP will operate using the selected encoder data stream. Both data streams are monitored by the REX/SDP. Various checks are performed upon these data stream, such as a pulse count per scan and position of north mark, etc. If either data stream is determined as being faulty, the associated status is displayed as a failure on the SCDI. If the selected data stream is determined as being faulty, the system automatically switches to the other data stream (if serviceable).

If an encoder data stream is declared failed, associated alarms will be logged in the SCDI alarm and information windows.

At the Online selected SCDI log on as controller in accordance with operating procedures in Section 4.

At the Online selected SCDI command an REX/SDP channel switch.

Allow the system to run for more than one minute to allow the test results to correctly integrate.

Verify that switching REX/SDP channels does not resolve the failure condition.

NOTE: If the failure condition was resolved with a REX/SDP channel switch, then the REX/SDP target channel Beam and STC module is faulty.

Replace the Beam and STC module in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1.12.

If a failure condition exists, replace the failed encoder in accordance with the removal and replacement procedures in the Rotary Joint Manual.

NOTE: Encoder identification is established by cable wiring number (Cable W9601 connects to Encoder X and cable W9602 connects to Encoder Y).

* *

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-57

Verify the replaced encoder data stream is now serviceable.

Realign the new encoder in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.12.5 (selected) or Paragraph 6.3.12.6.(standby)

Initializes the REX/SDP and verify the fault condition is removed.

Encoder Power Supply

The encoder power supplies are located in the PLCP. There are separate power supplies for each encoder (X and Y). The power supply status is generated by the power supply, fed through the PIP to the FMAC.

If a failure is indicated, use a DVM to verify failure of the power supply.

Replace the power supply, refer to Paragraph 6.3.9.1.

Reinitializes the power supply and verify the failure indication is rectified.

Should the power supply have not been faulted, use the site installation drawings and System O&M Manual to isolate and rectify the incorrect status indication.

6.2.7 MSSR Equipment Fault Isolation

Faults reported by the MSSR are indicated on the SCDI Main Screen as a red indication for the MSSR. Detailed MSSR fault status is described in Section 4 of this manual.

For further fault isolation of the MSSR equipment, refer to the MSSR equipment manuals.

6.2.8 SDT / SIU Fault Isolation

For systems including Surveillance Data Translator (SDT) equipment, a fault is indicated on the SCDI Main Screen as a red indication for the Radar Data Remoting (RDR) ICON. Detailed SDT status is described in Section 4 of this manual.

For further fault isolation of the SDT equipment, refer to the Sensis SDT Manuals.

For systems including Surveillance Interface Equipment (SIU), a fault is indicated on the SCDI Main Screen as a red indication for the RDR ICON. Detailed SIU status is described in Section 4 of this manual.

6.2.9 Site UPS Fault Isolation

A fault in the Site UPS is indicated on the SCDI Main Screen as a red indication for the Site UPS ICON. Detailed Site UPS status is described in Section 4 of this manual.

For further isolation of the Site UPS equipment, refer to the Site UPS manual.

6.2.10 Engine Generator Fault Isolation

A fault in the Engine Generator is indicated on the SCDI Main Screen as a red indication for the Eng/Gen ICON. Detailed Engine Generator status is described in Section 4 of this manual. For further isolation of the Engine Generator equipment, refer to the onsite Engine Generator vendor manual.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-58

6.3 On-Site PSR Removal and Installation Procedures

This Paragraph contains removal and installation procedures for PSR LRUs and LRIs.

It is assumed that maintenance technicians performing these procedures are thoroughly familiar with the PSR Operating Procedures, as outlined in Section 4 of this manual.

The procedures are written presuming the removal starts with a fully operational system with no faults. If the removal follows an equipment failure, reconfiguration will have likely occurred. In this case, the steps that direct equipment reconfiguration should be ignored as the specific case dictates, as these may have automatically occurred.

Following installation, a check is made to verify the replaced LRU/LRI is operational. If these checks identify faults following the replacement, then the replaced LRU/LRI may be faulty, or the removed LRU/LRI may not have been the source of the faults. In which case, additional Fault Isolation will be required and/or LRU/LRI replaced.

Following the check that the replaced LRU/LRI is operational, the procedure returns the system to a fully operational Online state.

Retain all hardware from removal procedure for installation procedure of the replacement LRU/LRI.

In some procedures, additional LRUs / LRIs must be removed from the cabinet to allow access. In these situations, the LRUs / LRIs must be reinstalled in the same locations to ensure correct operation. The Equipment Configuration listing can be used as a guide to show which serial number LRUs / LRIs belong in which location.

If power must be removed from any cabinet or module for corrective maintenance, check all RF connectors for tightness, noting the recommended torque on specific connectors. Check all cables and connectors for broken, loose and frayed wires.

Observe the following warnings and cautions before proceeding with any maintenance task:

WARNING

Accidental contact with voltages up to 240 VAC used in this equipment can cause injury or death. Use proper safety precaution when performing removal and installation procedures.

WARNING

Where space is limited within an equipment shelter, a second person may be required to ensure power to equipment can be powered off at the Power Distribution Panes in an emergency.

Where Test Equipment is connected within the system and needs to be disconnected for removal, reconnect during installation.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-59

For additional guidance on safety precautions and lockout tagging of equipment power sources, refer to Radar System Manual TI 6310.47 Safety Summary, and the Electric Shock information at the beginning of this manual.

The table below lists the paragraphs for removal and installation procedures for PSR LRUs and LRIs.

Table 6-5. LRU / LRI Replacement Procedures

Unit Reference

Designation Type

Paragraph Number

Unserviceable Equipment

Radar Data

Output

RF Assembly 1A1, 2A1 LRU Paragraph

6.3.1.1 One PSR Channel Yes

Stability Monitor 1A2, 2A2 LRU Paragraph


Weather Downconverter 1A3, 2A3 LRU Paragraph


Target Downconverter 1A4, 2A4 LRU Paragraph


Local Oscillator 1A5, 2A5 LRU Paragraph


Quartz Oscillator Transfer LRI Paragraph 6.3.1.5.1

Upconverter 1A6, 2A6 LRU Paragraph


Cabinet UPS 1A10, 2A10 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.16

One PSR Channel, One Ethernet, One SCDI /

FMAC Yes

Cabinet UPS Battery Pack 1A10BT1, 2A10BT2 LRI Paragraph 6.3.1.17 None Yes

REX Power Supply 1A11A2, 2A11A2 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.19

One PSR Channel Yes

NTIA Filter Assembly 1A12, 2A12 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.20 One PSR Channel Yes

Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10, 2A9A10 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.21 One PSR Channel Yes

Digital Signal Processor CCA 1A9A8, 2A9A8 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.22 One PSR Channel Yes

Single Board Computer CCA 1A9A1, 2A9A1 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.23 One PSR Channel Yes

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-60

Table 6-5. LRU / LRI Replacement Procedures (Continued)

Unit Reference

Designation Type

Paragraph Number


Radar Data

Output

SDP Power Supply Unit 1A9A13, 2A9A13 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.24 One PSR Channel Yes

Fan Tray (Hybricon) 1A9A26, 2A9A26 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.25 One PSR Channel Yes

Fan Tray (ELMA) 1A9A26, 2A9A26 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.26 One PSR Channel Yes

I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24, 2A9A24 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.27 One PSR Channel Yes

ASDP Chassis 1A9, 2A9 LRU Paragraph 6.3.1.28 One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Amplifier Module 3A1, 3A2, 3A3, 3A4, 3A6, 3A7,

3A8, 3A9 LRU

Paragraph 6.3.2.1

One Tx Amplifier Module

Yes

Tx Driver Module 3A5, 3A10 LRU Paragraph


Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11, 3A12 LRU Paragraph

6.3.2.3 None Yes

1:4 Divider 3A14, 3A15 LRI Paragraph

6.3.2.4 Both PSR Channels

no PSR

Waveguide Combiner 3A17 LRI Paragraph


no PSR

Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1, 3CP2, 3CP3, 3CP4

LRI Paragraph


Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1, 3S2 LRI Paragraph


no PSR

Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3, 3S4 LRI Paragraph


no PSR

1:2 Divider 3A16 LRI Paragraph

6.3.2.9

AC Distribution Unit 4A1 LRI Paragraph

6.3.3.1 Both PSR Channels no PSR

DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1 LRI Paragraph

6.3.3.2 Both PSR Channels no PSR

Tx Control CCA 4A2A2, 4A2A5 LRU Paragraph


Tx Status CCA 4A2A3, 4A2A6 LRU Paragraph


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-61


Unit Reference

Designation Type

Paragraph Number


Radar Data

Output

RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4, 4A2A7 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 3 . 5 One PSR Channel Yes

TCMM Backplane (Second Level Eng ineering Activity Only)

4A2A8 LRI Paragraph

6 .3 .3 .6 Both PSR Channels no PSR

Tx Control and Monito r Power Supply

4A3A1, 4A3A2 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 3 . 7 One Tx Control and

Monitor Power Supply Yes

TCMM Fan Assembly 4A3A3 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 3 . 8 None Yes

Tx Amplifier Power Supply

4A4A1, 4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2

LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 3 . 9 One Tx Amplifier

Module Yes

Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3, 4A7A3 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 3 . 1 0

One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Drive Sample 1:2 Divider/Video Detec tor

4A20A1, 4A20A2 LRI Paragraph 6 .3 .3 .11

One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1

4A20AT2, 4A20AT6

LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 3 . 1 2

One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Driver Transfer Swi tch Terminat ion

4A20AT4 LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 3 . 1 3

One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1, 4A20DC2

LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 3 . 1 4

One PSR Channel Yes

Tx Driver Transfer Swi tch 4A20S1 LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 3 . 1 5

Both PSR Channels Yes

Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider

6A1 LRI Paragraph


Forward Power Monitor Video Detector

6A2 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 4 . 2 Both PSR Channels no PSR

Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector

6A3, 6A4 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 4 . 3 Reverse Power Monitor Yes

Forward Power Monitor Attenuator

6AT1 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 4 . 4 Both PSR Channels no PSR

Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator

6AT2, 6AT3 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 4 . 5 Reverse Power Monitor Yes

High Power Load 6AT4 LRI Paragraph


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-62


Unit Reference

Designation Type

Paragraph Number


Radar Data

Output

Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination

6AT5 LRI Paragraph

6.3.4.7 One PSR Channel

Yes

Coax Transfer Switch Termination

6AT6, 6AT7 LRI Paragraph

6.3.4.8 One PSR Channel

Yes

Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination

6AT8 LRI Paragraph

6.3.4.9 None

Yes

Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1, 6B2 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.10

None Yes

Waveguide Directional Coupler

6DC1, 6DC2 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.11

Both PSR Channels no PSR

Circulator Assembly 6HY3 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.12


Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.13


Coax Transfer Switch 6S2, 6S3 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.14


Receiver Protector 6Z1, 6Z2 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.15

One PSR Channel Yes

RF Power Limiter 6Z3, 6Z4, 6Z5, 6Z6 LRI Paragraph 6.3.4.16

One PSR Channel Yes

Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC)

7A1, 7A2 LRU Paragraph

6.3.5.1 One SCDI/FMAC Yes

FMAC Modules

7A1(7A2)A1, A2, A3A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10, A11, A12, A14, A15,

A16, A17

LRU Paragraph 6.3.5.15

One FMAC Module Yes

Common Equipment Cabinet Fan Assembly

7A 3 LRU Paragraph

6.3.5.2 None Yes

SCDI Workstation 7A4, 7A5 LRU Paragraph


SCDI Keyboard 7A4A2, 7A5A2 LRU Paragraph


SCDI Monitor 7A4A4, 7A5A4 LRU Paragraph

6.3.5.6

None Yes

SCDI Mouse 7A4A3, 7A5A3 LRU Paragraph

6.3.5.5

None Yes

SCDI Printer 7A4A5 LRU Paragraph

6.3.5.7

None Yes

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-63


Unit Reference

Designation Type Paragraph Number


Radar Data

Output

Ethernet Repeater 7A6A1 7A9A1 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 5 . 8 One Ethernet Yes

Ethernet Repeater Power Supply

7A6PS1, 7A9PS1 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 5 . 9 One Ethernet Yes

8 Port Multiplexer 7A7, 7A10 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 0

One SCDI/FMAC Yes

Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar

7A18, 7A19 LRI Paragraph 6 .3 .5 .11

One SCDI/FMAC Yes

FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 2

Both SCDIs/FMACs no PSR no SSR

Latching Relay Box 7A16, 7A17 LRI Paragraph 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 3

One SCDI/FMAC Yes

FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1, 7PS2 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 5 . 1 4

One FMAC 24VPower Supply

Yes

Motor Controller Unit Unit 14, Unit 15 LRU Paragraph

6 .3 .6 .1 One Drive Motor Yes

Pedestal Interface Panel PWB

16A1 LRI Paragraph

6 .3 .7 .1 Both PSR Channels,

Both MSSR Channels No

Compressor Dehydrat o r Unit 18 LRU Paragraph

6 .3 .8 .1 None Yes

Encoder Power Supply 34PS1, 34PS2 LRU Paragraph

6 .3 .9 .1 One Encoder Yes

Wx Beam Switch + 5V Power Supply

34PS3 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 2 Wx Beam Switch Yes

Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply

34PS4 LRU Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 3 Wx Beam Switch Yes

Oil Level Transition Module

34A1 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 4 None Yes

Obstruction Light Relay 34K1 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 5 Obstruction Lights Yes

Pedestal Room Enable Relay

34K2 LRI Paragraph

6 .3 .9 .6 None Yes

Polarizer Select Relay 34K3 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 7 Polarizer Switching Yes

Sump Heater Relay 34K4 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 8 None Yes

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-64


Unit Reference

Designation Type

Paragraph Number


Radar Data

O u t p u t

Pedestal Temperat u r e Re l a y

34K5 LRI Paragraph

6 . 3 . 9 . 9 None Yes

Rotary Joint 35A6 LRU Rotary Jo in t

Manual PSR/MSSR

No PSR No MSSR

Encoder X [Y] 35A6B3[B4] LRU R o t a r y J o i n t

Manual One Encoder Yes

Remote OMT Printer 50A18 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 9 . 1 0

None Yes

Remote OMT Workstation 52A1, 54A1 LRU Paragraph 6 .3 .10 .1

None Yes

Remote OMT Keyb o a r d 52A2, 54A2 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 1 0 . 2

None Yes

Remote OMT Mouse 52A3, 54A3 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 1 0 . 3

None Yes

Remote OMT Monitor 52A4, 54A4 LRU Paragraph 6 . 3 . 1 0 . 4

None Yes

Radar Control Panel Unit 56A1 Unit 57A1

LRU Paragraph 6 .3 .11 .1

None Yes

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-65

6.3.1 REX/SDP Cabinet, Unit 1 / Unit 2

6.3.1.1 Replace RF Assembly 1A1, 2A1

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Open end wrench, 5/16 inch Nut driver, 8 mm Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in lbs Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an RF Assembly replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

See Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal

Location: Selected SCDI

1. If Monitor Only, Take Control.

2. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to Idle.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet

3. Open front door of cabinet.

4. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply A11A2 to OFF position.

5. Set switch AC ON (2) on front of SDP Power Supply A9A13 to OFF position.

Location: Rear of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet

6. Open rear door of cabinet.

7. Disconnect cable W32 from RF Assembly A1 connector A4J9.


9. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W24 from RF Assembly A1 connector S2J1.

10. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W36 from RF Assembly A1 connector PD2J3.

11. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W37 from RF Assembly A1 connector PD2J2.

12. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W39 from RF Assembly A1 connector S1J1.

13. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W2 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J20. Disconnect cable.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-66


15. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W3205 [W3305] to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J3. Disconnect cable.

16. Using nut driver, remove locknut (3) and flat washer that secure grounding jumper (4) to RF Assembly E1.

17. Disconnect and remove cable W1 from S2J3 to A3AR1J2.

18. Disconnect and remove cable W5 from S2J2 to A2AR1J2.

Location: Top of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet

19. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3201 [W3301] from RF Assembly A1 connector A3J1.

20. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect RF Limiter 6Z4 [6Z3] from RF Assembly A1 connector A2J1.

21. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect RF Limiter 6Z6 [6Z5] from RF Assembly A1 connector A1J1.


22. Connect ESD wrist strap to wrist and cabinet grounding stud.



25. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W23 from RF Assembly A1 connector A1AR1J2.

26. Using nut driver, loosen two locknuts (5) and flat washers that secure RF Assembly A1 (6) to cabinet.

27. Carefully remove RF Assembly A1 (6) from cabinet.

28. Disconnect wrist strap from wrist and cabinet grounding stud.

Installation

1. Inspect RF Assembly for foreign objects.



3. Inspect location A1 for foreign objects.

4. Carefully position RF Assembly (6) on studs of slot A1.

5. Using nut driver, tighten two locknuts (5) and flat washers to secure RF Assembly A1 (6) to cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-67

NOTE: Ensure that RF Assembly is pushed to the full up position in the cabinet before tightening locknuts.

6. Connect cable W1 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J4.


8. Using torque wrench, connect cable W23 to RF Assembly A1 connector A1AR1J2.Tighten to 8 ± 1 inch-pounds.


9. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3201 [W3301] to RF Assembly A1 connector A3J1.

10. Using slip-joint pliers, connect RF Limiter 6Z4 [6Z3] to RF Assembly A1 connector A2J1.

11. Using slip-joint pliers, connect RF Limiter 6Z6 [6Z5] to RF Assembly A1 connector A1J1.


12. Using nut driver, install locknut (3) and flat washer to secure grounding jumper (4) to RF Assembly A1E1.

13. Connect cable W2 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J20. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

14. Connect cable W11 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J1. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

15. Connect cable W3205 [W3305] to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J3. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

16. Using torque wrench, connect cable W24 to RF Assembly A1 connector S2J1.Tighten.

17. Using torque wrench, connect cable W36 to RF Assembly A1 connector PD2J3.Tighten.

18. Using torque wrench, connect cable W37 to RF Assembly A1 connector PD2J2.Tighten.

19. Using torque wrench, connect cable W39 to RF Assembly A1 connector S1J1.Tighten.



22. Connect cable W1 at RF assembly A1 connector S2J3.

23. Connect cable W5 at RF assembly A1 connector S2J2.


25. Close rear door of cabinet.


6-68


26. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply A11A2 to ON position.

27. Set switch AC ON (2) on front of SDP Power Supply A9A13 to ON position.

28. Close and secure front door of cabinet.


NOTE: Once channel has rebooted, proceed with the steps below.

29. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Channel to maintenance.

30. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B]. Ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.

31. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Online Standby.

32. Run Wx Receiver Gain Calibration on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], refer to Paragraph 6.3.12.1.

33. Run Online MDS Calibration on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], refer to Section, Paragraph 5.3.8.1.

6.3.1.1.1 Replace RF Assembly A1 STC attenuator module: A1Z1, A2Z1, A3Z1, Bandpass filter: A1FL1, A2FL1, A3FL1, 30dB Low Noise Amp: A1AR1, A2AR1, A3AR1

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Small Phillips screwdriver (#1) Open end wrench, 5/16 inch Nut driver, 8 mm Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in lbs Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for RF Assembly components in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

Removal of failed RF assembly components from the Target High/Low and Weather paths procedures are identical. Select the correct path before component removal. When using the Torque wrench in these procedures, tighten SMA connectors to 8 ± 1 inch-pounds.


Removal




*

*


6-68A








7. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3201 [W3301] from RF Assembly A1 connector A3J1 if the defective component is in the Target Low beam Path.

8. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect RF Limiter 6Z4 [6Z3] from RF Assembly A1 connector A2J1 if the defective component is in the Target High beam Path.

9. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect RF Limiter 6Z6 [6Z5] from RF Assembly A1 connector A1J1 if the defective component is in the weather beam path.



11. Using open end wrench, disconnect the SMA cable from A1J2 of the 30 dB Low Noise Amp (LNA).

12. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable SMA cable from A1J4 of the STC module.

13. Using the small flat head screw driver, disconnect the STC module DB-9 cable from the CCA A4 interface regulator card (J5,J6, or J7), by loosening the two hold down screws and gently pulling the connector.

14. Disconnect the power cable from 30 dB LNA at J8 (Target Low), J11 (Target High) or J12 (Wx) on the CCA A4 interface regulator card. If the Target low beam path is being removed, remove the stability monitor power plugs on the interface CCA J4 and J18 connections.

15. Using nut driver, loosen 4 locknuts (4) and flat washers that secure RF Assembly Path components to the RF Assembly.

16. Carefully remove RF Assembly Path components by ensuring all cables are slid through the access holes (A1J2, A1J4) and J1 connector of the assembly clears the top of the cabinet access hole.


18. Connect wrist strap to work bench ground.

19. To remove the STC attenuator module, using the Philips screw driver: remove (and retain) the 4 small screws attaching the module to the assembly. Then using the open end wrench remove the STC attenuator module from the Bandpass filter.

* *

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68B

20. To remove the Bandpass Filter, using the Philips screw driver: remove (and retain) the 4 small screws attaching the STC attenuator module to the assembly: remove (and retain) the 4 small screws attaching the filter to the assembly. Then using the open end wrench remove the STC attenuator module from the Bandpass filter and the Bandpass filter from the 30dB LNA.

21. To remove the 30dB LNA, using the Philips screw driver: remove (and retain) the 4 small screws attaching the 30dB LNA to the assembly. Then using the open end wrench remove the 30dB LNA from the Bandpass filter.

Installation

Location: Work Bench/ work area.

1. Connect ESD wrist strap to wrist and work bench grounding stud.

2. To install the STC attenuator module, using the open end wrench attach the STC attenuator module to the Bandpass filter (do not tighten). Using the Philips screw driver: install the 4 small screws attaching the module to the assembly (do not fully tighten). Then using the Torque wrench, properly tighten the STC attenuator module to the Bandpass filter. Tighten the 4 screws to hold the module on the assembly.

3. To install the Bandpass Filter, using the open end wrench attach the STC attenuator module to the Bandpass filter (do not tighten) and the Bandpass filter to the 30dB LNA (do not tighten). Using the Philips screw driver: install the 4 small screws attaching the STC attenuator module (do not tighten) to the assembly: install the 4 small screws attaching the filter to the assembly (do not tighten). Using the torque wrench, properly tighten the filter to the LNA, and then tighten the 4 screws holding the filter to the assembly. Using the torque wrench, properly tighten the STC module to the Filter, and then tighten the 4 screws holding the STC module to the assembly.

4. To install the 30dB LNA, using the open end wrench install the 30dB LNA to the Bandpass filter (do not tighten). Using the Philips screw driver: install the 4 small screws attaching the 30dB LNA to the assembly (do not tighten). Then using the Torque wrench properly tighten the 30dB LNA to the Bandpass filter. Tighten the four screws holding the LNA to the assembly.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet/ Rear of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet

5. Connect ESD wrist strap to cabinet grounding stud.


7. Carefully position removed Path Assembly on RF Assembly by ensuring all cables are slid through the access holes (A1J2, A1J4) and J1 connector of the assembly is positioned in the top of the cabinet access hole. (May require access to cable through rear of cabinet)

8. Using nut driver, tighten 4 locknuts and flat washers to secure Path Assembly to the RF assembly.

NOTE: Ensure that the Path Assembly is pushed to the full up position before tightening locknuts.

9. Using torque wrench, connect cable to J2 on the 30 dB LNA.

10. Using torque wrench, connect cable to J4 on the STC attenuator module.

*

*


6-68C


11. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3201 [W3301] to RF Assembly A1 connector A3J1 if it was removed.

12. Using slip-joint pliers, connect RF Limiter 6Z4 [6Z3] to RF Assembly A1 connector A2J1 if it was removed.

13. Using slip-joint pliers, connect RF Limiter 6Z6 [6Z5] to RF Assembly A1 connector A1J1 if it was removed.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [Unit 2, REX/SDP B]

14. Using the flat tip screw driver, attach the DB-9 cable from the STC attenuator module to the Interface regulator card CCA (J5, J6, or J7). Tighten two captive screws to secure cable

15. Attach the 30 dB LNA power cable to the Interface regulator card CCA. (J8, J11, or J12) If the Target low beam path was removed replace the stability monitor power plugs on the interface CCA J4 and J18 connections.


17. Close rear door of cabinet.











* *

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68D

6.3.1.1.2 Replace RF Assembly Interface Regulator card CCA A4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Open end wrench, 5/16 inch Nut driver, ¼ inch Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in lbs Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an RF Assembly Interface Regulator card CCA A4, in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

During this procedure there is the removal of numerous small hardware items. If these items are dropped or lost serious equipment issues could result.

Procedure 6.3.1.1 “Replace RF Assembly 1A1, 2A1” may be used to remove the RF assembly from the radar prior to Interface Regulator card removal at the technician’s discretion.


Removal












9. Disconnect the power/control cable from J14 interface regulator card assembly to switch S1.



*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68E

12. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W3205 [W3305] to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J3. Disconnect cable.

13. Using nut driver, remove (and retain) the nut, lock washer and flat washer that secure grounding jumper from the RF Assembly E1 to the CCA card.

14. Disconnect the power/control connector for switch S2 from the CCA card J13.



16. Disconnect the power cable from 30 dB LNA at J10 (Target Low), J11 (Target High) or J12 (Wx) on the CCA A4 interface regulator card. Remove the stability monitor power plugs on the interface CCA J4 and J18 connections.

17. Using the flat blade screw driver, disconnect each DB-9 connector from J10, J11 and J12.

18. Disconnect wrist strap from cabinet grounding stud.


19. Connect wrist strap to the cabinet grounding stud.

20. Using nut driver, remove (and retain) the 8 nuts , 8 lock washers and 8 flat washers that secure the CCA card to the RF assembly. Remove the interface regulator card. Remove (and retain) the 9 card stand-offs from the RF assembly.

21. Record the switch positions for S2, S3, and S4 of the removed card.

Installation

1. Inspect Interface Regulator Card for foreign objects. Set the Interface Regulator Switch settings (S2, S3 and S4) to the recorded values from the removed card (step 21).




4. Install the 9 card stand-offs on the studs on the rear of the RF assembly. Align the mounting holes of the interface regulator card and install the card on the RF assembly.

5. Ensure cables and plugs are secured in locations that do not interfere with the card installation. Using fingers, install the ground lead from the RF assembly E1 ground to the Interface Regulator card on the lower right hand side of the card. (Ground lug first, flat washer second, lock washer third and nut last).

6. Using fingers, install the remaining 8 nuts, 8 lock washers and 8 flat washers that secure the CCA card to the RF assembly. (Flat washer first, lock washer second and nut last)

7. Using nut driver, tighten two the nuts (9) that hold the Interface Regulator card in place.

NOTE: Ensure that the Interface Regulator Card is properly installed and all hardware is accounted for.

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68F

8. Connect cable W32 from RF Assembly A1 connector A4J9.

9. Connect cable W31 from RF Assembly A1 connector A4J10.

10. Connect the power/control cable from J14 interface regulator card assembly to switch S1.

11. Connect W2 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J20. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten the two captive screws that secure cable.

12. Connect W11 to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J1. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten the two captive screws that secure cable.

13. Connect W3205 [W3305] to RF Assembly A1 connector A4J3. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure cable.

14. Connect the power/control connector for switch S2 from the CCA card J13.

15. Remove ESD wrist strap from ground stud.



17. Connect the power cable from 30 dB LNA at J10 (Target Low), J11 (Target High) or J12 (Wx) on the CCA A4 interface regulator card. Connect the stability monitor power plugs on the interface CCA J4 and J18 connections.

18. Using the flat blade screw driver, connect each DB-9 connector to J10, J11 and J12.

19. Perform visual inspection of the installed card and RF assembly.


21. Switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply A11A2 to ON position.










*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68G

6.3.1.1.3 Replace RF Assembly Target Hi / Low Switch (S2)

Tools: Open end wrench, 5/16 inch #1 Phillips screw driver Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in lbs Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an RF Assembly Target Hi / Low Switch., in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


The standoffs used to mount the S2 switch may turn when the attachment screws are removed, a small adjustable wrench may be required to hold the standoff in place.



Removal











8. Remove plug J13 (S2 power/control) from the Interface regulator card CCA A4

9. Using the open end wrench remove the SMA cables going to S2 J1, J2 and J3.

10. Using the Philips screw driver, remove the 1 screw, 1 lock washer, and 1 flat washer that attach S2 to the RF assembly.

11. While holding the S2 switch and using the Philips screw driver, remove the remaining 1 screw, 1 lock washer, and 1 flat washer that attach S2 to the RF assembly.

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68H

12. Disconnect ESD wrist strap to wrist and cabinet grounding stud.

Installation

1. Inspect the replacement S2 for damage and ensure the connection threads appear normal.

2. Insert 1 screw with the flat washer contacting S2, the lock washer then the screw head. Position the switch on the standoffs and use the Philips screw driver the secure the switch to the RF assembly. Do not completely tighten the screw.

3. After aligning the switch S2, insert the remaining screw, flat washer, and lock washer and fully tighten both screws using the Philips screw driver.

4. Using the torque wrench install the SMA cables going to S2 J1, J2 and J3.Tighten to 8 inch pounds +/- 1 inch pound.

5. Attach plug J13 (S2 power/control) to the Interface regulator card CCA A4










12. Verify operation of Switch S2 for high beam low beam selection.

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68I

6.3.1.1.4 Replace RF Assembly Test Switch S1

Tools: Open end wrench, 5/16 inch #1 Phillips screw driver Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in lbs Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an RF Assembly Target Hi / Low Switch., in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


The standoffs used to mount the S2 switch may turn when the attachment screws are removed, a small adjustable wrench may be required to hold the standoff in place.



Removal











8. Remove plug J14 (S1 power/control) from the Interface regulator card CCA A4

9. Using the open end wrench remove the SMA cables going to S2 J1 and J3.

10. Using the Philips screw driver, remove the 2 screws, 2 lock washers, and 2 flat washers that attach S1 to the RF assembly.

11. While holding the S1 switch and using the open end wrench, SMA connector to S1J2.

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-68J

12. Disconnect ESD wrist strap to wrist and cabinet grounding stud.

Installation

13. Inspect the replacement S1 for damage and ensure the connection threads appear normal.

14. Align the replacement S1 switch J2 with the SMA connection of PD1 (3 port splitter)and using fingers tighten the SMA connection.

16. Insert 2 screws with the flat washer contacting S1, the lock washer then the screw head. Position the switch on the standoffs and use the Philips screw driver the secure the switch to the RF assembly. Do not completely tighten the screw.

17. Using the torque wrench install and tighten the SMA cables going to S1 J1, J2 and J3.Tighten to 8 inch pounds +/- 1 inch pound.

18. Using the Philips screw driver tighten the 2 screws attaching S1 to the RF assembly.

19. Attach plug J14 (S1 power/control) to the Interface regulator card CCA A4.








24. Verify operation of Switch S1 for RF path selection.



*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-69

Figure 6-7. RF Assembly 1 A 1 [2 A 1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-70

Figure 6-8. RF Assembly 1A1 [2A1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-71

6.3.1.2 Replace Stability Monitor 1A2, 2A2

Tools: Open end wrench, 5/16 inch Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Nut driver, 8 mm Torque wrench, with 5/16 inch adapter, set to 8.0 in.lb Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Stability Monitor replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


Removal








5. Place maintenance step stool in front of Unit 1 [Unit 2].

6. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3204 [W3304] from Stability Monitor A2 connector J1.

7. Move maintenance step stool to one side.


8. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W39 from Stability Monitor A2 connector J2.

9. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W38 from Stability Monitor A2 connector S1J3.

10. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W5402 [W5502] from Stability Monitor A2 connector S1J2.



13. Using nut driver, loosen four locknuts (2) and flat washers that secure Stability Monitor A2 to cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-72

13. Carefully remove Stability Monitor A2 from cabinet. Feed cable W5402 [W5502] through port at lower end of Stability Monitor.

Installation

1. Inspect Stability Monitor A2 for foreign objects.



3. Carefully feed cable W5402 [W5502] through port at lower end of Stability Monitor A2.

4. Carefully position Stability Monitor A2 on studs of slot in Stability Monitor A2.

5. Using nut driver, tighten four locknuts (2) and flat washers to secure Stability Monitor A2 to cabinet.

NOTE: Ensure that Stability Monitor is pushed to the full up position in the cabinet, before tightening locknuts.



8. Using torque wrench, connect cable W38 to Stability Monitor A2 connector S1J3. Tighten to 8 ±1 pound-inches.

9. Using torque wrench, connect cable W5402 [W5502] to Stability Monitor A2 connector S1J2. Tighten to 8 ±1 inch-pounds.

10. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W39 to Stability Monitor A2 connector. J2.


11. Place maintenance step stool in front of Unit 1 [Unit 2].

12. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3204 [W3304] to Stability Monitor A2 connector J1.

13. Remove maintenance step stool.





16. Set REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Channel Processing to Active.



19. Run MDS Test Signal Setup on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], Paragraph 6.3.13.1.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-73

Figure 6-9. Stability Monitor 1A2 [2A2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-74

Figure 6-10. Stability Monitor 1A2 [2A2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-75

6.3.1.3 Replace Weather Downconverter 1A3, 2A3

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, ½ inch wide tip, 12¼ inch length blade

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Weather Downconverter replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

See Figure 6-11 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal







5. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Weather Downconverter A3 to cabinet.

6. Firmly grasp Weather Downconverter A3 and carefully remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Weather Downconverter for bent pins or foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A3 for bent pins or foreign objects.

3. Firmly grasp and carefully slide Weather Downconverter into slot A3 until fully seated in cabinet.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Weather Down-converter A3 to cabinet.





8. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.


10. Run Wx Receiver Gain Calibration on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], Paragraph 6.3.12.1.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-76

Figure 6-11. Weather Downconverter 1A3 [2A3]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-77

6.3.1.4 Replace Target Downconverter 1A4, 2A4


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Target Downconverter replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


Removal







5. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Target Downconverter A4 to cabinet.

6. Firmly grasp Target Downconverter A4 and carefully remove from cabinet. Installation

Installation

1. Inspect Target Downconverter for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp and carefully slide Target Downconverter into slot A4 until fully seated in cabinet.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Target Downconverter A4 to cabinet.





8. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-78

Figure 6-12. Target Downconverter 1A4 [2A4]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-79

6.3.1.5 Replace Local Oscillator 1A5, 2A5

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, ½ inch wide tip, 12¼ inch length blade ESD safe vacuum cleaner

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Local Oscillator replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

A replacement Local Oscillator typically does not include the Quartz Oscillators. If necessary, the Quartz Oscillators are removed from the replaced Local Oscillator and installed in the replacement Local Oscillator.


Removal







5. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Local Oscillator A5 to cabinet.

6. Firmly grasp Local Oscillator A5 and carefully remove from cabinet.

7. If necessary, transfer Quartz Oscillators from removed Local Oscillator to new Local Oscillator, Paragraph 6.3.1.5.1.

Installation

1. Inspect Local Oscillator for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp and carefully slide Local Oscillator into slot A5 until fully seated in cabinet.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Local Oscillator A5 to cabinet.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-80





11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-81

Figure 6-13. Local Oscillator 1A5 [2A5]


6-82

6.3.1.5.1 Quartz Oscillator Transfer

(This procedure for Emergency Use only - invalidates Local Oscillator LRU Production Acceptance Test data and warranty.)

Tools: ESD mat ESD wrist strap Phillips screwdriver, No. 0 Masking tape, ½ inch wide Marker pen, felt Nut driver, ¼ inch. Needlenose pliers

ESD precautions must be taken during this

procedure, refer to paragraph 6.1.1

NOTES: Quartz Oscillators Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 must be removed from the old Local Oscillator and installed in the new one.

Each Quartz Oscillator relates to a Site Frequency. Locations of Quartz Oscillators must be maintained.

The Quartz Oscillator Y5 is provided with the new Local Oscillator, therefore will not require replacement.


Removal (from removed Local Oscillator)

1. Place Local Oscillator on ESD mat.

2. Connect ESD wrist strap to wrist and ESD mat.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove 63 screws (1) that secure cover (2) and cover (3) to Local Oscillator housing (4).

4. Apply a strip of masking tape to each Quartz Oscillator Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 (5).

5. Using marker pen, identify on masking tape each Quartz Oscillator (5) Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4.

6. Using nut driver, remove four hex nuts (6). Use needlenose pliers to remove lock washers and flat washers that secure Quartz Oscillators Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 to CCA (7).

7. Remove Quartz Oscillators Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4, and place on ESD mat.

Installation (into new Local Oscillator)

1. Place Local Oscillator on ESD mat.

2. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove 63 screws (1) that secure cover (2) and cover (3) to Local Oscillator housing (4).

* *

* *

* *


6-83

NOTE: Crystals are shipped with nuts on the screws. Remove nuts before placing in Local Oscillator.

3. Carefully align contact pins (8) and threaded studs (9) of Quartz Oscillators Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4 with contact sockets in CCA (7). Ensure contact pins protrude through each contact socket.

4. Using nut driver, install four hex nuts (6), lock washers and flat washers to secure Quartz Oscillator Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4 to CCA (7). Do not use excessive force.

5. Remove masking tape (5).

6. Inspect Local Oscillator for metal shavings that may have been released during Quartz Oscillator installation. Remove any metal shavings found using an ESD safe vacuum cleaner.

7. Using Phillips screwdriver, install 63 screws (1) to secure cover (2) and cover (3) to Local Oscillator housing (4).

8. Disconnect ESD wrist strap from wrist and ESD mat.

**

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-84

Figure 6-14. Quartz Oscillator Transfer

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-85

6.3.1.6 Replace Upconverter 1A6, 2A6


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an Upconverter replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


Removal






4. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply A11A2 to OFF.

5. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Upconverter A6 to cabinet.

6. Firmly grasp Upconverter A6 and carefully remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Upconverter for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp and carefully slide Upconverter into slot A6 until fully seated in cabinet.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Upconverter A6 to cabinet.







10. Run MDS Test Signal Setup on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], Paragraph 6.3.13.1.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-86

Figure 6-15. Upconverter 1A6 [2A6]

6.3.1.7 - 6.3.1.15 Reserved

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-87

6.3.1.16 Replace Cabinet UPS 1A10, 2A10

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Phillips screwdriver, No. 2

Personnel: Two

WARNING

This procedure requires lifts of greater than 16 kilograms (35.2 pounds). To avoid injury, a

minimum of two people are needed. NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Cabinet UPS

replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]


Removal and Replacement of the new APC Smart UPS is found in Paragraph 6.3.1.17.

Removal




3. Transition SCDI A [SCDI B] to Maintenance Standby.

Location: Standby SCDI

4. Select Shutdown SCDI on Local Workstation Actions screen.

5. Enter valid username and password on Control Access screen. Wait until ok prompt appears.



7. On front of Cabinet UPS A10 (1), press OFF switch (2).

Location: DP4 [DP5] Panel

8. Open panel door.

9. Open Circuit breakers REX/SDP1A and REX/SDP2A [REX/SDP1B and REX/SDP2B].

10. Close and secure door of the panel.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-88



12. Disconnect cable W42 P1 [W42 P1] from Cabinet UPS A10 connector J4.

13. Disconnect up to six power cables from Cabinet UPS A10 connectors J6 through J13.

14. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W4005 [W4105] to Cabinet UPS A10 connector J1. Disconnect cable.

15. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W1 to Cabinet UPS A10 connector J2. Disconnect cable.

16. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove screw (3) that secures grounding jumper (4) to Cabinet UPS A10.


17. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (5) and chamfer washers that secure Cabinet UPS A10 (1) to cabinet.

18. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp handles (6) and carefully remove Cabinet UPS A10 (1) from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Cabinet UPS for bent pins or foreign objects. Set Dip switches of serial card on back of UPS to 1 = up, 2 = up, 3 = down, 4 = down.



3. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp handles (6) and carefully slide Cabinet UPS (1) into slot A10 until fully seated.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (5) and chamfer washers to secure Cabinet UPS A10 (1) to cabinet.


5. Using Phillips screwdriver, install screw (3) to secure grounding jumper (4) to Cabinet UPS A10.

6. Connect cable W1 to Cabinet UPS A10 connector J2. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

7. Connect cable W4005 [W4105] to Cabinet UPS A10 connector J1. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

8. Connect up to six power cables to Cabinet UPS A10 connectors J6 through J13.

9. Connect cable W42 P1 [W42 P1] to Cabinet UPS A10 connector J4.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-89

10. Check circuit breaker (7) on Cabinet UPS A10, reset to closed if necessary.

11. Close and secure rear door of cabinet.

Location: DP4 [DP5] Panel

12. Open panel door.

13. Close Circuit breakers REX/SDP1A and REX/SDP2A [REX/SDP1B and REX/SDP2B].

14. Close and secure door of the panel.


15. On front of Cabinet UPS (1) A10, press ON/TEST switch (2).


16. Wait until SCDI Main Screen appears.

17. Ensure Channel UPS on REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

18. Ensure SCDI UPS on SCDI A [SCDI B] Status and Control screen does not indicate a fault.


19. On front of Cabinet UPS (1) A10, press and hold ON/TEST switch (2) until LED to left of ON/TEST switch is flashing. Release test switch (2) after LEDs begin flashing.

20. Wait for Cabinet UPS to transition to battery then back to AC.



22. Ensure a SCDI on UPS message has been raised, followed by a SCDI on AC message.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-056 TI 6310.57A

6-90

Figure 6-16. Cabinet Original UPS 1A10 [2A10]


6-91

6.3.1.17 Cabinet Smart -UPS 1A10, 2A10


Personnel: Two

WARNING

This procedure requires lifts of greater than 16 kilograms (35.2 pounds). To avoid injury, a minimum of two people are needed.

NOTES: This procedure requires that one of the ASR-11 Radar channels be taken out of service;

therefore coordination must be performed with Air Traffic Services to schedule downtime before this procedure is performed.

Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Cabinet UPS replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

System Control and Data Interface unit A (SCDI-A) is powered through the UPS in REX/SDP-A and SCDI-B is powered through the UPS in REX/SDP-B. The SCDI associated with the REX/SDP UPS being replaced must be shut down to the ok prompt before the old UPS can be turned off.

Removal

Location Selected SCDI

1. If Monitor, Take Control of ASR-11 System.

a. Take Control with SCDI B [SCDI A].

b. Set SCDI B [SCDI A] as Online Selected.

c. Set REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] as Online Selected.


2. Shut down SCDI A [SCDI B] to a "OK" prompt

a. On SCDI A [SCDI B] left click and hold in the grey background screen.

b. Select Local Workstation actions.

c. Press the SCDI A [SCDI B] shutdown button on local workstation actions screen.

d. Wait for SCDI A [SCDI B] to display “ok” prompt.

CAUTION

* *


6-92


3. Turn off AC breaker to the REX/SDP UPS unit DP4-11 [DP5-11]. This will power down the SCDI A [SCDI B] and REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] units.

4. Snap off the front plastic covers from the APC Smart-UPS RT.

5. Remove the battery covers.

6. Remove battery packs from APC Smart-UPS RT and place aside.

7. From the rear of the APC Smart-UPS RT remove the following.

Incoming AC power cord

All power cords going to supported equipment

Two serial cables

Earth ground lead

8. Remove four screws holding front panel to equipment rack.

9. Slide the APC Smart-UPS RT unit out of rack and place on work bench.

10. Remove screws in front panel holding units together.

11. Remove front panel.

12. Remove common screw holding rear of units together.

13. Separate the APC Smart-UPS RT sections.

Installation

1. If present, unplug and permanently remove the UPS auxiliary battery pack 1A10BT1 [2A10BT1], and set it aside as it will NOT be reinstalled. AJW-147 has determined that when the auxiliary battery packs are used, over time, the internal batteries of both the RT2000 UPS and the auxiliary battery pack become overcharged, frequently swell and ultimately fail.

2. Determine if the replacement UPS is a model RT1000 or a model RT2000. If it is a model RT2000, skip ahead to step 5.

3. To install a model RT1000, remove the expander card from the back of the failed UPS and install it in the new replacement RT1000 UPS chassis.

4. The RT1000 power input connector is not compatible with the existing power cord that was used by the RT2000. The RT1000 carton includes a power adapter that must be installed in order to allow the existing power cord to be used to power the new RT1000.

5. Assemble the front panel onto the new APC Smart-UPS RT sections.

6. Install common screw at rear of the APC Smart-UPS RT sections.

*

* *

*


6-93

7. Set Dip switches on back of UPS to down, down, up, up (0011) to allow the UPS to run to battery depletion (shown in Figure 6-17).

8. Slide APC Smart-UPS RT unit into equipment rack.

9. Secure with the four front panel screws.

10. At the rear of the APC Smart-UPS RT re-connect the following

Incoming AC power cord

All power cords going to supported equipment

Two serial cables

Earth ground lead

11. Install the front grills on the APC Smart-UPS RT unit, sliding the left side in first, and then pushing forward to snap the grill in place.

12. Turn ON AC breaker to the REX/SDP UPS unit DP4-11 [DP5-11]

13. Turn on the new UPS by briefly pressing the button labeled “Test”.

14. Turn on both REX/SDP power supplies.

15. Wait for the SCDI to reboot.


Returning the ASR-11 Radar to service:

1. Select REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to ON line selected.

2. Select REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] to online Standby.

3. Acknowledge all alarms and make sure everything has green status.

4. Coordinate with Air Traffic Controllers to ensure that there are no problems and then release control.

Figure 6-17. APC Smart UPS

*

Dip Switch for DB9

Connectors Set to 0011

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-94

.3.1.18 Replace Cabinet UPS Battery Pack 1A10BT1, 2A10BT1

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Cabinet UPS Battery Pack replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

The Cabinet UPS Battery Pack is hot-swappable and isolated from electrical hazards. The Cabinet UPS and all loads are left on during this procedure.


Removal



2. Remove front panel (1) from Cabinet UPS A10 (2).

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove three screws (3) to secure battery access cover (4) to Cabinet UPS A10 (2).

4. Open battery access cover (4).

5. Firmly grasp wires (5) near Cabinet UPS Battery 1 connector (6) and pull cables free from UPS connector.

6. Remove Cabinet UPS Battery 1 (7) from Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

7. Remove foam spacer (8) from Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

8. Firmly grasp wires (9) near Cabinet UPS Battery 2 connector (10) and pull cables free from UPS connector.

9. Remove Cabinet UPS Battery 2 (11) from Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

Installation

1. Inspect Cabinet UPS Batteries 1 and 2 for foreign objects.


2. Inspect empty Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12) for foreign objects.

3. Slide Cabinet UPS Battery 2 (11) into Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

4. Connect Cabinet UPS Battery 2 wires (9) to Cabinet UPS Battery 2 connector (10), until connector is fully seated.

5. Insert foam spacer (8) into Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

6. Slide Cabinet UPS Battery 1 (7) into Cabinet UPS Battery Compartment (12).

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-95

7. Connect Cabinet UPS Battery 1 wires (5) to Cabinet UPS Battery 2 connector (6), until connector is fully seated.

8. Close battery access cover (4).

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, install three screws (3) to secure battery access cover (4) to Cabinet UPS A10 (2).

10. Replace front panel (1) on Cabinet UPS A10 (2).

11. On front of Cabinet UPS (2) A10, press and hold ON/TEST switch (13) until LED to left of ON/TEST switch is flashing. Release test switch (13) after LEDs begin flashing.

12. Wait for Cabinet UPS to transition to battery then back to AC.



14. Ensure a SCDI on UPS message has been raised, followed by a SCDI on AC message.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-96

Figure 6-18. Cabinet UPS Battery Pack 1A10BT1 [2A10BT1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-97

6.3.1.19 Replace REX Power Supply 1A11A2, 2A11A2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a REX Power Supply replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

Latch indicators on quarter-turn fasteners must be pointing right during removal and installation. This indicates latch is unlocked.


Removal







5. Wait until PWR ON and FLT indications on REX Power Supply A11A2 are not illuminated.

6. Loosen two quarter-turn fasteners (2) that secure REX Power Supply A11A2 (3) to cabinet.

7. Firmly grasp handle (4) on REX Power Supply A11A2 (3) and remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect REX Power Supply for bent pins.

2. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply to OFF position.


3. Inspect location A11A2 for foreign objects.

4. Firmly grasp handle (4) on REX Power Supply (3) and carefully install into slot A11A2 until fully seated.

5. Tighten two quarter-turn fasteners (2) to secure REX Power Supply A11A2 (3) to cabinet.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-98





11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-99

.

Figure 6-19. Rex Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2]

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-100

6.3.1.20 Replace NTIA Filter Assembly 1A12, 2A12

Tools: Open end wrench, 5/16 inch

Torque Wrench with 5/16 inch adapter set at 8.5 in. lb Phillips screwdriver, No. 3

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for a Filter Assembly replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.]

See Figure 6-20 for Find Numbers and component physical locations.

Removal






4. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply A11A2 to OFF position. See Figure 6-34.



6. Using open end wrench, disconnect cable W102 from Filter Assembly A12 connector J1.




10. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove three screws (2) that secure Filter Assembly A12 (3) to cabinet.

11. Remove Filter Assembly A12 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Filter Assembly for foreign objects.


2. Using Phillips screwdriver, secure Filter Assembly A12 (3) to cabinet with three screws (2).


**

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-101

4. Using open end wrench, connect cable W102 to Filter Assembly A12 connector J1.




8. Using torque wrench, tighten connector for cables W101 through W104.






12. Ensure RF Output Power - Driver A [Driver B] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

13. Perform the Online MDS Test Signal Setup (refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.1).




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-102

Figure 6-20. Filter Assembly 1A12 [2A12]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-103

6.3.1.21 Replace Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10, 2A9A10

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 ESD wrist strap

Materials: ESD packing material

Personnel: One

CAUTION

ESD precautions must be taken during this procedure, refer to Paragraph 6.1.1

NOTES: See Figure 6-21 for find numbers and physical locations

WARNING

Restarting the Standby (failed) REX/SDP Channel without installing Radar Interface CCA will likely cause failures on the

Selected REX/SDP Channel.

Removal


1. If Monitor Only, take control.

2. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDPB] to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to idle.

3. Depending on the nature of the failure that prompted this corrective maintenance, the command to transition Channel Processing to Idle may fail. If this occurs, proceed to next step.




6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to OFF position.

7. Remove FPDP cable (2) between the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] and the Mercury DSP 1A9A8 [2A9A8]

8. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure both air blockers (3) that are adjacent to Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

10. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull both air blockers (3) adjacent to the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] straight out of the cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-104

11. Unlock the handles of Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] by simultaneously pressing the red tabs.

12. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] straight out of the cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Radar Interface CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.


2. Inspect location 1A9A10 [2A9A10] of VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] for foreign objects.

3. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide Radar Interface CCA into VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] slot 1A9A10 [2A9A10] until fully seated.

4. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide both air blockers (3) adjacent to the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] into VME cage 1A9 [2A9].

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] to VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure air blockers (3) that are adjacent to Radar Interface CCA in the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

7. Install FPDP cable (2) between Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] and SDP Mercury DSP 1A9A8 [2A9A8]. (NOTE: Ensure red line FPDP cable is on the bottom)

8. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to ON position.




11. Wait until REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] appears green on SCDI main screen.

12. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Standby.


14. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to online standby.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-105

Figure 6-21. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] – Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-106

6.3.1.22 Replace DSP CCA 1A9A8, 2A9A8



Personnel: One

CAUTION



Removal









7. Remove the FPDP cable (2) between the DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] and the Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10].

8. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure both air blockers (3) that are adjacent to DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] in the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

10. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull both air blockers (3) adjacent to the DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] straight out of the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

11. Unlock the handles of DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] by simultaneously pressing the tabs apart.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-107

12. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] straight out of the cabinet VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

Installation

1. Inspect DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide DSP CCA into VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] slot 1A9A8 [2A9A8] until fully seated.

4. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide both air blockers (3) adjacent to DSP CCA into VME cage 1A9 [2A9].

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] to VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure air blockers (3) that are adjacent to DSP CCA to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

7. Install FPDP cable (2) between DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] and Radar Interface CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10]. (NOTE: Ensure red line FPDP cable is on the bottom).








14. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/B] to online standby.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-108


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-109

6.3.1.23 Replace SDP SBC CCA 1A9A1, 2A9A1

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 ESD wrist strap Slot screwdriver, No. 1


Personnel: One

CAUTION


NOTES: See Figure 6-23 for find numbers and physical locations.

Damage may result to the SBC if W112 Jack screws are over tightened (finger tight only).

Removal









7. Using a flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws of cable W112 and remove the 9 pin Micro D connector from SBC location 1A9A1A1J1 (2) [2A9A1A1J1].

8. Remove cables W4003P1 (LAN2) [W4103P1 (LAN2] and W4002P1 (LAN1) [W4102P1 (LAN1)] from SBC location 1A9A1LAN1 [2A9A1LAN1] and 1A9A1LAN2 [2A9A1LAN2].

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure both air blockers (3) adjacent to SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] in the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

10. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

11. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull both air blockers (3) adjacent to the SBC CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] straight out of the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

12. Unlock the handles of the SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] by simultaneously pressing the tabs.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-110

13. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull SBC CCA 19A1 [2A9A1] straight out of the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

Installation

1. Inspect SDP SBC CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.

2. Verify DIP switch S1 position matches the replaced SBC CCA. DIP switch S1 Bit 1 controls Transition Range. OFF = 6.5 nmi transition range. ON = 8.5 nmi transition range. If S1 is set incorrectly it will cause a Transition Range Mismatch fault between the two ASDP channels. See figure 6-24.



4. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide SBC CCA into VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] slot 1A9A1 [2A9A1] until fully seated.

5. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide both air blocker (3) adjacent to SBC CCA into VME cage 1A9 [2A9].

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] to VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

7. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure air blocker that is adjacent to SBC CCA to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

8. Install cable W112 with 9 pin Micro D connector end to SBC location 1A9A1A1J1 (2) [2A9A1A1J1]. Finger tight the two jack screws of cable W112.

9. Install cables W4002P1 [W4102P1] and W4003P1 [W4103P1] to SBC location 1A9A1LAN1 [2A9A1LAN1] and 1A9A1LAN2 [2A9A1LAN2].





13. From Local Workstation Actions in the main pop-up menu, open a UNIX window. Login as root.

14. At the # prompt type telnet psra [psrb if the SBC was replaced in REX B]

15. The -> prompt will appear.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-111

16. At the -> prompt, type the three copy commands exactly as shown, including quotes (“). Each of the three copy commands is a single line.

copy “psr_mv5110_node_init.vxw”,”/tffs0/psr_mv5110_node_init.vxw”

copy “psr_mv5110_node_init.vxWorks.sym”,”/tffs0/psr_mv5110_node_init.vxWorks.sym”

copy “psr_mv5110_node_init.vxWorks”,”/tffs0/psr_mv5110_node_init.vxWorks”

17. Type close to exit telnet.

18. Close the UNIX window.






11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-112

Figure 6-24. DIP Switch S1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-113

6.3.1.24 Replace SDP Power Supply 1A9A13, 2A9A13



Personnel: One

CAUTION



Removal









7. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

8. Unlock the handles of SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] by simultaneously pressing the tabs.

9. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] straight out of the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

Installation

1. Inspect SDP Power Supply for bent pins or foreign objects.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-114



3. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide SDP Power Supply into VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] slot 1A9A13 [2A9A13] until fully seated.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].









Figure 6-25. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-115

6.3.1.25 Replace SDP Fan Tray Assembly (Hybricon) 1A9A26, 2A9A26



Personnel: One

CAUTION



Removal




3. Depending on the nature of the failure that prompted this corrective maintenance, the command to transition Channel Processing to idle may fail. If this occurs, proceed to next step.





7. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen four captive screws (2) that secures the SDP Fan Tray Assembly 1A9A26 [2A9A26] to the SDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9].

8. Firmly grasp SDP Fan Tray Assembly (3) 1A9A26 [2A9A26] and carefully pull it straight out of the cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect SDP Fan Tray Assembly for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp SDP Fan Tray Assembly (3) and carefully slide into VME card cage 1A9 [2A9] location 1A9A26 [2A9A26] until fully seated.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten four captive screws (2) to secure the SDP Fan Assembly 1A9A26 [2A9A26] SDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9].

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-116


6. Ensure that fan status FAN FAILED LED (4) is not lit.








11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-117

Figure 6-26. ASDP Chassis 1A9 [2A9] Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-118

6.3.1.26 Replace I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24, 2A9A24

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 ESD wrist strap ESD Mat Flat screwdriver, small Insulated Drop-Light (Optional)


Personnel: One

CAUTION

ESD precautions must be taken during this procedure, refer to Paragraph 6.1.1 Extreme care should be exercised while disconnecting and connecting all ribbon cables. Do not apply excessive force to locking arms. Alternately apply pressure to the top and bottom locking arms, slowly working the plug out of the jack. The locking arms will snap into place when the plug is firmly seated.

NOTES: See Figures 6-27, 6-28, 6-29 and 6-30 for Find numbers and physical locations.

Removal








6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2] to OFF position.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-119




10. Using flat screwdriver, disconnect W112 from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J1 [2A9A24J1].

11. Using flat screwdriver, disconnect W5403 [W5503] from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J13 [2A9A24J13].

12. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen screws securing I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] (3) to the ASDP Card Cage frame.

13. Push in the red locks at the top and bottom handles on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

14. Lift up on the top handle and down on bottom handle to eject the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] from the VME card cage.

15. Slide out the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] halfway until jacks J16 – J19 are accessible.

16. Referencing the above Caution, disconnect W9 from J16 on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

17. Referencing the above Caution, disconnect W5603 [W5601] from J17 on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

18. Referencing the above Caution, disconnect W8 from J18 on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

19. Referencing the above Caution, disconnect W5604 [W5602] from J19 on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

20. Disconnect W51 from the I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23J24 [2A9A23J24] (4) by separating both locks at the same time.

21. Disconnect W52 from the I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23J25 [2A9A23J25] by separating both locks at the same time.

22. Carefully remove I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] from ASDP Card Cage slot 1A10 [2A10] on the back of the VME backplane with cables W51 and W52 connected to CCA and lay flat on an ESD mat.

23. Remove cable W51 from the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J22 [2A9A24J22] by separating both locks at the same time.

24. Remove cable W52 from the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J23 [2A9A24J23] by separating both locks at the same time.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-120

Installation


1. Inspect new I/O Transition CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.

2. Set the jumper J1 on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] on pins 1 and 2 [2 and 3] (located on lower center of I/O Transition CCA) to set REX/SDP channel identification to PSR A [PSR B].

3. Connect cable W51 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J22 [2A9A24J22]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

4. Connect cable W52 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J23 [2A9A24J23]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

5. Inspect location 1A10 [2A10] on the back of the VME backplane of ASDP Card Cage for foreign objects.

6. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] halfway into the ASDP Card Cage slot 1A10 [2A10] on the VME backplane. Do not fully seat the CCA.

7. Connect W51 to the I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23J24 [2A9A23J24]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

8. Connect W52 to the I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23J25 [2A9A23J25]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

9. Connect W5604 [W5602] to J19 (bottom) on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

10. Connect W8 to J18 (bottom) on the SDP I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

11. Connect W5603 [W5601] to J17 (top) on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

12. Connect W9 from J16 (top) on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24]. Ensure both top and bottom locks are in place prior to connecting cable. Snap both locks into place to secure cable once it is installed.

13. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] into the ASDP Card Cage slot 1A10 [2A10] on the back of the VME backplane until fully seated.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-121

14. Using Philips screwdriver, tighten screws to secure I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] to the ASDP Card Cage frame

15. Using flat screwdriver, connect W5403 [W5503] to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J13 [2A9A24J13].

16. Using flat screwdriver, connect W112 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24J1 [2A9A24J1].

17. Disconnect ESD wrist strap from wrist and cabinet ground.



19. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of REX Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2] to ON Position.

20. Set switch AC ON (2) on front of ASDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to ON Position.







11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-122

Figure 6-27. REX/SDP Cabinet Unit 1 [Unit 2] – Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-123


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-124

Figure 6-29. I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] – Shown in Chassis, ASDP Chassis Back View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-125

Figure 6-30. I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] – Side View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-126

6.3.1.27 Replace SDP Chassis 1A9, 2A9

Tools: Digital Multimeter Flat Screwdriver Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Phillips screwdriver, No. 2

ESD wrist strap Open end wrench, 5/16” Insulated Drop-Light (Optional)


Personnel: Two (This procedure will be performed by Second Level Engineering)

CAUTION


NOTES: Removal and installation procedures of a SDP chassis is the same for either REX/SDP Channels. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP A. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP B.] See Figures 6-31, 6-32, 6-33 for Find numbers and physical locations.

Removal







5. Set switch AC ON, on front of SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to OFF position.

6. Set switch AC ON, on front of REX/Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2] to OFF position.




9. Disconnect Power cable from Cabinet UPS 1A10J13 [2A10J13] to ASDP power input.

10. Using flat screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W5404 [W5504] to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J7. Disconnect cable.

11. Using flat screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W105 to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-127

[2A9A23] connector J9. Disconnect cable.

12. Using flat screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W5606 to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J3. Disconnect cable.



15. Using flat screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W4001 [W4101] to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J1. Disconnect cable.




19. Disconnect SDP Power Supply status cable (cable labeled A9A25P1) from connector J27 on I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23].

20. Disconnect cable W51 from I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J24 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J22.

21. Disconnect cable W52 from I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J25 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J23.

22. Using flat screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W5403 [W5503] to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J13. Disconnect cable.

23. Disconnect cable W112 from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J1.

24. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

25. Unlock then handles by pressing the red locking tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] forward far enough to access the connectors J16, J17, J18, and J19.

26. Carefully disengage the clips securing cable W8 to connector J18. Disconnect cable W8 from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J18.

27. Carefully disengage the clips securing cable W9 to connector J16. Disconnect cable W9 from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24 connector J16.

28. Carefully disengage the clips securing cable W5603 [W5603] to connector J17. Disconnect cable W5601 [W5603] from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 connector J17.

29. Carefully disengage the clips securing cable W5604 [W5602] to connector J19. Disconnect cable W5602 [W5604] from I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J19.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-128

30. Re-seat I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] and tighten two captive screws.

31. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen screw that holds ground cable to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 connector 1A9A23E1 [2A9A23E1]. Disconnect cable.

32. Using open end wrench, loosen screw that holds ground cable to SDP chassis 1A9 [2A9] grounding stud. Disconnect cable.


33. Prepare ESD safe area or use ESD container/bags to store CCAs for the following steps.


35. Using flat screwdriver, loosen screw that holds serial interface cable W112 from PMC mounted on SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1]. Disconnect cable.

36. Disconnect Ethernet cables from front connector on SBC CCA 1A9A1LAN2 [2A9A1LAN2] and 1A9A1LAN1 [2A9A1LAN1].

37. Disconnect FPDP cable from front connector on DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] to the front connector on RIC CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10].

38. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9]

39. Unlock the handles by simultaneously pressing the tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the SBC CCA 1A9A1 straight out of the cabinet 1A9 [2A9].

40. Place SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1] in ESD bag for safe storage.

41. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

42. Unlock the handles by simultaneously pressing the tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] straight out of the cabinet 1A9 [2A9].

43. Place DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] in ESD bag for safe storage.

44. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the RIC CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

45. Unlock the handles by simultaneously pressing the red tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the RIC CCA 1A9A10 [2A9A10] straight out of the cabinet 1A9 [2A9].

46. Place RIC 1A9A10 [2A9A10] in ESD bag for safe storage.

47. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure the SDP Power Supply Unit 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to the VME card cage 1A9 [2A9].

48. Unlock the handles by simultaneously pressing the tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the SDP Power Supply Unit 1A9A13 [2A9A13] straight out of the cabinet 1A9 [2A9].

49. Place SDP Power Supply Unit 1A9A13 [2A9A13] in ESD bag for safe storage.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-129

50. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws and chamfer washers that secure SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] cabinet.

51. Firmly grasp and carefully remove SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] from cabinet.

NOTE: The four screws and chamfer washers that secure UPS 1A10 [2A10] may have to be removed and the UPS may have to be moved slightly forward (7.6 cm or 3” maximum) to allow for removal of the card cage.

CAUTION

Two personnel must be used and care must be taken when UPS is slowly moved forward.

Installation



2. Install jumper J1 (12) on the I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] as pin 1 to 2 [pin 2 to 3] to set REX/SDP channel identification to A [B].

3. Firmly grasp and carefully slide SDP chassis into slot 1A9 [2A9].

NOTE: Some of the cables may have to be held aside or released from restraints to allow insertion of the SDP chassis.

If the UPS 1A10 [2A10] had been moved forward, carefully slide the UPS back in place and re-install the four screws and chamfer washers.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws and chamfer washers to secure SDP card cage 1A9 [2A9] to the cabinet.

5. Inspect SBC CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.

6. Inspect location A1 of SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] for foreign objects.

7. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure both air blockers that are adjacent to SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] slot A1.

8. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide SBC CCA into SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] slot A1 until fully seated.

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure SBC CCA A1 to SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9].

10. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure both air blockers that are adjacent to SBC CCA A1.

11. Inspect DSP CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-130


14. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide DSP CCA into SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] slot A8 until fully seated.

15. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure DSP CCA A8 to SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9].

16. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure both air blockers that are adjacent to DSP CCA A8.

17. Inspect RIC CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.



20. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide RIC into SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] slot A10 until fully seated.

21. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure RIC A10 to SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9].

22. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure both air blockers that are adjacent to RIC CCA A10.

23. Inspect SDP Power Supply Unit for bent pins or foreign objects.


25. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide Power Supply Unit into SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9] slot A13 until fully seated.

26. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure Power Supply Unit A13 to SDP Card Cage 1A9 [2A9].

27. Connect FPDP cable from front connector on DSP CCA 1A9A8 [2A9A8] to the front connector on RIC 1A9A10 [2A9A10].

NOTE: Ensure red line on FPDP cable is on the bottom.

28. Install serial interface cable W112 to PMC mounted on SBC CCA 1A9A1 [2A9A1].

29. Use finger tips to tighten screws that hold the serial interface cable W112 to the PMC.

30. Connect Ethernet cables from front connector on SBC CCA 1A9A1LAN2 [2A9A1LAN2] and 1A9A1LAN1 [2A9A1LAN1].

31. Disconnect ESD wrist strap from wrist and cabinet grounding stud.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-131


33. Reinstall ground cable from REX/SDP 1E6 [2E6] to SDP chassis 1A9 [2A9] ground stud.

34. Using wrench, tighten screw to hold ground cable to SDP chassis 1A9 [2A9] ground stud.

35. Reinstall ground cable from REX/SDP 1E6 [2E6] to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector 1A9A23E1 [2A9A23E1].

36. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten screw to hold ground cable to I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector 1A9A23E1 [2A9A23E1].

37. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24].

38. Unlock the handles by pressing red locking tabs. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull the CCA forward far enough to access the connectors J16, J17, J18, and J19.

39. Connect cable W5602 [W5604] to SDP I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J19. Ensure the clips are fully engaged and “click” in place.

40. Connect cable W8 to SDP I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector j18. Ensure the clips are fully engaged and “click” in place.

41. Connect cable W5601 [W5603] to SDP I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J17. Ensure the clips are fully engaged and “click” in place.

42. Connect cable W9 to SDP I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J16. Ensure the clips are fully engaged and “click” in place.

43. Reseat I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] and tighten two captive screws (3).

44. Connect serial interface cable W112 to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J1.

45. Connect cable W12 to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J6. Using flat screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.


47. Connect Cable W1 to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J2. Using flat screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.


49. Connect cable W5404 [W5504] to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J7. Using flat screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

50. Connect cable W105 to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J9. Using flat screwdriver tighten two captive screws to secure cable.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-132


53. Connect cable W4001 [W4101] to SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J1. Using flat screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

54. Connect SDP power supply status cable to connector J27 on I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23]. (Cable is labeled A9A25P1).

55. Connect cable W51 from I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J24 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J22.

56. Connect cable W52 from I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] connector J25 to I/O Transition CCA 1A9A24 [2A9A24] connector J23.

57. Connect Power cable from Cabinet UPS 1A10J13 to SDP power input.




60. Set switch AC ON, on front of REX Power Supply 1A11A2 [2A11A2] to ON position.

61. Set switch AC ON, on front of SDP Power Supply 1A9A13 [2A9A13] to ON position.



63. Wait until REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] appears green on SCDI Main Screen.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-133

Figure 6-31. SDP Chassis (Hybricon) 1A [2A9] – Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-134

Figure 6-32. SDP Chassis (Hybricon) 1A9 [2A9] – Rear View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-135

Figure 6-33. SDP I/O Interface CCA 1A9A23 [2A9A23] Front View

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-136

6.3.2 Transmitter RF Cabinet, Unit 3

6.3.2.1 Replace Tx Amplifier Module 3A1 to 3A4 and 3A6 to 3A9

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, large

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for all Tx Amplifier Modules. The main

text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Amplifier Module 3A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Amplifier Modules 3A2, 3A3, 3A4, 3A6, 3A7, 3A8, 3A9.]


Removal



2. Set Tx Amplifier Module 5 [Tx Amplifier Module 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, 3, 4] to off.

3. Set Tx Amplifier Power Supply 5 [Tx Power Supply 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, 3, 4] to off.

Location: Front of Unit 4, Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet


5. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supply A5A1 [A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, A7A1, A7A2, A6A1, A6A2] to OFF position.

6. Close and secure front door of Power Supply Cabinet.

Location: Front of Unit 3, Transmitter RF Cabinet


8. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Amplifier Module A1 [A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, A9] (3) to cabinet.

9. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Module A1 [A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, A9] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Amplifier Module (3) for bent pins or foreign objects.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-137


2. Inspect location A1 [A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, A9] for bent pins or foreign objects.

3. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Module (3) into slot A1 [A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, A9] until fully seated.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Amplifier Module A1 [A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, A9] to cabinet.

5. Close front door of cabinet.



7. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supply A5A1 [A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, A7A1, A7A2, A6A1, A6A2] to ON position.

8. Close and secure front door cabinet.


9. Set Tx Amplifier Power Supply 5 [Tx Power Supply 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, 3, 4] to on.

10. Set Tx Amplifier Module 5 [Tx Amplifier Module 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, 3, 4] to on.

11. Ensure Tx Amplifier Module 5 [Tx Amplifier Module 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, 3, 4] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-138

Figure 6-34. Tx Amplifier Module 3A1 [3A2, 3A3, 3A4, 3A6, 3A7, 3A8, 3A9]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-139

6.3.2.2 Replace Tx Driver Module 3A5, 3A10

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, large

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Driver Modules. The main

text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Driver Module 3A5. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Driver Module 3A10.]


Removal




3. Set Tx Driver A [Tx Driver B] to off.

4. Set Tx Driver Power Supply A [Tx Driver Power Supply B] to off.



6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] to OFF position.

NOTE: Summary Fault and DC Voltage Fail LEDs on the Driver Module remain lit.

7. Close and secure front door of Power Supply Cabinet.



9. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Driver Module A5 [A10] (3) to cabinet.

10. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Driver Module A5 [A10] from cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-140

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Driver Module (3) for bent pins or foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A5 [A10] for bent pins or foreign objects.

3. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Driver Module (3) into slot A5 [A10] until fully seated.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Driver Module A5 [A10] to cabinet

5. Close and secure front door cabinets.

Location: Front of Unit Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet


7. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] to ON position.



9. Set Tx Driver Power Supply A [Tx Driver Power Supply B] to on.

10. Set Tx Driver A [Tx Driver B] to on.


12. Ensure Tx Driver A [Tx Driver B] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-141

Figure 6-35. Tx Driver Module 3A5 [3A10]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-142

6.3.2.3 Replace Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11, 3A12

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, medium

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are the same for both Tx Cabinet Fan Assemblies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A12.]


Removal



2. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure retaining bar (3) to cabinet. Remove retaining bar.

3. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (1) that secure cable W1 [W1] to cabinet connector J2 [J3]. Disconnect cable.

4. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp handle (4) and carefully remove Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly A11 [A12] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly A11 [A12] for foreign objects, ensuring individual fans are free to rotate.


2. Inspect slot A11 [A12] for foreign objects.

3. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly A11 [A12] into slot until fully seated.

4. Connect cable W1[W1] to cabinet connector J2 [J3]. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (1) to secure cable.

5. Position retaining bar (3) on cabinet.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure retaining bar (3).

7. Close and secure front doors of PSR Cabinets.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-143

Figure 6-36. Tx RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A11 [3A12]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-144

6.3.2.4 Replace 1:4 Divider 3A14, 3A15

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, large Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both 1:4 Dividers. The main text of

this procedure is applicable to 1:4 Divider 3A14. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to 1:4 Divider 3A15.]


Removal



2. Transition REX/SDP B to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to Idle.

3. Transition REX/SDP A to Maintenance Selected with Channel Processing set to Idle.

4. Select All Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies off.

5. Set Tx Driver B to off.

6. Set Tx Driver Power Supply B to off.

7. Set Tx Driver A to off.

8. Set Tx Driver Power Supply A to off.



10. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A7A3 to OFF position.


12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, and A5A1 [A6A1, A6A2, A7A1, and A7A2] to OFF position.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-145



14. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (5) that secure Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, A3, and A4 [A6, A7, A8, and A9] (4) to cabinet.

15. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, A3, and A4 [A6, A7, A8, and A9] from cabinet.

16. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W4 [W5] from 1:4 Divider A14 [A15] connector J5.

17. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (6), lock washers and flat washers that secure 1:4 Divider A14 [A15] to cabinet.

18. Remove 1:4 Divider A14 [A15] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect 1:4 Divider for bent pins and foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A14 [A15] for foreign objects.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (6), lock washers and flat washers to secure 1:4 Divider to cabinet in slot A14 [A15].

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W4 [W5] to 1:4 Divider A14 [A15] connector J5.

5. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Modules into slots A1, A2, A3, and A4 [A6, A7, A8, and A9] until fully seated.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (5) to secure Tx Amplifier Module A1, A2, A3, and A4 [A6, A7, A8, and A9] (4) to cabinet



8. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, and A5A1 [A6A1, A6A2, A7A1, and A7A2] (3) to ON position.

9. Set switch AC ON (2) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 to ON position.




12. Set Tx Driver A to on.

13. Set Tx Driver B to on.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-146

14. Select All Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies on.

15. Set REX/SDP A Channel Processing to Active.

16. Ensure RF Output Power - Xmtr Short Pulse and RF Output Power - Xmtr Long Pulse on Tx Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.

17. Transition REX/SDP B to Online Standby.

18. Transition REX/SDP A to Online Selected.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-147

Figure 6-37. 1:4 Divider 3A14 [3A15]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-148

Figure 6-38. 1:4 Divider 3A14 [3A15]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-149

6.3.2.5 Replace Waveguide Combiner 3A17

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, large Ratchet handle, 3/8 inch drive 6 inch extension, 3/8 inch drive 10 mm socket, 3/8 inch drive 10 mm open end wrench 7 mm nut driver Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive Maintenance step stool

Personnel: Two

WARNING

This unit may be hot and may cause burns to exposed skin. Allow sufficient time for cooling.

WARNING


NOTE: See Figure 6-39, Figure 6-40 and Figure 6-41 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal














11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-150

12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, A5A1, A6A1, A6A2, A7A1, and A7A2 to OFF position.



14. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (5) that secure Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, and A9 (4) to cabinet.

15. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, and A9 from cabinet.

16. Using nut driver, remove eight locknuts (6) and flat washers that secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

Location: Rear of Unit 3, Transmitter RF Cabinet


18. If Waveguide Combiner A17 is hot, wait for unit to cool.

19. Use a piece of wood (8) to support Waveguide channel (9).

20. Using an extension, socket and ratchet handle, remove ten bolts (10), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to Waveguide channel (9).

21. Remove gasket (11) between Waveguide Combiner A17 and Waveguide channel (9).

22. To perform the next two steps, have second person support Waveguide Combiner A17.

23. Using an open end wrench or socket and ratchet handle, remove five bolts (12), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

24. Using an open end wrench or socket and ratchet handle, remove five bolts (13), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

25. With assistance of second person, carefully remove Waveguide Combiner A17 from cabinet (7).

Installation

1. Inspect Waveguide Combiner for bent pins and foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.



3. With assistance of second person, carefully install Waveguide Combiner A17into cabinet (7).

4. Using an open end wrench or socket and ratchet handle, install five bolts (13), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

5. Using an open end wrench or socket and ratchet handle, install five bolts (12), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-151

6. Using socket and torque wrench, tighten bolts (12) and (13) to 11.3 N.m (100.0 inch pounds).

7. Insert gasket (11) between Waveguide Combiner A17 and Waveguide channel (9).

8. Using socket, extension and ratchet handle, install ten bolts (10), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to Waveguide channel (9).

9. Using socket, extension and torque wrench, tighten ten bolts (10). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.



11. Using nut driver, install eight locknuts (6) and flat washers to secure Waveguide Combiner A17 to cabinet (7).

12. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Modules into slots A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, and A9 (4) until fully seated.

13. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (5) to secure Tx Amplifier Module A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A7, A8, and A9 (4) to cabinet.



15. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, A5A1, A6A1, A6A2, A7A1, and A7A2 to ON position.








21. Ensure Combiner, RF Output Power - Xmtr Short Pulse and RF Output Power - Xmtr Long Pulse on Tx Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-152

Figure 6-39. Waveguide Combiner 3A17

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-153

Front of Unit 3, Modules Removed


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-154

Rear of Unit 3


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-155

6.3.2.6 Replace Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1, 3CP2, 3CP3, 3CP4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, large Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for all Interface Driver Assemblies.

Text outside square parenthesis is applicable to Interface Driver Assembly CP1 or CP2 (channel A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Interface Driver Assembly CP3 or CP4 (channel B).] Text outside curly parenthesis is applicable to Interface Driver Assembly CP1 or CP3 (Driver Input). {Text in curly parenthesis is applicable to Interface Driver Assembly CP2 or CP4 (Driver Output).} For example, this step is applicable to CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}].

See Figure 6-42, Figure 6-43, and Figure 6-44 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal











8. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Driver Module A5 [A10] (3) to cabinet.

9. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Driver Module A5 [A10] from cabinet.

10. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (4), lock washers and flat washers that secure Interface Driver Assembly CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] to cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-156



12. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W41 {W1} [W41 {W2}] from Interface Driver Assembly CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] connector J1.

13. Remove Interface Driver Assembly CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Interface Driver Assembly for bent pins and foreign objects.


2. Inspect location CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] for foreign objects.

3. (second person) Position Interface Driver Assembly in cabinet in slot CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}].


4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (4), lock washers and flat washers to secure Interface Driver Assembly CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] to cabinet.


5. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W41 {W1} [W41 {W2}] to Interface Driver Assembly CP1 {CP2} [CP3 {CP4}] connector J1.



7. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Driver Module into slot A5 [A10] until fully seated.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Driver Module A5 (3) to cabinet.





11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-157







11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-158

Figure 6-42. Interface Driver Assembly 3CP1 {3CP2} [3CP3 {3CP4}]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-159


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-160


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-161

6.3.2.7 Replace Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1, 3S2

Tools Flat tip screwdriver, large Flat tip screwdriver, small Masking tape, ½ inch wide Marker pen, felt Phillips screwdriver, No. 0 Open end wrench, 5.5 mm Soldering kit Maintenance step stool

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Overtemperature Switches.

The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S2.]


Removal














12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A5A1, A4A1, and A4A2 to OFF position.

Location: Rear of Unit 4, Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-162


14. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W42 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J62. Disconnect cable.



16. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (5) that secure Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, and A3 (4) to cabinet.

17. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, and A3 from cabinet.

18. Apply a strip of masking tape to each wire of cable W42 at Tx Overtemperature Switches S1 [S2].

19. Using marker pen, identify on masking tape each wire of cable W42 as a and b [c and d].

20. Using soldering kit, unsolder and disconnect wires a and b [c and d] of W42 from Tx Overtemperature Switch S1 [S2].

21. Using Phillips screwdriver and open end wrench, remove two screws (6), lock washers, flat washers and hex nuts that secure Tx Overtemperature Switch S1 [S2] to support bracket (7).

22. Remove Tx Overtemperature Switch S1 [S2] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Overtemperature Switch for bent pins.


2. Inspect location S1 [S2] for foreign objects.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver and open end wrench, install two screws (6), lock washers, flat washers and hex nuts to secure Tx Overtemperature Switch S1 [S2] to support bracket (7).

4. Using soldering kit, connect and solder wires a and b [c and d] of W42 to Tx Overtemperature Switch S1 [S2].

5. Remove masking tape.

6. Inspect locations A1, A2, and A3 for bent pins or foreign objects.

7. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Modules into slots A1, A2, and A3 until fully seated.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (5) to secure Tx Amplifier Modules A1, A2, and A3 (4) to cabinet.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-163

10. Connect cable W42 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J62. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.



12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A5A1, A4A1, and A4A2 to ON position.





16. Set Tx Driver Power Supply A to on.


18. Set Tx Driver Power Supply B to on.




22. Set REX/SDP B Channel Processing to Active.

23. Ensure Overtemperature on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

24. Transition REX/SDPs so REX/SDP A is Maintenance Standby and REX/SDP B is Maintenance Selected.


26. Transition REX/SDP A to Online Standby.

27. Transition REX/SDP B to Online Selected.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-164

Figure 6-45. Tx Overtemperature Switch 3S1 [3S2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-165

Rear of Unit 4


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-166


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-167

6.3.2.8 Replace Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3, 3S4

Tools Flat tip screwdriver, large Flat tip screwdriver, medium Flat tip screwdriver, small Masking tape, ½ inch wide Marker pen, felt Phillips screwdriver, No. 0 Open end wrench, 5.5 mm Soldering kit Maintenance step stool

Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Undertemperature Switches. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S2.]


Removal














12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A6A1 and A6A2 to OFF position.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-168


14. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W7 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J75. Disconnect cable.



16. Remove RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 3A12, refer to Paragraph 6.3.2.3.

17. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (5) that secure Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 (4) to cabinet.

18. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (6) that secure Tx Driver Module A10 (7) to cabinet.

19. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9, and Driver Module A10 from cabinet.

20. Apply a strip of masking tape to each wire of cable W7 at Tx Undertemperature Switches S3 [S4].

21. Using marker pen, identify on masking tape each wire of cable W7 as a and b [c and d].

22. Using soldering kit, unsolder and disconnect wires a and b [c and d] of W7 from Tx Undertemperature Switch S3 [S4].

23. Using Phillips screwdriver and open end wrench, remove two screws (8), lock washers, flat washers and hex nuts that secure Tx Undertemperature Switch S3 [S4] to support bracket (9).

24. Remove Tx Undertemperature Switch S3 [S4] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Undertemperature Switch for bent pins.



3. Using Phillips screwdriver and open end wrench, install two screws (8), lock washers, flat washers and hex nuts to secure Tx Undertemperature Switch S3 [S4] to support bracket (9).

4. Using soldering kit, connect and solder wires a and b [c and d] of W7 to Tx Undertemperature Switch S3 [S4].

5. Remove masking tape.

6. Inspect locations A1, A2, and A3 for bent pins or foreign objects.

7. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 into slots until fully seated.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (5) to secure Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 (4) to cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-169

9. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Module A10 into slot until fully seated.


11. Install RF Cabinet Fan Assembly, refer to Paragraph 6.3.2.3.



13. Connect cable W7 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J75. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.



15. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A6A1 and A6A2 to ON position.

















11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-170

Figure 6-48. Tx Undertemperature Switch 3S3 [3S4]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-171

Rear of Unit 4


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-172


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-173

6.3.2.9 Replace 1:2 Divider 3A16

Tools Flat tip screwdriver, large Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Side cutters, 6 inch

Materials: Tie wraps, small (each 2)

Personnel: Two

WARNING


WARNING

This part contains Beryllium Oxide. Refer to Paragraph 6.1.2 for proper handling and shipping.

NOTE: See Figure 6-51, Figure 6-52, and Figure 6-53 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal









8. Set Tx Amplifier Module 4 to off.

9. Set Tx Amplifier Power Supply 4 to off.





11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-174

13. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A6A1 and A6A2 to OFF position.



15. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (4) that secure Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 (5) to cabinet.

16. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (6) that secure Tx Driver Module A10 (7) to cabinet.

17. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully remove Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9, and Driver Module A10 from cabinet.

18. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W5 from 1:2 Driver 3A16 connector J3.


20. Position second person at front of Unit 3.



22. Using side cutters cut and remove two tie wraps (8) that secure wire bundle (9) to bracket (10). This step is required to access screw (11).


24. Ensure second person is holding 1:2 Driver 3A16 before proceeding with next step

25. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (11 and 12), lock washers and flat washers that secure 1:2 Driver 3A16 to cabinet.

26. Request second person to remove 1:2 Driver 3A16 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect 1:2 Driver 3A16 for foreign objects.


2. Position second person at front of Unit 3 to hold 1:2 Driver 3A16 on place.


3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (11 and 12), lock washers and flat washers to secure 1:2 Driver 3A16 to cabinet.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W5 to 1:2 Driver 3A16 connector J1.

5. Using side cutters, install and trim two tie wraps (8) to secure wire bundle (9) to bracket (10)


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-175


7. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 into slots until fully seated.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (4) to secure Tx Amplifier Modules A8 and A9 (5) to cabinet.

9. With assistance of second person, firmly grasp and carefully slide Tx Amplifier Module A10 into slot until fully seated.




12. Set switch AC ON (3) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A6A1 and A6A2 to ON position.









20. Select Amplifier Module 4 to on.


22. Ensure RF Output Power - Xmtr Short Pulse and RF Output Power - Xmtr Long Pulse on Tx Detail Status screen do not indicate a fault.

23. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on Rex/SDP A, ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-176

Figure 6-51. 1:2 Divider 3A16

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-177


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-178


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-179

6.3.3 Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet, Unit 4

6.3.3.1 Replace AC Distribution Unit 4A1

Tools: Lockout tag (quantity 2) Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Digital Multimeter ** Flat tip screwdriver, medium Flat tip screwdriver, small Side cutters, 6 inch 4 mm nut driver Magnet Maintenance step stool

* * Refer to Section 1, Table 1-4 for part number.

Materials: Tie wrap (quantity 4)


Removal










Location: Power Distribution Unit (PDU) DP4

9. Open door of PDU.

10. Set PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5 to off position.

11. Attach Lockout Tag to PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5.

12. Close door of PDU.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-180



14. Set PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5 to off position.

15. Attach Lockout Tag to PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5.


Location: Top of Unit 4, Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet

17. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure cover (2) of AC Distribution Unit A1. Remove cover (2).

18. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC is not present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E2, E3, E4, E6, E7, E8 and ground terminal connection E1.

19. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC is not present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E2, E3, E4 and neutral terminal connection E5.

20. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC is not present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E6, E7, E8 and neutral terminal connection E9.

21. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0052 wire phase A from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E2.

22. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0052 wire phase B from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E3.

23. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0052 wire phase C from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E4.

24. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0052 wire neutral from AC Distribution Unit A1 neutral terminal connection E5.

25. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0053 wire phase A from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E6.

26. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0053 wire phase B from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E7.

27. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0053 wire phase C from AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E8.

28. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0053 wire neutral from AC Distribution Unit A1 neutral terminal connection E9.

29. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0052 wire ground from AC Distribution Unit A1 ground terminal connection E1.

30. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect cable W0053 wire ground from AC Distribution Unit A1 ground terminal connection E1.

31. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure cover (4) of AC Distribution Unit A1. Remove cover (4) and cables W0052 and W0053.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-181



33. Loosen two quarter-turn fasteners (5) that secure TCMM Fan Assembly A3A3 to cabinet.

34. Firmly grasp handle (6) on TCMM Fan Assembly A3A3 and remove from cabinet.



36. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W8 to AC Distribution Unit A1 connector J2. Disconnect cable.




40. Using side cutters, cut and discard four tie wraps (8) that secure TCMM Fan Assembly cable (9) in place.

41. Using nut driver, remove two hex nuts (10) and flat washers that secure connector of TCMM Fan Assembly cable (9). Disconnect cable.

42. If required, use magnet to retrieve hex nuts (10) and flat washers.


43. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (11), lock washers and flat washers that secure AC Distribution Unit A1 to cabinet.

44. Remove AC Distribution Unit A1 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect AC Distribution Unit for damage.

2. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure cover (2) of AC Distribution Unit. Remove cover (2).

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure cover (4) of AC Distribution Unit A1. Remove cover (4).


4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (11), lock washers and flat washers to secure AC Distribution Unit to cabinet in slot A1.


5. Using nut driver, install two hex nuts (10) to secure connector of TCMM Fan Assembly cable (9).

6. Install four tie wraps (8) to secure TCMM Fan Assembly cable (9). Using side cutters, trim ends of tie

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-182

wraps.

7. Connect cable W0094 to AC Distribution Unit A1 connector J6. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.






12. Inspect TCMM Fan Assembly for bent pins and foreign objects, ensuring individual fans are free to rotate.


14. Firmly grasp handle (6) on TCMM Fan Assembly and carefully install into slot A3A3 until fully seated.

15. Tighten two quarter-turn fasteners (5) to secure TCMM Fan Assembly to cabinet.


Location: Top of Unit 4, Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet

17. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure cover (4) and cables W0052 and W0053 to AC Distribution Unit A1.

18. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0052 wire ground to AC Distribution Unit A1 ground terminal connection E1.

19. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0053 wire ground to AC Distribution Unit A1 ground terminal connection E1.

20. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0052 wire phase A to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E2.

21. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0052 wire phase B to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E3.

22. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0052 wire phase C to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E4.

23. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0052 wire neutral to AC Distribution Unit A1 neutral terminal connection E5.

24. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0053 wire phase A to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E6.

25. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0053 wire phase B to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-183

terminal connection E7.

26. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0053 wire phase C to AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connection E8.

27. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W0053 wire neutral to AC Distribution Unit A1 neutral terminal connection E9.

28. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure shorts are not present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E2, E3, E4, E6, E7, E8 and ground terminal connection E1.

29. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure shorts are present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E2, E3, E4 and neutral terminal connection E5.

30. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure shorts are not present between AC Distribution Unit A1 phase terminal connections E6, E7, E8 and neutral terminal connection E9.

31. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure cover (2) of AC Distribution Unit A1.



33. Remove Lockout Tag from PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5.

34. Set PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5 to on position.




37. Remove Lockout Tag from PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5.

38. Set PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5 to on position.










47. Ensure all Tx Amplifier Modules, RF Output Power - Driver A, RF Output Power - Driver B, RF Output

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-184

Power - Xmtr Short Pulse and RF Output Power - Xmtr Long Pulse on Tx Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.



Top of Unit 4

Figure 6-54. AC Distribution Unit 4A1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-185


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-186


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-187

6.3.3.2 Replace DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1

Tools: Lockout tag (quantity 2) Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Flat tip screwdriver, small Pin Insertion / Extraction tool Side cutters, 6 inch ESD wrist strap Maintenance step stool

Materials: Tie wraps, medium (each 4)

Personnel: Two

CAUTION

ESD precautions must be taken during this procedure, refer to Paragraph 6.1.1.


Removal












10. Set PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5 to off position.

11. Attach Lockout Tag to PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-188

14. Set PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5 to off position.

15. Attach Lockout Tag to PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5.




18. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W3P2 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J74. Disconnect cable.




21. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove six screws (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure DC Breaker Panel A2A1 to cabinet.

22. Remove DC Breaker Panel A2A1 part way out of cabinet. Second person will assist by holding DC Breaker Panel A2A1 for the following steps:

a. Disconnect cable W4 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J21.

b. Disconnect cable W5 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J22.

c. Disconnect cable W1P1 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J65.

d. Disconnect cable W1P2 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J66.

e. Disconnect cable W1P3 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J67.

f. Disconnect cable W3P1 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J68.

g. Disconnect cable W3P2 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J69.

h. Disconnect cable W4P2 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J78.

i. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (2) and lock washers that secure four pairs of wire lugs on TCMM Backplane A2A8 terminals E5, E6, E7 and E8.

j. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect six pairs of red wires from bus bar (3).

k. Using side cutters, cut tie wraps that secure wires to cabinet.

23. Remove DC Breaker Panel A2A1 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect DC Breaker Panel for damage.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-189



3. With second person assisting, position DC Breaker Panel A2A1 for installation and proceed with the following steps:

a. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect six pairs of red wires to bus bar (3).

b. Using pin insertion extraction tool, insert eight (colored) leads into TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J74.

c. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (2) and lock washers to secure four pairs of lugs on TCMM Backplane A2A8 terminals E5, E6, E7 and E8.

d. Connect cable W4 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J21.

e. Connect cable W5 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J22.

f. Connect cable W1P1 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J65.

g. Connect cable W1P2 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J66.

h. Connect cable W1P3 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J67.

i. Connect cable W3P1 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J68.

j. Connect cable W3P2 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J69.

k. Connect cable W4P2 from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J78.

l. Using side cutters install and trim tie wraps to secure wires.

m. Install DC Breaker Panel A2A1 into cabinet.

n. Using Phillips screwdriver, install six screws (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure DC Breaker Panel A2A1 to cabinet.




6. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect cable W3P2 to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connector J74.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-190



9. Remove Lockout Tag from PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5.

10. Set PSR Transmitter A circuit breaker DP4 - CB1/3/5 to on position.




13. Remove Lockout Tag from PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5.

14. Set PSR Transmitter B circuit breaker DP5 - CB1/3/5 to on position.










23. Ensure there are no faults on TX detailed Status Screen for: All Tx Amplifier Modules Driver A, RF Output Power Driver B, RF Output Power Xmtr Short Pulse, RF Power Out Xmtr Long Pulse, RF Power Out



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-191

Figure 6-57. DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-192


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-193


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-194

6.3.3.3 Replace Tx Control CCA 4A2A2, 4A2A5

Tools: ESD wrist strap Flat tip screwdriver, small


CAUTION


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Control CCAs. The main

text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Control CCA 4A2A2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Control CCA 4A2A5.]

See Figure 6-60 for Find Numbers and physical locations. Removal







5. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Fuse Panel A2A1 to OFF position.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Control CCA A2A2 [A2A5] (3) to TCMM Card Cage A2.

7. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully pull Tx Control CCA A2A2 [A2A5] straight out of cabinet.

Installation

8. Inspect Tx Control CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.


9. Inspect location A2A2 [A2A5] of TCMM Card Cage A2 for foreign objects.

10. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully slide Tx Control CCA (3) into TCMM Card Cage A2 slot A2A2 [A2A5] until fully seated.

11. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Control CCA A2A2 [A2A5] to TCMM Card Cage A2.

12. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Fuse Panel A2A1 to ON position.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-195





16. Ensure Interface Module A [Interface Module B] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

NOTE: It may be necessary to select Reset A [Reset B] on the text Control Screen one or two times to clear any faults on the Tx status screen.

17. Ensure a Xmtr Summary Status Mismatch message has not been raised.

18. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Online Selected.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-196

Figure 6-60. Tx Control CCA 4A2A2 [4A2A5]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-197

6.3.3.4 Replace Tx Status CCA 4A2A3, 4A2A6



CAUTION


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Status CCAs. The main

text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Status CCA 4A2A3. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Status CCA 4A2A6.]


Removal







5. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Fuse Panel A2A1 to OFF position.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Status CCA A2A3 [A2A6] (3) to TCMM Card Cage A2.

7. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully pull Tx Status CCA A2A3 [A2A6] straight out of cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Status CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully slide Tx Status CCA (3) into TCMM Card Cage A2 slot A2A3 [A2A6] until fully seated.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Status CCA A2A3 [A2A6] to TCMM Card Cage A2.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-198

5. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Breaker Panel A2A1 to ON position.









11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-199

Figure 6-61. Tx Status CCA 4A2A3 [4A2A6]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-200

6.3.3.5 Replace RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4, 4A2A7



CAUTION


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both RF Monitor CCAs. The main

text of this procedure is applicable to RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to RF Monitor CCA 4A2A7.]


Removal







5. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Fuse Panel A2A1 to off position.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure RF Monitor CCA A2A4 [A2A7] (3) to TCMM Card Cage A2.

7. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully pull RF Monitor CCA A2A4 [A2A7] straight out of cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect RF Monitor CCA for bent pins or foreign objects.



3. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles (4) and carefully slide RF Monitor CCA (3) into TCMM Card Cage A2 slot A2A4 [A2A7] until fully seated.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-201

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure RF Monitor CCA A2A4 [A2A7] to TCMM Card Cage A2.

5. Set switch CHAN A OFF [CHAN B OFF] (1) on front of DC Fuse Panel A2A1 to ON position.









12. Perform Tx Forward Power Certification Calibration, per Paragraph 5.3.8.2 and Antenna Reverse Power Certification Calibration, per Paragraph 5.3.8.3.

13. Perform Transmitter Trip Level Adjustment for the affected channel, per Paragraph 5.3.7.6.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-202

Figure 6-62. Tx RF Monitor CCA 4A2A4 [4A2A7]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-203

6.3.3.6 Replace TCMM Backplane 4A2A8 (Second Level Engineering Activity Only)

Tools: Lockout tag (quantity 2) Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Flat tip screwdriver, small Pin Insertion / Extraction tool Side cutters, 6 inch Soldering kit ESD wrist strap Maintenance step stool

Materials: ESD packing material (for 6 CCAs)

Personnel: Two

CAUTION


NOTE: See Figure 6-63, Figure 6-64, Figure 6-65, Figure 6-66, and Figure 6-67 for Find Numbers and

physical locations.

Removal

1. Remove DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1, refer to Paragraph 6.3.3.2.



3. Disconnect cable assemblies from TCMM Backplane A2A8 connectors, refer to Table 6-8.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (1) that secure ground cables to TCMM Backplane A2A8 ground terminals.

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (2), flat washers and lock washers that secure TCMM Card Cage A2 to cabinet.



7. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (3) that secure TCMM CCAs A2A2 through A2A7 to TCMM Card Cage A2.

8. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully pull TCMM CCAs A2A2 through A2A7 straight out of TCMM Card Cage A2.

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove eight screws (4) and chamfer washers that secure TCMM Card Cage A2 to cabinet.

10. Remove TCMM Card Cage A2 from cabinet.

Installation

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-204

1. Inspect TCMM Card Cage for bent pins or foreign objects.

2. Position second person at rear of Unit 4 to assist with installation of TCMM Card Cage A2 into cabinet.



4. Firmly grasp and carefully slide TCMM Card Cage into slot A2.

NOTE: Ensure second person guides TCMM Card Cage A2 into place and that the cables do not interfere with the installation procedure.

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, install eight screws (4) and chamfer washers to secure TCMM Card Cage A2 to cabinet.

6. Inspect TCMM CCAs for bent pins or foreign objects.

7. Inspect locations A2A2 through A2A7 of TCMM Card Cage A2 for foreign objects.

8. Firmly grasp top and bottom handles and carefully slide TCMM CCAs into TCMM Card Cage A2 slots A2A2 through A2A7 until fully seated.

9. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (3) to secure each TCMMl CCAs A2A2 through A2A7 to TCMM Card Cage A2.



11. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (2), flat washers and lock washers to secure TCMM Card Cage A2 to cabinet.

12. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (1) to secure ground cables to TCMM Backplane A2A8 ground terminals.

13. Connect cable assemblies to TCMM Backplane A2A8 connectors, refer to Table 6-6.

NOTE: Install cable assemblies as per Table 6-6, in reverse order.


15. Install DC Breaker Panel 4A2A1, refer to Paragraph 6.3.3.2.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-205

Table 6-6. TCMM Backplane A2A8 Cable Connections

F i g u r e 6 - 6 5 F i g u r e 6 - 6 6

Cable Assy “J”

Connector

Cable Assy “J”

Connector

No. No. Tools Required No. No. Tools Required

W4202 J81 None W23 J47 None

W4201 J80 None W22 J48 None

W5405 J17 Flat Tip Screwdriver W21 J49 None


W3P1 J64 None W30 J55 None

W8101 J 1 4 Flat Tip Screwdriver W29 J56 None





W1911 J19 Flat Tip Screwdriver W 1 9 0 8 J8 None

W8 J61 Flat Tip Screwdriver W 1 9 0 3 J 1 0 None





W31 J37 Flat Tip Screwdriver W 1 9 0 6 J 1 3 None


W25 J39 Flat Tip Screwdriver




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-206

Figure 6-63. TCMM Backplane 4A2A8

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-207


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-208


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-209


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-210


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-211

6.3.3.7 Replace Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A1, 4A3A2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Control and Monitor Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A2.]


Removal



2. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] to OFF position.

3. Wait until PWR ON and FLT indications on Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] are not illuminated.

4. Loosen two quarter-turn fasteners (2) that secure Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] (3) to cabinet.

5. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] (3) and remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply for bent pins.

2. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply to OFF position.


3. Inspect location A3A1 [A3A2] for foreign objects.

4. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply (3) and carefully install into slot A3A1 [A3A2] until fully seated.

5. Tighten two quarter-turn fasteners (2) to secure Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] (3) to cabinet.

6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply A3A1 [A3A2] to ON position.



8. Ensure left [right] 5/30 V Power Supply on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-212

Figure 6-68. Tx Control and Monitor Power Supply 4A3A1 [4A3A2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-213

6.3.3.8 Replace TCMM Fan Assembly 4A3A3

NOTES: Latch indicators on the two quarter-turn fasteners must be pointing right during removal and installation. This indicates that the latch is unlocked.


Removal



2. Loosen two quarter-turn fasteners (1) that secure TCMM Fan Assembly A3A3 (2) to cabinet.

3. Firmly grasp handle (3) on TCMM Fan Assembly A3A3 (2) and remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect TCMM Fan Assembly for bent pins and foreign objects, ensuring individual fans are free to rotate.



3. Firmly grasp handle (3) on TCMM Fan Assembly (2) and carefully install into slot A3A3 until fully seated.

4. Tighten two quarter-turn fasteners (1) to secure TCMM Fan Assembly (2) to cabinet.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-214

Figure 6-69. TCMM Fan Assembly 4A3A3

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-215

6.3.3.9 Replace Tx Power Supply 4A4A1, 4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for all Tx Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Power Supply 4A4A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Power Supply 4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2].


Removal



2. Set Tx Amplifier Module 6 [Tx Amplifier Module 7, 8, 5, 3, 4, 1, 2] to off.

3. Set Tx Amplifier Power Supply 6 [Tx Amplifier Power Supply 7, 8, 5, 3, 4, 1, 2] to off.



5. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] to OFF position.

NOTE: Ensure PWR ON, FLT and 36V indications on Tx Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] are not illuminated.

6. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] (3) to cabinet.

7. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Amplifier Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] (3) and remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Power Supply for bent pins.

2. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Power Supply to OFF position.


3. Inspect location 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] for foreign objects.

4. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Power Supply (3) and carefully install into slot 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] until fully seated.

5. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] (3) to cabinet.

6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A2] to ON position.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-216



8. Set Tx Amplifier Module 6 [Tx Amplifier Module 7, 8, 5, 3, 4, 1, 2] to on.

9. Ensure Tx Amplifier Module 6 [Tx Amplifier Module 7, 8, 5, 3, 4, 1, 2] and Tx Amplifier Power Supply 6 [Tx Amplifier Power Supply 7, 8, 5, 3, 4, 1, 2] on Tx Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-217

Figure 6-70. Tx Amplifier Power Supply 4A4A1 [4A4A2, 4A4A3, 4A5A1, 4A6A1, 4A6A2, 4A7A1, 4A7A1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-218

6.3.3.10 Replace Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3, 4A7A3


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Driver Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Driver Power Supply 4A7A3.]


Removal









7. Ensure PWR ON, FLT and 36V indications on Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] are not illuminated.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws (2) that secure Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] (3) to cabinet.

9. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] (3) and remove from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Driver Power Supply for bent pins.

2. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply to OFF position.


3. Inspect location A6A3 [A7A3] for foreign objects.

4. Firmly grasp handle (4) on Tx Driver Power Supply (3) and carefully install into slot A6A3 [A7A3] until fully seated.

5. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws (2) to secure Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] (3) to cabinet.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-219





11. Ensure Tx Driver A [Tx Driver B] and Tx Driver Power Supply A [Tx Driver Power Sup-ply B] on Tx Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-220

Figure 6-71. Tx Driver Power Supply 4A6A3 [4A7A3]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-221

6.3.3.11 Replace Tx Drive Sample 1:2 Divider/Video Detector 4A20A1, 4A20A2

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Phillips screwdriver, No. 2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both 1:2 Divider/ Video Detector. The main text of this procedure is applicable to 1:2 Divider/ Video Detector 4A20A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to 1:2 Divider/ Video Detector 4A20A2.]


Removal






4. By hand, disconnect cables 4W10 [4W9] and W5402 [W5502] from 1:2 Divider/ Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J1 and J2 respectively.

5. Open door on rear of unit 3.

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (1) that secure bracket (2) in place. Remove bracket.

7. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] from 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] at connector J3.

8. Remove 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2].

Installation


1. Inspect 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] for foreign objects.

2. Inspect locations A20A1 [A20A2] and A20AT2 [A20AT6] for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] to 1:2 Divider/Video Detector at connector J3.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (1) to secure bracket (2) in place.

5. By hand, connect cable W5402 [5502] and W510 [W9] to 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J2 and J1 respectively.


7. Perform a Driver Forward Power Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.7

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-222






11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-223

Figure 6-72. 1:2 Divider/Video Detector 4A20A1 [4A20A2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-224

6.3.3.12 Replace Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT2, 4A20AT6

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Phillips screwdriver, No. 2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Drive Sample Attenuators 1. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT6.]


Removal






4. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (1) that secure bracket (2) in place. Remove bracket.

5. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] from 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J3.

6. Place 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] out of way.

7. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] from elbow fitting (3).

8. Remove Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6].

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A20AT2 [A20AT6] for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator A20AT2 [A20AT6] connector J2 to 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J3.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 A20AT2 [A20AT6] connector J1 to elbow fitting (1).


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-225






11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-226

Figure 6-73. Tx Drive Sample Attenuator 1 4A20AT2 [4A20AT6]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-227

6.3.3.13 Replace Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws

WARNING

This unit may be hot and may cause burns to exposed skin. Allow sufficient time for cooling.

NOTES: See Figure 6-74 and Figure 6-75 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal



2. Transition Online REX/SDP Standby to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to Idle.

3. Set Standby Tx Driver Standby to off.

4. Set Standby Tx Driver Power Supply to off.



6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 (for Channel A as Standby) or switch AC ON (2) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A7A3 (for Channel B as Standby) to OFF position.



8. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W6 from Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination A20AT4 connector J1.

NOTE: If Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination A20AT4 is hot, wait for unit to cool.

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove six screws (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination A20AT4 to cabinet.

10. Remove Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination A20AT4.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination for foreign objects.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-228


2. Inspect location A20AT4 for foreign objects.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install six screws (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination to cabinet.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W6 to Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination A20AT4 connector J1.



6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 (for Channel A as Standby) or switch AC ON (2) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A7A3 (for Channel B as Standby) to ON position.



8. Set Standby Tx Driver Power Supply to on.

9. Set Standby Tx Driver Standby to on.

10. Transition REX/SDP from Maintenance Standby to Online Standby.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-229

Figure 6-74. Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-230

Figure 6-75. Tx Driver Transfer Switch Termination 4A20AT4

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-231

6.3.3.14 Replace Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1, 4A20DC2

Tools: 3/4 in. Open end wrench Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Phillips screwdriver, No. 1

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx Drive Sample Couplers. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC2.]

See Figure 6-76 and Figure 6-77 for Find Numbers and physical locations. Removal








6. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 (for Channel A as Standby) or switch AC ON (2) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A7A3 (for Channel B as Standby) to OFF position.



8. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W1[W2] from Tx Drive Sample Coupler A20DC1 [A20DC2] connector J1.

9. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3 [W4] from Tx Drive Sample Coupler A20DC1 [A20DC2] connector J3.

10. Using open end wrench, disconnect elbow fitting (2) from Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1[4A20DC2].

11. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (3), flat washers and lock washers that secure Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1[4A20DC2] in place.

12. Remove Tx Drive Sample Coupler A20DC1 [A20DC2].

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-232

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Drive Sample Coupler for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A20DC1 [A20DC2] for foreign objects.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (3), flat washers and lock washers to secure Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1[4A20DC2] in place.

4. Using open end wrench, connect elbow fitting (2) to Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1[4A20DC2].

5. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3 [W4] to Tx Drive Sample Coupler A20DC1 [A20DC2] connector J3.

6. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W1[W2] to Tx Drive Sample Coupler A20DC1 [A20DC2] connector J1.



8. Set switch AC ON on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 [A7A3] to ON position.



10. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A6A3 (for Channel A as Standby) or switch AC ON (2) on front of Tx Driver Power Supply A7A3 (for Channel B as Standby) to ON position.






11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-233

Figure 6-76. Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1 [4A20DC2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-234

Figure 6-77. Tx Drive Sample Coupler 4A20DC1 [4A20DC2]

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-235

6.3.3.15 Replace Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with teflon coated jaws Phillips screwdriver, No. 1


Removal















12. Disconnect cable 4W8 from Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1.



14. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cables W3, W4, W5 and W6 from Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1.

15. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove three screws (3), flat washers and lock washers that secure Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1 to bracket (4).

16. Remove Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Tx Driver Transfer Switch for foreign objects.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-236


2. Inspect location A20S1 for foreign objects.

3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install three screws (3), flat washers and lock washers to secure Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1 to bracket (4).

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cables W3, W4, W5 and W6 to Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1.



6. Connect cable 4W8 to Tx Driver Transfer Switch A20S1.














18. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Driver on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

19. Transition REX/SDPs so REX/SDP A is Maintenance Selected and REX/SDP B is Maintenance Standby.

20. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Driver on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.



237

Figure 6-78. Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1

238

Figure 6-79. Tx Driver Transfer Switch 4A20S1

239

6.3.3.16 Removal and Replacement AC Power Indicators 4A1DS1 and 4A1DS2

Tools: #2 Phillips Head Screwdrivers Small Flat Blade Screwdriver Needle Nose Pliers Digital Volt Meter (DVM) Lock Out/Tag Out Hardware

Removal

NOTE: This procedure requires the ASR-11 SYSTEM be taken out of service; therefore coordination must be performed with Air Traffic Services to schedule downtime before beginning this procedure.


1. If monitor only, Take Control with SCDI A or SCDI B.

2. Set standby REX/SDP to Maintenance Standby.

3. Set selected REX/SDP to Maintenance Selected.

4. Select standby MSSR to Maintenance Standby.

5. Select selected MSSR to Maintenance Selected.

6. Open the Transmitter Equipment Control screen.

7. Turn off all transmitter power supplies and amplifiers.

8. Turn off Driver A and Driver A power supply.

9. Turn off Driver B and Driver B power supply.

Location: Power Distribution Panels DP4 and DP5

10. Locate the Power Distribution Panels (PDU) DP4 and DP5.

11. Open door of DP4.

12. Set circuit breaker DP4 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5) to the “OFF” position.

13. Attach Lockout Tag (Item #5) device to PSR circuit breaker DP4 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5).


15. Set circuit breaker DP5 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5) to the “OFF” position.

16. Attach Lockout Tag (Item # 5) device to PSR circuit breaker DP5 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5).

17. With the AC Distribution Unit AC power turned off, verify that the AC power indicators (CR1 and CR2) on the AC Distribution Unit have gone “OFF”. Refer to Figure 6-80.

240

Figure 6-80. AC Distribution Panel Unit 4A1

Location: Unit 4 Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet

18. Remove the top cover screws, at locations shown, using #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver. Remove AC Distribution Unit’s cover. See figure 6-81

Figure 6-81. Top view of Unit 4 Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet

Location: AC Distribution Unit 4A1

19. Using a DVM check for AC power. Verify that No AC power is present. Refer to figure 6-82.

20. Locate AC Indicators behind front panel. Refer to figure 6-83.

21. Remove Quick Tab connectors from CR1 indicator using Needle Nose Pliers.

22. .Using small screwdriver, depress small locking tab and push the CR1 indicator assembly through front panel. (NOTE: Part may be brittle and break apart during this step)

23. Remove Quick Tab connectors from CR2 indicator using Needle Nose Pliers.

24. Using small screwdriver. Depress small locking tab and push the CR2 indicator assembly through front panel. (NOTE: Part may be brittle and break during this step.)

241

Figure 6-82. Inside view of AC Distribution Unit 4A1

Figure 6-83. Back of AC Indicator

242

Replacement

Location: AC Distribution Unit 4A1

1. Install CR2 AC indicator through front panel and connect QC connectors using the Needle Nose Pliers

2. Install CR1 AC indicator through front panel and connect QC connectors using the Needle Nose Pliers.

3. Install AC Distribution Unit’s top cover and screws using #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver.

Location: Power Distribution Panels DP4 and DP5

4. Locate the Power Distribution Panels (PDU) DP4 and DP5 in shelter.


6. Remove the Lockout Tag device on PSR circuit breaker DP4 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5).

7. Set circuit breaker DP4 – Triple Pole Breaker CB (1-3-5) to the “ON” position.


9. Remove the Lockout Tag device on PSR circuit breaker DP5 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5).

10. Set circuit breaker DP5 – Triple Pole Circuit Breaker CB (1-3-5) to the “ON” position.

11. Check that both AC Distribution Unit’s CR1 and CR2 AC indicators are “ON”.


12. On Selected SCDI, open the Transmitter Equipment Control screen and turn all power supplies and amplifiers “ON”.

13. Set selected MSSR to Online Selected.

14. Set standby MSSR to Online Standby.

15. Set selected REX/SDP to Online Selected.

16. Set standby REX/SDP to Online Standby.

17. Acknowledge all alarms and make sure everything has green status.

18. Coordinate with Air Traffic Control to release control.

243

6.3.4 Microwave Assembly, Unit 6

6.3.4.1 Replace Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider 6A1

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Maintenance step stool

NOTE: See Figure 6-84 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal






Location: Unit 6, Waveguide Assembly, front of cabinets

5. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect attenuator AT1 and 6W1 from Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 connector J5 (1).

6. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W1902 from Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 connector J1.



9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (2), lock washers and flat washers that secure Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 (3) to support bracket (4).

10. Using slip-joint pliers, unthread connector J4 (4) from Video Detector A2.

11. Remove Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 from Waveguide Assembly U6.

Installation

1. Inspect replacement Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location A1 on U6 for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Video Detector A2 (4) to Forward Power Monitor Divider A2.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (2), lock washers and flat washers to secure Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 (3) to support bracket.

244

5. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Forward Power Monitor Attenuator AT1 connector (1) to Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 connector J5.

6. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3204 to Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider A1 connector J3.



9. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.2.



12. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on REX/SDP B, ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.



15. Run Automatic Fault Isolation on REX/SDP A, ensure Automatic Fault Isolation does not call out any faults.

16. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration, per Paragraph 6.3.12.2.



245

Figure 6-84. Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider 6A1

246

6.3.4.2 Replace Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2



Removal







5. By hand, disconnect cables W1903 and W1904 from Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 connectors J1 and J2.

NOTE: See Figure 6-83 for physical locations.

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (2), lock washers and flat washers that secure Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 to bracket (3).

7. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 (2) from Forward Power Monitor Divider A1(1).

8. Remove Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2.

Installation

9. Inspect replacement Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 for foreign objects.

10. Using tuning screwdriver, adjust potentiometer R1 on Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2 fully clockwise. See Figure 6-148.

11. Using tuning screwdriver, adjust potentiometer R2 on Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2 fully counterclockwise. See Figure 6-148.


12. Inspect the Forward Power Monitor Divider A1 for foreign objects.

13. Connect Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 (2) connector J4 to Forward Power Monitor Divider A1(1).

14. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2 to bracket (4).

15. By hand, connect cables W1903 and W1904 to Forward Power Monitor Video Detector A2

247

connectors J1 and J2.

16. Perform Tx Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup Paragraph 6.3.13.2 and then run Tx Forward Power Certification Setup on Channel B, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.3.




248

Figure 6-85. Forward Power Monitor Video Detector 6A2

249

6.3.4.3 Replace Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3, 6A4

Tools: 3/4 in. Open end wrench Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Phillips screwdriver, No. 1

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Tx and Antenna Power Monitor Video Detector. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Tx Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Antenna Power Monitor Video Detector 6A4.]


Removal



2. If necessary, switch REX/SDP A to Online Selected and REX/SDP B to Online Standby.


3. Disconnect cable W1905 [W1908] from Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J1.

4. Disconnect cable W1906 [W1907] from Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J2.

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (2), lock washers and flat washers that secure Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] to bracket (3).

6. Using slip-joint pliers, remove Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] from Attenuator AT2[AT3].

Installation

1. Inspect Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector for serviceability.


2. Inspect Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] for serviceability.

3. By hand, loosely connect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (1) to Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J3.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (2), lock washers and flat washers to secure Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] to bracket (3).

5. Using slip-joint pliers, tighten Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (1).

6. Connect cable W1906 [W1907] to Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J2.

250

7. Connect cable W1905 [W1908] to Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J1.

8. Perform a Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.4 [Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.5.

9. [Perform an Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.6.

251

Figure 6-86. Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 [6A4]

252

6.3.4.4 Replace Forward Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT1



Removal







5. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect 6W1 from Forward Power Monitor Attenuator A1.

6. Disconnect Forward Power Monitor Attenuator AT1 from Forward Power Divider A1.

7. Remove Forward Power Monitor Attenuator AT1 from top of cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect replacement Forward Power Monitor Attenuator for foreign objects.


2. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Forward Power Monitor Attenuator AT1 to Forward Power Monitor divider connector J5.

3. Connect 6W1 to Forward Power Monitor Attenuator AT1.





7. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration, per Paragraph 6.3.12.2.

8. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.2.



253

Figure 6-87. Forward Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT1

254

6.3.4.5 Replace Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT2, 6AT3


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Reverse Power Monitor 1:2 Attenuators. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT3.]


Removal


1. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (1), flat washers and lock washers that secure bracket (2) to top of cabinet.

2. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (3) from Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J3.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (4) from N Type Right Angle Adapter (5).

4. Remove Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] from Waveguide Assembly U6.

Installation

1. Inspect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location AT2 [AT3] for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator connector (4) to N Type Right Angle Adapter (5).

4. By hand, connect Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (3) to Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 [A4] connector J3.

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, install two screws (1), flat washers and lock washers to secure bracket (2) to top of cabinet.

Using slip-joint pliers, tighten Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator AT2 [AT3] connector (3).


6. Perform a Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.4 [Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.5.

255

Figure 6-88. Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator 6AT2 [6AT3]

256

6.3.4.6 Replace High Power Load 6AT4

Tools Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Open end wrench, 10 mm Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket

Maintenance step stool

WARNING

This unit may be hot and may cause burns to exposed skin. Allow sufficient time for cooling


Removal









Location: Unit 6, Waveguide Assembly, rear of cabinets

NOTE: If High Power Load AT4 is hot, wait for unit to cool.

7. Using ratchet and open end wrench loosen but do not remove two bolts (2), lock washers, hex nuts and four flat washers that secure High Power Load AT4 to support bracket (3).

8. Using ratchet and open end wrench, remove ten bolts (4), lock washers, hex nuts and flat washers that secure High Power Load AT4 to Waveguide Duct W9.

9. Remove High Power Load AT4 from Waveguide Assembly.

10. Remove and retain gasket (5).

11. Remove two bolts (2), lock washers, hex nuts and flat washers.

Installation

1. Inspect High Power Load for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

257


2. Inspect location AT4 for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. By hand, loosely install two bolts (2), lock washers, hex nuts and flat washers on High Power Load AT4.

4. Align two bolts (2) with slots in bracket (3) and install High Power Load AT4.

5. Insert gasket (5) between High Power Load AT4 and Waveguide duct W9.

6. Using ratchet and open end wrench, install ten bolts (4), lock washers and flat washers to secure High Power Load AT4 to waveguide (4). Do not tighten.

7. Using torque wrench and open end wrench tighten ten bolts (4) to secure High Power Load AT4 to Waveguide duct W9. Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

8. Using ratchet and open end wrench, tighten two bolts (2), and hex nuts to secure High Power Load AT4 to support bracket (3).










258

Figure 6-89. High Power Load 6AT4

259

Figure 6-90. High Power Load 6AT4

260

6.3.4.7 Replace Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination 6AT5

Tools: Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Maintenance step stool

NOTES: See Figure 6-91 for Find Numbers and physical location.

Removal





3. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1.

4. Remove gasket (2) between Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 and Waveguide Transfer Switch S1.

5. Remove Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.


2. Inspect location AT5 for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. Insert gasket (2) between Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination and Waveguide Transfer Switch S1.

4. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1. Do not tighten.

5. Using torque wrench, tighten ten bolts (1) to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1. Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.



261

Figure 6-91. Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination 6AT5

262

6.3.4.8 Replace Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT6, 6AT7

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Coax Transfer Switch Terminations. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT6. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT7.]


Removal





3. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3302 [W3303] from Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J2.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Coax Transfer Switch Termination AT6 [AT7] from Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J4.

5. Remove Coax Transfer Switch Termination AT6 [AT7] from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Coax Transfer Switch Termination for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location AT6 [AT7] for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Coax Transfer Switch Termination to Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J4 in slot AT6 [AT7].

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3302 [W3303] to Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J2.



263

Figure 6-92. Coax Transfer Switch Termination 6AT6 [6AT7]

264

6.3.4.9 Replace Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination 6AT8

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Maintenance step stool


Removal


1. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 connector J1.

2. Remove Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location AT8 for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 connector J1 in slot AT8.

265

Figure 6-93. Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination 6AT8

266

6.3.4.10 Replace Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1, 6B2

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver Small Phillips screwdriver,No.2 Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Circulator Assembly Fans. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Circulator Assembly Fan 6B2.]


Removal


1. Disconnect cable W0094 [W0095] from Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2].

NOTE: Ensure Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] has stopped rotating before proceeding with the following Steps.

2. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (1) and flat washers that secure Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] and fan guard (2) to Circulator Assembly HY3. Remove fan guard.

3. Remove Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] from Circulator Assembly HY3.

Installation

1. Inspect Circulator Assembly Fan for foreign objects; ensuring fan is free to rotate.


2. Inspect location B1 [B2] for foreign objects.

3. Position Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] and fan guard (2) on Circulator Assembly HY3.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (1) and flat washers to secure Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] and fan guard (2) to Circulator Assembly HY3.

5. Connect cable W0094 [W0095] to Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2].

6. Ensure Circulator Assembly Fan B1 [B2] is rotating.

267

Figure 6-94. Circulator Assembly Fan 6B1 [6B2]

268

6.3.4.11 Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2]

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Open end wrench, 10 mm Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Maintenance step stool Wood blocks (as required)

Personnel: Two

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Waveguide Directional Couplers. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC2.]

See Figure 6-95, Figure 6-96, Figure 6-97 and Figure 6-98 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal











8. Install wood blocks (2) to support Waveguide duct (3).

9. Using slip-joint pliers loosen N Type Right Angle Adapter connector (4) from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2].

10. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable 6W1 [Directional Coupler Termination AT8] from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2].

11. Using ratchet and open end wrench, remove ten bolts (5), lock washers, hex nuts and 20 flat washers that secure Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] to Waveguide duct (6).


NOTE: Before performing Step 13, have second person support Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2].

269

13. Using ratchet and open end wrench, remove ten bolts (8), lock washers, Hex nuts and 20 flat washers that secure Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] to Circulator Assembly HY3.


15. By hand, disconnect N Type Right Angle Adapter connector (4).

16. Remove Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Waveguide Directional Coupler for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.


2. Inspect location DC1 [DC2] for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. By hand, connect N Type Right Angle Adapter connector (4) to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2]. Do not tighten.

NOTE: Before performing Step 4 and Step 5, have second person support Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2].

4. Insert gasket (9) between Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] and Circulator Assembly HY3. Ensure Waveguide Directional Coupler is oriented with Forward Power Monitor up.

5. Using ratchet and open end wrench, install ten bolts (8), lock washers, hex nuts and 20 flat washers to secure Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] to Circulator Assembly HY3. Do not tighten.

6. Insert gasket (7) between Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] and Waveguide duct (6).

7. Using ratchet and open end wrench, install ten bolts (5), lock washers, hex nuts and 20 flat washers to secure Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2] to Waveguide duct (6). Do not tighten.

8. Using torque wrench and open end wrench tighten ten bolts (5) and (8). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing in Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

9. Using slip-joint pliers, tighten N Type Right Angle Adapter connector (4).

10. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable 6W1 [Directional Coupler Termination AT8] to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 [DC2].



12. Set switch AC ON (1) on front of Tx Amplifier Power Supplies A4A1, A4A2, A4A3, A5A1, A6A1, A6A2, A7A1, and A7A2 (3) to ON position.


270




15. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration on Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1, refer to Paragraph 6.3.12.2.

NOTE: Step 17 is not applicable to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2.

16. Perform a Tx Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.2.

17. Perform a Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.4 [Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment, refer to Paragraph 6.3.13.5.].




271

Figure 6-95. Waveguide Directional Coupler 6DC1 [6DC2]

272


273


274


275

6.3.4.12 Replace Circulator Assembly 6HY3

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm deep socket Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm deep socket Maintenance step stool Wood block (as required)

NOTE: See Figure 6-99 and Figure 6-100 for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal











8. Disconnect cables W0094 and W0095 from Circulator Assembly Fans 6B1and 6B2.

9. Install wood blocks (2) to support Waveguide Directional Couplers DC1 and DC2, and Waveguide Duct W9.

10. Using ratchet, remove 20 bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to Waveguide duct W9 and Waveguide twist W4.

11. Remove and retain two gaskets (4).

12. Using ratchet, remove 20 bolts (5), lock washers and flat washers that secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to Waveguide Directional Couplers DC1 and DC2.

13. Remove and retain two gaskets (6).

14. Using ratchet, remove six hex nuts (7), lock washers and flat washers that secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to six supports (8).

15. Remove Circulator Assembly HY3 from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

276

1. Inspect Circulator Assembly for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.


2. Inspect location HY3 for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. Place Circulator Assembly HY3 on six supports (8).

NOTE: Ensure Circulator Assembly is oriented so Transmitter Port is against Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 and Antenna Port is against Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2.

4. Insert two gaskets (6) between Circulator Assembly HY3 and Waveguide Directional Couplers DC1 and DC2.

5. Using ratchet, install 20 bolts (5), lock washers and flat washers to secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to Waveguide Directional Couplers DC1 and DC2. Do not tighten.

6. Insert two gaskets (4) between Circulator Assembly HY3, Waveguide duct W9 and Waveguide twist W4.

7. Using ratchet, install 20 bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to Waveguide duct W9 and Waveguide twist W4. Do not tighten.

8. Using torque wrench, tighten bolts (3) and (5). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

9. Using ratchet, install six hex nuts (7), lock washers and flat washers to secure Circulator Assembly HY3 to supports (8).

10. Connect cables W0094 and W0095 to Circulator Assembly Fans 6B1 and 6B2.

NOTE: Ensure Circulator Assembly Fans 6B1 and 6B2 rotate.

11. Remove wood blocks.










277

Figure 6-99. Circulator Assembly 6HY3

278

Figure 6-100. Circulator Assembly 6HY3

279

6.3.4.13 Replace Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Maintenance step stool Wood block (as required) 10 mm open end wrench


Removal











8. Place wood blocks (2) under Receiver Protector 6Z1 and 6Z2.

9. Using open end wrench, remove two bolts (each) that secure 6Z1 and 6Z2 to the mounting brackets.

10. Using open end wrench, remove four bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Beam Transfer Switch S1 to support bracket (4).

11. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W1909 from Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 connector J5.

12. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (5), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1.


14. Remove Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 from Waveguide Assembly.

280

15. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (7), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide W6.

16. Slide W6 and 6Z2 approximately 5mm (1/4”) away from 6S1.


18. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (9), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide twist W4.


20. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (11), lock washers and flat washers that secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide W5.


22. Remove Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Waveguide Transfer Switch for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.


2. Inspect location S1 for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. Insert gasket (10) between Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 and Waveguide Twist 6W4.

4. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (9), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide Twist W4. Do not tighten.

5. Insert gasket (12) between Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 and Waveguide W5.

6. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (11), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide W5. Do not tighten.

7. Insert gasket (8) between Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 and Waveguide W6.

8. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (7), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 to Waveguide W6. Do not tighten.

9. Using torque wrench, tighten ten bolts (7), (9) and (11). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

10. Using open end wrench, install four bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Beam Transfer Switch S1 to support bracket (4).

11. Inspect location AT5 for foreign objects.

12. Insert gasket (6) between Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 and Waveguide Transfer Switch S1.

13. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (5), lock washers and flat washers to secure Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination AT5 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1. Do not tighten.

281

14. Using torque wrench, tighten ten bolts (5). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

15. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W1909 to Waveguide Transfer Switch S1 connector J5.

16. Using open end wrench, install two bolts (each) that secure Z1 and Z2 to mounting bracket.

17. Remove wood blocks (2).










25. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Low Beam on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.


27. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Low Beam on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.



282

Figure 6-101. Waveguide Transfer Switch 6S1

283


284


285

6.3.4.14 Replace Coax Transfer Switch 6S2, 6S3


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Coax Transfer Switches. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Coax Transfer Switch 6S2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Coax Transfer Switch 6S3.]


Removal






4. Disconnect cable W1910 [W1911] from Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J5.



7. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Coax Transfer Switch Termination AT6 [AT7] from Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J4.


9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove three screws (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] to Waveguide Assembly.

10. Remove Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Coax Transfer Switch for foreign objects.



3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install three screws (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure Coax Transfer Switch to Waveguide Assembly in slot S2 [S3].

286


5. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Coax Transfer Switch Termination AT6 [AT7] to Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J4.



8. Connect cable W1910 [W1911] to Coax Transfer Switch S2 [S3] connector J5.





12. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Hi Beam [Transfer Switch Status - Weather] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.


14. Ensure Transfer Switch Status - Hi Beam [Transfer Switch Status - Weather] on Tx Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.



287

Figure 6-104. Coax Transfer Switch 6S2 [6S3]

288

6.3.4.15 Replace Receiver Protector 6Z1, 6Z2

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Ratchet, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Maintenance step stool

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Receiver Protectors. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Receiver Protector 6Z1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Receiver Protector 6Z2.]


Removal





3. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3201 [W3301] from Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] connector J1.

4. Using ratchet, remove two bolts (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] to support bracket (2).

5. Using ratchet, remove ten bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] to Waveguide W5 [W6].


7. Remove Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] from Waveguide Assembly.

Installation

1. Inspect Receiver Protector for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.


2. Inspect location Z1 [Z2] for foreign objects, ensuring flanges are clean.

3. Insert gasket (4) between Receiver Protector and Waveguide W5 [W6].

NOTE: Ensure Receiver Protector is oriented so connector J1 is facing front of cabinets.

4. Using ratchet, install ten bolts (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] to Waveguide W5 [W6].

5. Using torque wrench, tighten ten bolts (3). Refer to Waveguide Bolt Torquing, Paragraph 6.3.12.3.

6. Using ratchet, install two bolts (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] to support bracket (2).

7. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3201 [W3301] to Receiver Protector Z1 [Z2] connector J1.

289



290

Figure 6-105. Receiver Protector 6Z1 [6Z2]

291

6.3.4.16 Replace RF Power Limiter 6Z3, 6Z4, 6Z5, 6Z6

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Maintenance stand

NOTE: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for an RF Power Limiter replacement in either REX/SDP Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to REX/SDP B (RF Power Limiter 6Z3 or 6Z5) [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP A (RF Power Limiter 6Z4 or 6Z6).]


Removal



2. Transition REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to Idle.


3. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W3302/W3202 [W3303/W3203] from RF Power Limiter Z3/Z4 [Z5/Z6] connector J1.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect RF Power Limiter Z3/Z4 [Z5/Z6] connector J2 from N Type Adapter.

5. Remove RF Power Limiter Z3/Z4 [Z5/Z6].

Installation

1. Inspect RF Power Limiter for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location Z3/Z4 [Z5/Z6] for foreign objects.

3. Using slip-joint pliers, connect RF Power Limiter connector J2 to N Type Adapter.

4. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W3302/W3202 [W3303/W3203 to RF Power Limiter Z3/Z4 [Z5/Z6] connector J1.



292

Figure 6-106. RF Power Limiter 6Z3, 6Z4, 6Z5, 6Z6

293

6.3.5 Common Equipment Cabinet, Unit 7

6.3.5.1 Replace Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1, 7A2

Tools: Digital Multimeter * * Side cutters, 6 inch Flat tip screwdriver, small Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Nut driver, 8 mm

* * Refer to Table 1-4 for part number.

Materials: Tie wrap (as required)

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both FMACs. The main text of this procedure is applicable to FMAC 7A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to FMAC 7A2.]


WARNING

The FMAC has two sources of 230 VAC power. One source is for the A1 Power Supply module, and the other for the A14 Power Supply module. Both sources must be removed before removal/installation of the FMAC. Failure to comply may cause injury or death, and/or damage to equipment.

Removal







Location: Front of Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet


6. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A12 [A13] to off position. (Note: This removes AC power from the FMAC A14 Power Supply module.)

294

Location: Rear of Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet


8. Disconnect W1P1 [W31P1] from Relay Box A16 J2 [A17 J2]. (Note: This removes AC power form the FMAC A1 Power Supply module.)

9. Set switch on rear of SCDI Workstation A3 [A4] to off position.


10. Ensure that FMAC 7A1 [7A2] module A1 Power light is off. Open terminal block cover on FAMAC A1 [A2] module A1.

11. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC power is not present on wires TB1-9 and TB1-10 of cable W1 [W31] and terminal block connections L and N.

12. Close terminal block cover on FMAC A1 [A2] module A1.

13. Ensure that FMAC 7A1 [7A2] module A14 Power light is off. Open terminal block cover on FAMAC A1 [A2] module A14.

14. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC power is not present on wires TB1-9 and TB1-10 of cable W2 [W32] and terminal block connections L and N.

15. Close terminal block cover on FMAC A1 [A2] module A14.

16. Using side cutters, cut and discard tie wraps that secure cable W1 [W31] and W2 [W32] to standoff (1) and 91*0 as required.

NOTE: Terminal strip connectors on modules A1, A9, A10, A11, A12, and A14 may be removed by loosening two captive screws (2) on each connector, grasping the connector firmly, and pulling.

17. Disconnect cable assemblies from FMAC assemblies 7A1 [7A2] connectors, refer to Table 6-9.

18. Disconnect terminal connection (2) from FMAC A1 [A2] module A16 connector J4.

19. Disconnect terminal connection (2) from FMAC A1 [A2] module A16 connector J4.

NOTE: The four nuts that secure FMAC Unit only require loosening to permit removal. Do not remove nuts from studs.

20. Using nut driver, loosen four nuts (4) that secure FMAC A1 [A2] to cabinet.

21. Remove FMAC A1 [A2] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect FMAC for foreign objects.

2. On the replacement FMAC, remove terminal strip connectors from modules A1, A9, A10, A11, A12 and A14. Install these connectors on the corresponding modules of the defective FMAC. The defective FMAC should be returned for repairs complete with these connectors.

295



4. Carefully position FMAC on studs of slot A1 [A2].

5. Using nut driver, tighten four locknuts (4) and flat washers to secure FMAC A1 [A2] to cabinet.

6. Remove the cover located on FMAC modules A15 (see figure 6-106) by removing the small Phillips screw located at the bottom of the cover. Remove the covers located on both channels FMACs.

7. On the operational FMAC, record the switch positions of the 4-8 position dip switches located in module A15.

8. On the newly replaced FMAC, set the 4-8 position dip switches on module A15 so they match those on the operational FMAC.

9. Replace covers on both A15 modules.

10. Connect cable assemblies to FMACs 7A1 [7A2] connectors, refer to Table 6-7.

11. Connect terminal connection (3) to FMAC A1 [A2] module A17 connector J4.

12. Connect terminal connection (2) to FMAC A1 [A2] module A16 connector J4.

13. Install tie wrap to secure cable W2 [two tie wraps to secure cables W32 and W31] to standoff (1) and (1*) as required. Using side cutters, trim ends of tie wraps.

14. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A12 [A13] to on position. (Note: This applies AC power to the FMAC A14 Power Supply module.)



16. Connect W1P1 [W31P1] to Relay Box A16J2 [A17J2]. (Note: This connects AC power to the FMAC A1 Power Supply module.)

17. Set switch on rear of SCDI Workstation A3 [A4] to on position.



19. Verify that FMAC 7A1 [7A2] modules A1 and A14 Power lights are on.





296

22. Transition SCDIs so SCDI A [SCDI B] is Online Selected and SCDI B [SCDI A] is Online Standby.

23. Ensure FMAC and FMAC 24V PSU on SCDI A [SCDI B] Status and Control Status screen do not indicate a fault.

24. Ensure all indications on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate a fault.

25. Ensure all indications on Facility Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.

26. Ensure all indications on Engine/Generator Status and Control screen do not indicate a fault.

27. Ensure all indications on Site UPS Detailed Status and Control screen do not indicate a fault.

297

Table 6-7. FMAC 7A1 [7A2] Cable Connections

FMAC 7A1

FMAC 7A2

Cable Assy Cable Assy

No. Module Location Tools Required No. Module Location Tools Required

W1 A1 TB Phillips Screwdriver W31 A1 TB Phillips Screwdriver

W3 A3 J1 Flat Tip Screwdriver W33 A3 J1 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W30P1 A5 CN1 Flat Tip Screwdriver W30P9 A5 CN1 Flat Tip Screwdriver













W10P7 A15 J1 Flat Tip Screwdriver W10P14 A15 J1 Flat Tip Screwdriver







298

Figure 6-107. Facilities Monitor Alarm and Control (FMAC) 7A1 [7A2]

299


300


301

6.3.5.2 Replace Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Digital Multimeter * * Side cutters, 6 inch Phillips screwdriver, No. 2


Materials: Tie wraps (as required)


Removal



2. Depress and release Circuit Breakers CB1 and CB2 to shut down CEC Fan A3.

3. Using Digital Multimeter, test to ensure that AC power is not present at terminal A3B1.

4. Using side cutters, cut and discard tie wraps at standoff (1) for cable W17 and at standoff (2) for cable W47.


5. Open front door of cabinet

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (3) and beveled washers that secure CEC Fan A3 to cabinet.

7. Remove CEC Fan A3 from cabinet tray to access wires of cables W17 and W47.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect wires of cables W17 and W47 from connectors A3B1 and A3B2 respectively. See Figure 6-110.

Installation

1. Inspect CEC Fan for foreign objects, ensuring each fan rotates freely.


2. Position CEC Fan A3 to allow connection of wires for cables W17 and W47.

3. Connect wires of cables W17 and W47 to CEC Fan A3, refer to Table 6-8 and see Figure 6-111.

4. Install CEC Fan A3 in cabinet tray.

5. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (3) and beveled washers to secure CEC Fan A3 to cabinet.

302


6. Install tie wraps to secure cable W17 to standoff (1) and cable W47 to standoff (2). Using side cutters, trim tie wraps.

7. Depress and release Circuit Breakers CB1 and CB2 to activate CEC Fan A3.



9. Ensure both CEC Fans A3 are rotating.


Table 6-8. CEC Fan 7A3 Wire Connections

Wire Connections for Cable W17 Wire Connections for Cable W47

A3B1 A3B2

Connector Cable Assy Connecto Wire No. No. Tools Required No. No. Tools Required

TB1-1 1 Flat Tip Screwdriver, small TB2-1 1 Flat Tip Screwdriver, small



303

Figure 6-110. Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3

304

Figure 6-111. Common Equipment Cabinet Fan 7A3

305

6.3.5.3 Replace HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation 7A4, 7A5

Tools: Screwdriver, flat tip, Screwdriver, Phillips #2 NOTES: Replacement HP-Z440 workstations are shipped to site with no software loaded. SCDI

OS and ASR Application S/W restoration procedures in paragraph 6.3.5.3.1 must be performed on new units as directed in step 8 of this Installation procedure.

Removal and installation procedures are the same for both SCDI Workstation. The main text of this procedure is applicable to SCDI A Workstation 7A4A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to SCDI B Workstation 7A5A1].

See Figures 6-114a to 6-114d for find numbers and physical locations.

Removal

Location: Selected (Good/Operational) SCDI

1. If Monitor Only, Take Control. If necessary, swap SCDIs such that unit to be replaced is standby.


2. Open front door of CEC to gain access to front of Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation.

3. Locate power LED on power button of Standby Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation. DO NOT press power button.

Location: Standby (Bad/Non-Operational) SCDI

4. Shut down SCDI A [B] using the Local Workstation Actions menu. Wait for workstation front power button LED to extinguish.

NOTE: Depending on the type of fault it may not be possible to swap or gracefully shutdown the SCDI from the Local Workstation Actions menu. If the SCDI is unresponsive or fails to power OFF continue with step 5.

Location: Back of Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet

5. Open the back door of CEC to gain access to back of Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation.

NOTE: Refer to labels on the inside of rear CEC door or Figure 6-114a for LRU and cable locations.

6. Disconnect SCDI Workstation input power cable from the back of the Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] power supply at PSJ1 (1).

7. Disconnect USB keyboard cable A1W3 from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] USB connector USB1-2 (2).

8. Disconnect USB mouse cable A1W5 from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] USB connector USB1-1 (3).

9. Use flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure DVI monitor cable A1W2 to Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] DVI connector PCI5-J3 (4). Disconnect cable.

306

NOTE: make sure all 4 Ethernet cables are labeled as shown in Fig. 6-114a.

10. Use flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure serial UPS cable W4005 [W4105] to Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] Serial A connector (9). Disconnect cable.

11. Use flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure serial FMAC cable W3 [W33] to Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] Serial B connector (10). Disconnect cable.

12. Disconnect Ethernet cable W21 [W50] from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J0 (5).

13. Disconnect Ethernet cable W20 [W51] from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J1 (6).

14. Disconnect offsite Ethernet cable W6524 [W6525] from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J2 (7).

15. Disconnect offsite Ethernet cable W6526 [W6527] from Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J3 (8).


16. At the front of Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] shelf, using Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two silver captive thumbscrews (11) located on each side of the SCDI Workstation tray rail.

17. Slide the Bad/Non-Operational SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] forward until the Workstation tray latches in place. While disengaging the latches, located on underside of tray, slide Workstation out from CEC.

18. Place A4A1 [A5A1] SCDI Workstation on clean flat surface.

19. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen single black captive thumbscrew (12) on back of the SCDI Workstation adapter bracket.

20. Referring to Figure 6-114b, lift the back of the SCDI Workstation away from the bracket (13) while rolling the SCDI Workstation bezel (14) out of the bracket. Set unit aside.

Installation

1. Inspect replacement SCDI Workstation for visible damage or foreign objects.

2. Referring to Figure 6-114c, guide the front bezel of the SCDI Workstation under the lip of the adapter bracket. Rotate the back of the workstation down onto the tray . Tighten the single, rear black captive thumbscrew to secure the rear of the SCDI Workstation into the adapter tray.


3. Referring to Figure 6-114d, place the rear of the workstation-tray assembly on the fixed lower rails. Be sure the fixed rails are engaged by the lip on the underside of the SCDI Workstation adaptor tray and slide the assembly into position in the CEC. Secure the assembly into the CEC by tightening the two captive silver thumbscrews on both sides of the shelf.


307

NOTE: Refer to labels on the inside of rear CEC door or Figure 6-114a for LRU and cable locations.

4. Connect USB keyboard cable A1W3 to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] USB connector USB1-2 (2).

5. Connect USB mouse cable A1W5 to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] USB connector USB1-1 (3).

6. Connect DVI monitor cable A1W2 to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] DVI connector PCI5-J3 (4). Use flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure cable to SCDI Workstation.

7. Connect serial UPS cable W4005 [W4105] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] Serial A connector (9). Use flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws that secure cable to SCDI Workstation.

NOTE: Do not reconnect FMAC or LAN Ethernet cables yet. You will be instructed to do this when appropriate near the end of section 6.3.5.3.1 Restore HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation Software.

8. Perform paragraph 6.3.5.3.1 Restore HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation Software.

Figure 6-114a SCDI A [B] Workstation Connectors

Keyboard USB1-2 A1W3

(2)

(3) Mouse USB1-1 A1W5

UPS SERIAL A

W4005 [W4105] (9)

(10) FMAC

SERIAL B W3 [W33]

PCI-J0 (5)

PCI-J1 (6)

PCI-J3 (8)

PCI-J2 (7) Video DVI-D

PCI5-J3 A1W2 (4)

Power PSJ1

(1)

308

Figure 6-114b SCDI Workstation Adapter Bracket / Tray Removal

Figure 6-114c SCDI Workstation Adapter Bracket / Tray Installation

(11) (12) (13)

(14)

309

Figure 6-114d Tray and Rail Detail

(11)

310

6.3.5.3.1 Restore HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation Software

This procedure provides the necessary steps to load software onto the HP-Z440 Workstation.

NOTE: Until site tailoring on the replacement SCDI has been restored, the replacement SCDI may generate false messages and falsely indicate failed units as red widgets on various SCDI screens. Until this procedure is completed and site tailoring is restored on the replacement SCDI, ignore fault messages and red widgets on the replacement SCDI. Trust the messages and indications on the operational SCDI.

See Figure 6-114e for find numbers and physical locations.

Contact your SSC Manager and First Level Engineering if any assistance is required.

In these procedures the Operational SCDI is the SCDI that the system is using. The New SCDI is the SCDI that was just replaced in paragraph 6.3.5.3.

Prerequisites

1. Obtain a current copy of the site adaptation on a CD.

2. If a site adaptation CD cannot be located, create a new one using one of the following methods:

Locate the appropriate site adaptation on the Weather Laptop.

Capture site adaptation from the operational SCDI. It is possible to restore site tailoring using the alternate SCDI’s site tailoring. The restore script will make the necessary changes to modify the site tailoring. The operator will need to acknowledge extra prompts when restoring with this method.

Download site adaptation backed up on ASR-11 Website: http://www.faa.gov/aos/aos232

Burn a new CD using procedure in Order JO 6310.30A, Maintenance Handbook for Airport Surveillance Radar, ASR-11, Paragraph 5-31, Variable Site Parameters (VSP) Backup.

If you cannot perform any of these alternative methods, contact AJW-147, ASR-11 Second Level Engineering for assistance via the FAA Help Desk at (888) 432-2622.

3. It is recommended this entire procedure be read prior to beginning. Reading through the procedure prior to actually performing the tasks on the system will assist with understanding the process.

Requirements

To restore SCDI software, the following are needed:

a. DVD with a label corresponding to the current COTS ASR software build

b. CD containing the current site adaptation data

c. Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTE: The installation scripts may prompt the user to contact Raytheon for help. In such cases contact your SSC Manager and First Level Engineering if any assistance is required.

Install OS and ASR Application on New SCDI Workstation

311

The system installation procedure installs both the Operating System and the Application Software. Any data that is stored on the SCDI Workstation will be erased in this process. Therefore, before executing this procedure you must have a Site Tailoring archive that can be used to restore the SCDI Workstation configuration data and links. Location: New SCDI Workstation

NOTE: Step 3 below is time sensitive. Ensure you are ready to perform Step 3 before continuing with Steps 1 and 2.

1. Connect the New SCDI Workstation input power cable to SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] power supply at PSJ1.


2. Verify that the New SCDI Workstation power LED has illuminated. If not, use the power button on the front of the workstation to turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation.

Set BIOS Settings

Location: New SCDI Workstation

3. Continuously tap the <Esc> key until the SCDI Workstation displays the BIOS Startup Menu screen.

NOTE : Step 3 is time sensitive. If it was not executed in time, the BIOS Startup Menu will not be accessible. If that occurred, hold down the power button until the Workstation powers off. Return to step 2 to turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation.

4. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the BIOS Setup menu choice and press <Enter>.

5. In the Main section of the BIOS Setup Menu, use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Apply Factory Defaults and Exit menu option and press <Enter>.

NOTE: Step 7 is time sensitive. Ensure you read and are ready to perform Step 7 before continuing with Step 6.

6. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Yes menu choice and press <Enter>.

7. Continuously tap the <Esc> key until the Remote OMT Workstation displays the BIOS Startup Menu screen.

NOTE : Step 7 is time sensitive. If it was not executed in time, the BIOS Startup Menu will not be accessible. If that occurred, hold down the power button until the Workstation powers off. Then turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation and return to step 7.


9. In the Main section of the BIOS Setup Menu, use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Change Date And Time menu option and press <Enter>.

10. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Set Time menu option and press <Enter>.

11. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to adjust the time values to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC),

312

the <Tab> key to select time field and press <Enter> when finished adjusting the time.

12. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Set Date menu option and press <Enter>.

13. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to adjust the date values, the <Tab> key to select date field and press <Enter> when finished adjusting the date.

14. Press <Esc> key once to exit the Change Date And Time setup.

15. At the BIOS Setup Menu screen use the <LEFT/RIGHT arrow> keys to navigate to the Advanced section.

16. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Boot Options menu option and press <Enter>.

17. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the PXE Internal NIC boot menu option and press <Enter>.

18. NOTE: In the following steps, an item is selected when it has a gray shaded background.

19. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to select the Disable option and press <Enter>.

20. NOTE: In the following step, you may need to scroll down in order to see the Legacy Boot Options menu option.

21. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Legacy Boot Options menu option and press <Enter>.

22. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to select the Enable option and press <Enter>.

23. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Legacy Boot Order menu option and press <Enter>.

24. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the hard drive (shown as sSATA0: and the drive model) and press <Enter>.

25. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move the hard drive to the top of the list and press <Enter>.

26. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to CDROM: and press <Enter>.

27. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move CDROM: to the second position of the list and press <Enter>.

28. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to USB: and press <Enter>.

29. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move USB: to the third position of the list and press <Enter>. All other devices, if any should be below USB.

30. Press <Esc> to exit the Legacy Boot Order section.

31. Press <Esc> key to navigate back to the Advanced BIOS Setup menu.

32. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Power Options menu option and press <Enter>.

33. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Operating System Power Options Runtime Power Management menu option and press <Enter>.

313


35. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Hardware Power Option After Power Loss menu option and press <Enter>.

36. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to select the Power On option and press <Enter>.


38. Press <Esc> key to exit the BIOS.

NOTE: Step 38 below is time sensitive. Ensure you read and are ready to perform Step 38 before continuing with Step 37.

39. When prompted to “Save Changes?” use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys Select Yes and press <Enter>.

40. Continuously tap the <Esc> key until the SCDI Workstation displays the BIOS Startup Menu screen.



41. Load the COTS and ASR Software DVD into the DVD drive. The DVD drive on this workstation is located to the right of the power button and, due to its black front and slim profile, is difficult to see.

42. Wait for the light on the DVD drive to stop flashing.


43. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys on the Startup Menu to select the Boot Menu option and press <Enter>.

44. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys on the Boot Menu to select the menu option that begins with “Legacy – hp” and also has “DVD” in it, and then press <Enter>.

45. Wait for a screen that looks somewhat like this.

Welcome to CentOS 6.7!

Install or upgrade an existing system

46. Press the <Enter> key to start the Operating System installation.

314

47. Wait approximately 25 minutes for the OS to display a screen that looks somewhat like this.

Congratulations, your CentOS installation is complete. Please reboot to use the installed system...

NOTE : Step 48 below is time sensitive. Ensure you read and are ready to perform Step 48 before continuing with Steps 46 and 47.

Failure to provide a timely response in Step 48 causes the Operating System and the Gnome Desktop Manager to fill in OS defaults we do not want. If this occurs turn off the power to the workstation then turn the power back on and start over beginning with step 38 to reload the OS and application software.

48. Click on the Reboot icon in the lower right hand corner.

49. Wait for the Operating System to present a text screen with the following text in the top left hand corner of the screen.

Press any key to enter the menu

Booting CentOS 6 (...) in 4 seconds…

50. Press the <ESC> key within 4 seconds of seeing this screen to stop the boot process.

NOTE : If the <Esc> key was not pressed within 4 seconds, the system boots to the Linux desktop. If that occurred, turn off the power to the workstation then turn the power back on and start over beginning with step 38 to reload the OS and application software.

51. Press the <a> key so that you can specify the Linux Run level.

52. Once you have pressed the <a> key the SCDI Workstation will display the line.

<t=nouveau nouveau.modeset=0

The cursor will appear at the end of the line.

53. Use the <LEFT arrow> key to move cursor to the left until you end up with a line that includes the text shown below with the cursor positioned to the right of the 5.

... rd_NO_DM rhgb quiet 5 rdblacklist=nouveau >

315

54. Use the <Backspace> key to erase the 5 and replace it with a 3. The line should now look like this…


55. Press the <Enter> key to continue the boot process and wait for a screen that looks like this.

CentOS release 6.7 (Final)

Kernel 2.6.32-573.el6.i686 on an i686

localhost login:

56. Log in as follows

localhost login: root <Enter>

Password: root <Enter>

57. Execute the ASR application installation command as indicated below.

[root@localhost ~]# ray-install <Enter>

The SCDI Workstation will respond with… (example)

... standby, waiting for cdrom mount: block device /dev/sr0 is write-protected, mounting read-only ------ initiating installation of CDH500443_013 ------ ... ... ------ BASIC FILE TRANSFER ----- ... ... ------ TOOL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ RESETTING GLOBAL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ PREPARING INSTALLATION ------ ... ... ----- STARTING SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ----- ... --- ( full system level,X not needed ) --- ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:46:01 UTC 2016 --- ... ... processing entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_100_sequence ... ... Processing Packages At Run Level 100 ... ... STEP ..STATUS.. Package Name ... -------------------------------------------------------------------- ... 0010 NEW / CHNG first_once_only ... 0020 NEW / CHNG first_items ... 0030 NEW / CHNG root_x_config ... 0040 NEW / CHNG unwanted_services ... 0050 NEW / CHNG NVIDIA_340_32_x86 ... Verifying archive integrity... OK ... Uncompressing NVIDIA Accelerated Graphics Driver for Linux-x86 340.32 ...

316

The SCDI Workstation will reboot once the above part of the installation has been completed without errors.

58. Wait for the standard Gnome Greeter Login Window titled Raytheon which will have three lines in it as follows

operator account ray account Other ...

59. Click on Other ... and respond to the Greeter prompts as follows

Username: root <Enter> Password: root <Enter>

60. Wait for the icons on the left side of the screen to appear.

61. Right-Click on the blue background and select the Open in Terminal menu item. This will bring up a command line window.

62. Execute the following command in the command line window

root # date -u

The SCDI Workstation will respond with a message similar to the example below.

Mon Apr 18 20:39:12 UTC 2016

63. Verify that this time is the correct UTC time. If not, correct the time by using the command.

root # date -u <mmddHHMMyyyy.ss>

where

mm month in 2-digit format dd day of the month in 2-digit format HH hour in 24-hour format MM minute in the hour in 2-digit format yyyy year (must be 4 digits) ss seconds in 2-digit format

An example of a correct command is given below

root # date -u 040820482016.00

This example sets the date to April 8, 2016 and the time to 20:48:00 UTC and the workstation will display this date and time in the form…Fri Apr 08 20:48:00 UTC 2016

64. Continue the installation by executing the following command in the command line window.

317

root # ray-install

The SCDI Workstation will respond with the following text in the command line window.

mount: block device /dev/sr0 is write-protected, mounting read-only ... ... ------ BASIC FILE TRANSFER ------ ... ... ------ TOOL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ RESETTING GLOBAL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ PREPARING INSTALLATION ------

The following text (example) will be displayed in an xterm window titled sh.

... ... ----- STARTING SOFTWARE PACKAGE LOAD ----- ... --- ( at X Display level ) --- ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:49:17 UTC 2016 --- ... ... checking entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_100_sequence ... ... processing entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_200_sequence ... ... Processing Packages At Run Level 200 ... ... STEP ..STATUS.. Package Name ... -------------------------------------------------------------------- ... 0010 NEW / CHNG NVIDIA_340_32_x86_part_2 ... 0020 NEW / CHNG root_x_upgrade ... 0030 NEW / CHNG mps800_services ... 0040 NEW / CHNG pti_P018540 ... 0050 NEW / CHNG startech ... 0060 NEW / CHNG low_priority_items ... 0070 NEW / CHNG asr_kokc-1_013 ... 0080 NEW / CHNG multi_kokc-1_013 ... 0100 NEW / CHNG network_configuration ... 0110 NEW / CHNG admin_control_files ... 0120 NEW / CHNG security_group_1 ... 0130 NEW / CHNG workstation_startup_files ... ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:49:57 UTC 2016 --- ... --- END OF Linux Run Level 5 PACKAGE LOAD --- ... ... change_base "/opt/.asr_kokc-1_013+ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904..." "" ... ... Mon Apr 18 14:49:58 UTC 2016 ... ... Please select one of the following entries ... to define the configuration for this workstation. ... ... ... SCDIA : System Control Data Interface A ... ... SCDIB : System Control Data Interface B

... ... OMT1 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 1 ... ... OMT2 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 2 ... ... OMT3 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 3 ... ... OMT4 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 4 ... ... MSOMT1 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 1

318

... ... MSOMT2 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 2



...

... NOTE : You may also enter 'q' to quit. If you do quit, you may

... :

... : a) re-display this menu and then continue, by executing the

... : command '/usr/local/bin/change_base "RAY-INSTALL"'

... :

... : b) execute the command 'ray-install'

... : to re-install the software.

... :

... : c) abort the installation and continue with

... : the currently running baseline.

... :

... : You cannot complete the installation manually at this point.

... :

... YOUR CHOICE ?

65. Answer the question with the configuration you want to install.

For SCDI A, type: SCDIA <Enter> For SCDI B, type: SCDIB <Enter> Example response for SCDI A is shown below.

...

... This workstation needs to be rebooted and is about to become node "scdia".

... Before you authorize this script to start the reboot you must ensure that the app…

... on node "scdib" has been terminated or that node "scdib" is not reachable.

...

... Press the Enter key when you are ready to reboot. Enter 'q' if you want to quit

... and leave the current configuration in place. If you do quit, you can use the command ... ... change_base /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013+ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_36357 SCDIA ... ... to complete this installation at a more convenient time. ... Ready ?

66. Press the <Enter> key.

Example response is shown below.

...

... ... INSTALL ...... : NVIDIA_340_32_x86_part_2 ZPSL-2015_11_17-15_48_...

...

... WARNING: The Composite X extension does not currently interact...

... the CIOverlay option(s); the Composite X extension will be

... disabled.

...

... ... INSTALL ...... : root_x_upgrade ZPSL-2016_02_05-11_58_20+53385_20

... ... INSTALL ...... : mps800_services ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_21_27+27654_630

... ... INSTALL ...... : pti_P018540 ZPSL-2016_04_10-21_49_58+41694_1363

... ... INSTALL ...... : startech ZPSL-2016_03_14-16_52_19+58182_352 ... ... INSTALL ...... : low_priority_items ZPSL-2016_03_07-20_08_54+527... ... ... INSTALL ...... : network_configuration ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_43_59+...

319

... ... INSTALL ...... : admin_control_files ZPSL-2016_03_18-13_47_24+26...

... ... INSTALL ...... : security_group_1 ZPSL-2016_03_01-11_13_49+08397_16

... ... INSTALL ...... : workstation_startup_files ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_44...

... ... INSTALL ...... : asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_3... executing /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_.../bin/rm_link_script executing /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+.../bin/link_script home directory /usr/home/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_... restored

... ... EXPORTS .FROM. : asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_3...

...

... PLEASE REMOVE THE MEDIA PRIOR TO RESTARTING THE APPLICATION

...

... Press the Enter key to proceed or 'q' to quit.

...

... Note : You have the following choices if you quit.

...

... : a) execute the command '/usr/local/bin/change_base "LATEST"

... : in which case you will be taken back to the "This workstation

... : needs to be rebooted" prompt.

... :

... : b) execute the command '/usr/local/bin/change_base <build_ide...

... : to the selected build. You will be taken back to the

... : "This workstation needs to be rebooted" prompt before

... : control is transferred to the baseline of which the selected

... : build identifier is a part.

... :

... : c) execute the command 'ray-install' to re-install the software.

... :

... : You must pick one of the above commands as the workstation is...

... : operational at this point. The configuration cannot be completed

... : manually.

... :

... : You are permitted to change the configuration by selecting the

... : desired configuration via the second (optional) change_base

... : parameter (eg. change_base LATEST SCDIB).

... :

... YOUR CHOICE ? 67. Ignore the warning regarding the Composite X extension as this feature is not used in this

configuration.


68. Remove the media from the DVD drive and close the drive tray.



Workstation will reboot and start running the Application Software using the factory default adaptation.

Verify that the application software is running on the New SCDI Workstation, and that the top level SCDI screen is displayed.

320

Restore Site Tailoring on SCDI Workstation

This procedure will restore the site specific operating parameters or site variable parameters (VSPs).


70. Obtain the LOGIN_WINDOW via the Local Workstation Actions / UNIX Admin menu item.

71. Login as ray.

login : ray Password: ray

72. A command line window titled with RAY will appear and the LOGIN_WINDOW will disappear after a short delay (2 sec).

73. Execute the command below.

<node>{adminuserid}<step#>:autosu

74. Insert the CD containing current site adaptation into the New SCDI’s DVD drive by pressing the eject button on the drive drawer. Pull the drawer open and gently press the CD onto the drive spindle, then close the drawer. Wait for the drive activity LED to stop flashing.

NOTE: The DVD drive on this workstation is located to the right of the power button.


root # cd /misc/cd

76. Execute the following command to list the files on the CD.

root # ls

The command will list archive file(s) which have the naming format:

xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar

Example : rsw_011_2014_09_01_scdia.tar rsw_011_2014_09_01_scdib.tar

The fields in the file name are interpreted as follows:

xxx This is three character site identifier (lower case)

bbb This is a three digit number that identifies the software build.

yyyy This is a four digit number specifying the year in which the data was saved.

mm This is a two digit number specifying the month in which the data was saved.

321

dd This is a two digit number specifying the day in which the data was saved.

hhhhh This is a five character workstation host identifier.

77. Select the archive matching the hostname of the New SCDI. Ensure that the build identifier matches the software build that was just loaded on to the New SCDI. Copy this file from the CD to the SCDI.

root # cp <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> /usr/home/sband Where <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> is replaced with the filename of the tar file you are restoring from.

78. Wait for the command line prompt to appear, then extract the site tailoring tar file.

root # cd /usr/home/sband root # rm –rf site_tailoring root # tar xvf <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> Where <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> is replaced with the filename of the tar file you are restoring from (same as prior step).

The SCDI Workstation will respond with a long listing of files extracted from the tar file into the site_tailoring directory. If there are no files listed, the tar file did not extract correctly. In this case, ensure the tar filename typed in is correct and that the file was successfully copied from the CD and then repeat the tar xvf command.

79. Restore site tailoring to this workstation.

root # restore.sh

The SCDI Workstation will respond with a long listing of updated files. If any errors or missing files are encountered, the script will pause and require the <Enter> key to be pressed to continue. If

you have questions about any error messages, contact AJW-147, ASR-11 Second Level Engineering for assistance via the FAA Help Desk at (888) 432-2622.

The final lines should read:

Update log is available at /usr/home/sband/site_tailoring/update_log

Update Site Tailoring finished with 0 warning(s).

80. Eject the CD and remove it from the workstation.

root # eject

The DVD drive will pop open. Remove the CD and close the DVD drive drawer.

81. Halt the application.

root # sband-killall The SCDI Workstation will respond with the text below assuming that the Application Software is running. The message will be shorter if the Application Software is not running.

... ...

... ... Try 1 for local workstation

322

... ... ...

... ... ... Pass 1 : Killing Local Process Set Tasks

... ... ...

... ... ... : root 14586 1 ./startup_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : sleep 3 (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14588 14586 comm_task 0 local_process_set (kill -16)

... ... ... : root 14589 14586 lrid_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14590 14586 read_write_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14615 14586 jv_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16)

... ... ... : root 14616 14586 jt_oenet_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16)

... ... ... : root 14617 14586 ju_RCP_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16)

... ... ... : root 14618 14586 rdp_comp local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14619 14586 bin_comp local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14620 14586 btm_comp local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14621 14586 oi local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14625 14586 database_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14626 14586 FMAC_intf_task 1 local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14627 14586 MSSR_intf_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14628 14586 PSR_intf_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14630 14586 Command_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14631 14586 Status_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14632 14586 csci13 local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ...

... ... ... Pass 2 : There are no orphaned Application Software tasks to be killed.

... ...


... ... ...

... ... ... Pass 1 : Killing Local Process Set Tasks

... ... ...

... ... ... : sleep 3 (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14615 1 jv_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14616 1 jt_oenet_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ... : root 14617 1 ju_RCP_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9)

... ... ...

... ... ... Pass 2 : Killing Orphaned Application Software Tasks

... ... ...

... ... ... : root 14622 1 print_intf_task 10 11

... ...


... ...

... ... All application software tasks have been removed successfully.

82. Restart the SCDI Workstation.

root # init 6

The SCDI Workstation will shut down the operating system and reboot. Wait for the Application Software to display.

83. Verify that the restore operation was successful by inspecting the SCDI interface. The Site

Identification in the upper left of the screen should match the operational SCDI. The main screen status indications will be primarily grayed out since the Ethernet cables are still disconnected.

84. Open the Local Workstation Actions screen. Select the SCDI Shutdown button. Enter valid username and password on Control Access screen.

NOTE: If your username and password did not work, or if the Site Identifier is incorrect, the site adaptation restoration may have failed. Do not proceed if these steps were not successful.

323


85. Connect Ethernet cable W21 [W50] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J0 (5).

86. Connect Ethernet cable W20 [W51] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J1 (6).

87. Connect offsite Ethernet cable W6524 [W6525] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J2 (7).

88. Connect offsite Ethernet cable W6526 [W6527] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] RJ45 connector PCI-J3 (8).

89. Connect serial FMAC cable W3 [W33] to New SCDI Workstation A4A1 [A5A1] Serial B connector (10). Use a flat tip screwdriver to tighten two captive screws that secure the cable to the SCDI Workstation.

90. Close CEC cabinet back door.

Figure 6-114e SCDI A [B] Workstation Connectors


91. Use the power button on the front of the workstation to turn ON the power to the SCDI Workstation.

Keyboard USB1-2 A1W3

(2)

(3) Mouse USB1-1 A1W5

UPS SERIAL A

W4005 [W4105] (9)

(10) FMAC

SERIAL B W3 [W33]

PCI-J0 (5)

PCI-J1 (6)

PCI-J3 (8)


PCI5-J3 A1W2 (4)

Power PSJ1

(1)

324

92. Close CEC front door.


93. Verify the main status matches the operational SCDI.

Location: Selected (Good/Operational) SCDI

94. Advise Air Traffic that swapping SCDIs may affect radar data. Swap SCDIs so that the New SCDI becomes selected online. (The Operational SCDI should still have control from step 1.)

325


95. Open the Probability of Detection screen.

Click on the New SCDI’s icon. Select Performance Parameters > Probability of Detection…

Verify that the permanent echoes and parrot locations are correct and that Pd is reasonable for your site.

96. Close the Probability of Detection screen.

97. Certify that the ASR-11 radar is operating correctly on the New SCDI Workstation.

This completes the restoration of the SCDI Workstation Software and site tailoring.

6.3.5.4 Replace HP-Z440 SCDI Keyboard 7A4A2, 7A5A2

NOTE: Removal and installation procedures are the same for both SCDI keyboards. The main text of this procedure is applicable to SCDI A keyboard 7A4A2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to SCDI B keyboard 7A5A2].

Removal

Location: External to Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet

1. Disconnect SCDI A [SCDI B] keyboard A4A2 [A5A2] cable from USB extension cable A4A1W3 [A5A1W3].

2. Remove SCDI A [SCDI B] keyboard A4A2 [A5A2].

Installation

1. Inspect replacement SCDI keyboard for damage or foreign objects.


2. Install SCDI keyboard in location 7A4A2 [7A5A2].

3. Connect SCDI A [SCDI B] keyboard 7A4A2 [7A5A2] Cable to USB extension cable A4A1W3 [A5A1W3].

4. Select UNIX ADMIN on Local Workstation Actions screen.

5. Enter valid username and password and complete login. Ensure terminal window appears.

6. Select terminal window.

7. Press keys on SCDI A [SCDI B] Keyboard A4A2 [A5A2]. Ensure key presses appear in terminal window.

8. Close terminal window.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-326

6.3.5.5 Replace SCDI Mouse 7A4A3, 7A5A3

NOTE: Removal and Installation procedures are the same for both SCDI Mice. The main text of this procedure is applicable to SCDI Mouse 7A4A3 (SCDI A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to SCDI Mouse 7A5A3 (SCDI B).]

Removal


1. Disconnect SCDI A [SCDI B] Mouse from USB extension cable A4A1W5 [A5A1W5].

2. Remove SCDI A [SCDI B] Mouse A4A3 [A5A3].

Installation

1. Inspect replacement SCDI Mouse for damage or foreign objects.


2. Install SCDI Mouse in location A4A3 [A5A3].

3. Connect SCDI A [SCDI B] Mouse to USB extension cable A4A1W5 [A5A1W5].

4. Position cursor on SCDI Main Screen background, and press left button on SCDI A [SCDI B] Mouse A4A3 [A5A3]. Ensure Site Pop-up Menu appears.

5. Open Radar Data Display.

6. Position cursor on Radar Data Display background, and press right button on SCDI A [SCDI B] Mouse A4A3 [A5A3]. Ensure RDD Pop-up Menu appears.

7. From the RDD Pop-up Menu select RETURN.

6.3.5.6 Replace SCDI Monitor 7A4A4, 7A5A4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are same for both SCDI Monitors. The main text of this procedure is applicable to SCDI Monitor 7A4A4 (SCDI A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to SCDI Monitor 7A5A4 (SCDI B).]

Removal


1. Press power switch on SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

2. Ensure power indication on SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4] is not illuminated.

3. Disconnect power cable A4W1 [A5W1] from SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-327

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4] video cable to cable A4W2 [A5W2]. Disconnect cables.

5. Remove SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

Installation

1. Inspect SCDI Monitor for damage.


2. Install SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4] in place.

3. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4] video cable to cable A4W2 [A5W2].

4. Connect power cable A4W1 [A5W1] to SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

5. Press power switch on SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

6. Ensure power indication on SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4] is illuminated.

7. Ensure SCDI Main Screen appears on SCDI Monitor A4A4 [A5A4].

6.3.5.7 Reserved

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-328

6.3.5.8 Replace Ethernet Switch 7A6A1, 7A9A1

Materials: Velcro pads (Spae-Naur P/N 888-323), each 2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Ethernet Switches. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Ethernet Switch 7A6A1 (Ethernet A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Ethernet Switch 7A9A1 (Ethernet B).]


Removal



2. Disconnect DC power cable (1) from Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1] connector DC/12V.

NOTE: Disconnecting DC Power Cable will generate SCDI alarms on both REX/SDPs and both SCDIs.

3. Disconnect cable W21 [W20] from Ethernet Switch A6A1J1 [A9A1J1] connector port 1.

4. Disconnect cable W50 [W51] from Ethernet Switch A6A1J2 [A9A1J2] connector port 2.

5. Disconnect W4002 [W4003] from Ethernet Switch A6A1J3 [A9A1J3] connector port 3.

6. Disconnect W4102 [W4103] from Ethernet Switch A6A1J4 [A9A1J4] connector port 4.

7. Remove Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Ethernet Switch for foreign objects.

2. Install two Velcro pads (2) on bottom of Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1], refer to Figure 6-115.


3. Connect cable W21 [W20] to Ethernet Switch A6A1J1 [A9A1J1] connector 1.

4. Connect cable W50 [W51] to Ethernet Switch A6A1J2 [A9A1J2] connector 2.

5. Connect W4002 [W4003] to Ethernet Switch A6A1J3 [A9A1J3] connector 3.

6. Connect W4102 [W4103] to Ethernet Switch A9A1J4 [A9A1J4] connector 4.

7. Connect DC power cable (1) to Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1] connector DC/12V.

8. Verify Port Status LEDs indicate Activity on Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-329


10. Ensure Ethernet A [Ethernet B] on REX/SDP A Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11. Ensure Ethernet A [Ethernet B] on REX/SDP B Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

12. Ensure Radar LAN A [Radar LAN B] on SCDI A Communication Interfaces screen does not indicate a fault.

13. Ensure Radar LAN A [Radar LAN B] on SCDI B Communication Interfaces screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-330

Figure 6-115. Ethernet Switch 7A6A1 [7A9A1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-331

6.3.5.9 Replace Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A6PS1, 7A9PS1

Tools: Side cutters, 6 inch Insulated Drop Light (Optional)

Materials: Tie wrap (as required)

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Ethernet Switch Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A6PS1 (Ethernet A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A9PS1 (Ethernet B).]


Removal



2. Disconnect cable W23 [W23] from Ethernet Switch Power Supply A6PS1 [A9PS1].

NOTE: Disconnecting DC Power Cable will generate SCDI alarms on both REX/SDPs and both SCDIs.

3. Disconnect DC power cable (1) from Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1] connector DC/12V.

4. Using side cutters cut and discard tie wraps that secure DC power cable (1) to cabinet.

5. Remove Ethernet Switch Power Supply Power Supply A6PS1 [A9PS1] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Ethernet Switch Power Supply for foreign objects.


2. Install Velcro pad (2) on bottom of Ethernet Switch Power Supply A6PS1 [A9PS1], refer to Figure 6-116.

3. Install Ethernet Switch Power Supply A6PS1 [A9PS1] in cabinet.

4. Connect DC power cable (1) to Ethernet Switch A6A1 [A9A1] connector DC/12V.

5. Install tie wraps to secure DC power cable (1) to cabinet. Using side cutters, trim ends of tie wraps.

6. Connect cable W23 [W23] to Ethernet Switch Power Supply Power Supply A6PS1 [A9PS1].


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-332


8. Ensure Ethernet A [Ethernet B] on REX/SDP A Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

9. Ensure Ethernet A [Ethernet B] on REX/SDP B Detailed Status screen does not indicate a fault.

10. Ensure Radar LAN A [Radar B] on SCDI A Communication Interfaces screen does not indicate a fault.

11. Ensure Radar LAN A [Radar LAN B] on SCDI B Communication Interfaces screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-333

Figure 6-116. Ethernet Switch Power Supply 7A6PS1 [7A9PS1]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-334

6.3.5.10 Replace MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7, 7A10 [PSR Build 12 or Higher]


NOTES: This procedure is for systems with PSR Build 12 or higher. For systems with Build 11 or lower, see paragraph 6.3.5.11.

Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server (Server). The main text of this procedure is applicable to Server 7A7. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Server 7A10.]


Removal



2. Transition SCDI B [SCDI A] to Maintenance Standby.






6. Set switch (1) ([1]) on SCDI Workstation A4 [A5] to off position.

7. Set switch (4) ([4]) on Server A7 [A10] to off position.

8. Disconnect AC power cable (2) from Server A7 [A10].

9. Disconnect cables from Server A7 [A10], refer to Table 6-10.



11. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (3) and washers that secure Server A7 [A10] to cabinet

12. Remove Server A7 [A10] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Server for foreign objects.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-335



3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (3) and washers to secure Server A7 [A10] to cabinet.



5. Connect cables to Server A7 [A10], refer to Table 6-10.

6. Connect AC power cable (2) to Server A7 [A10].

7. Ensure switch (4) is set to on position.

8. Set switch (1) ([1]) on SCDI Workstation A4 [A5] to on position.




11. Ensure MSSR A Data, MSSR B Data, MSSR A Status, and MSSR B Status on SCDI B [SCDI A] Communication Interfaces screen do not indicate a fault.

12. Ensure FMAC on SCDI B [SCDI A] Status and Control Status screen does not indicate a fault.

Table 6-10. Server Cable Connections

Server Cable Connections f o r 7 A 7

Server Cable Connections f o r [ 7 A 1 0 ]

Cable Assy No.

Outlet or Serial Port

Tools Required Cable Assy

No. Outlet or

Serial Port Tools Required

W 6 5 2 0 T X N o n e W 6 5 2 1 T X N o n e

W3603 Port 0 Flat Tip Screwdriver W7501 Port 0 Flat Tip Screwdriver





07/22/2015 SDR-ASR-11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-336

Figure 6-117. MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7 [7A10]

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-337

6.3.5.11 Replace MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7, 7A10 [PSR Build 11 or Lower]


NOTES: This procedure is for systems with PSR Build 11 or lower. For systems with Build 12 or higher, see paragraph 6.3.5.10.

Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server (Server). The main text of this procedure is applicable to Server 7A7. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Server 7A10.]


Removal










7. Set switch (4) ([4]) on Server A7 [A10] to off position.

8. Disconnect AC power cable (2) from Server A7 [A10].

9. Disconnect cables from Server A7 [A10], refer to Table 6-9A. Note that cable W3702 [W3701] to port 4 and cable W6501 [W6504] to port 5 may not be present in some systems.



11. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (3) and washers that secure Server A7 [A10] to cabinet.

12. Remove Server A7 [A10] from cabinet.

Installation

Inspect Server for foreign objects.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-338



2. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (3) and washers to secure Server A7 [A10] to cabinet.



4. Connect cables to Server A7 [A10], refer to Table 6-11.

5. Connect AC power cable (2) to Server A7 [A10].

6. Ensure switch (4) is set to on position.





10. Ensure MSSR A Data, MSSR B Data, MSSR A Status, and MSSR B Status on SCDI B [SCDI A] Communication Interfaces screen do not indicate a fault.

11. Ensure FMAC on SCDI B [SCDI A] Status and Control Status screen does not indicate a fault.

Table 6-11. Server Cable Connections

Server Cable Connections f o r 7 A 7

Server Cable Connections f o r [ 7 A 1 0 ]

Cable Assy No.


Tools Required Cable Assy No.


Tools Required

W 6 5 2 0 T X N o n e W 6 5 2 1 T X N o n e





W6503* Port 4 Flat Tip Screwdriver W6506* Port 4 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W 6 5 0 1 * Port 5 Flat Tip Screwdriver W6504* Port 5 Flat Tip Screwdriver


* May not be present in some systems. * May not be present in some systems.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-339

Figure 6-118. MPS-800 Multi-Protocol Server 7A7 [7A10]

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-340

6.3.5.12 Replace Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12, 7A13

Tools Digital Multimeter Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Side cutter, 6 inch 8 mm Nut driver

Materials: Tie wraps (various sizes, as required)

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Common Equipment Cabinet (CEC) Power Bars. The main text of this procedure is applicable to CEC Power Bar 7A12. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to CEC Power Bar 7A13.]


Removal




Location: Rear of Unit 2, REX/SDP B [Unit 1, REX/SDP A] Cabinet


4. Disconnect CEC power cable (1) from Cabinet UPS A10 connection J10.

5. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure CEC power cable (1) to cabinet.

Location: Rear of Unit 1, REX/SDP A Cabinet

NOTE: The following Steps are applicable to CEC Power Bar A12 only.


7. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure CEC power cable (1) to cabinet.

8. Route CEC power cable (1) through cable access to Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet.



10. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC is not present on CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] by inserting leads into one socket.

11. Disconnect six power cables from CEC Power Bar A12 [A13].

12. Using screwdriver, remove wire No. 4 [No.5] from CEC Power Bar A12 [A13].

13. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure CEC power cable (1) to cabinet or other cables.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-341



15. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screw (2), lock washer and flat washer that secure CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] to cabinet.

16. Remove CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect CEC Power Bar for foreign objects.


2. Set switch (3) on CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] to on position.

3. Install CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] into cabinet.

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screw (2), lock washer and flat washer to secure CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] to cabinet.


5. Route CEC power cable (1) through cable access to Unit 1, REX/SDP A Cabinet.

6. Using screwdriver, install wire No. 4 [No.5] to CEC Power Bar A12 [A13].

7. Connect six power cables to CEC Power Bar A12 [A13].

8. Install tie wraps to secure CEC power cable (1) to cabinet. Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.


9. Connect CEC power cable (1) to Cabinet UPS A10 connection J10.

10. Install tie wraps to secure CEC power cable (1) to cabinet. Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.



12. Ensure switch (3) on CEC Power Bar A12 [A13] is illuminated.

13. Ensure Common Equipment Cabinet Fan B1 [B2] is rotating.

14. Ensure POWER indication on FMAC A1 [A2] module A14 is illuminated.



16. Ensure FMAC 24V PSU on SCDI A [SCDI B] Status and Control Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-342

17. Transition SCDI A [SCDI B] to Online Standby.

Figure 6-119. Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12 [7A13]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-343

Figure 6-120. Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar 7A12 [7A13]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-344

6.3.5.13 Replace FMAC Interface PWB 7A15


Digital Multimeter * *



Removal





4. Transition SCDI B to Maintenance Standby.

5. Transition SCDI A to Maintenance Selected.





8. Select Shutdown SCDI on Local Workstation Actions screen. Wait until ok prompt appears.



10. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A12 to off position. (Note: This removes AC power from the FMAC A Power Supply module A14.)

11. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A13 to off position. (Note: This removes AC power from the FMAC B Power Supply module A14.)



13. Switch Breakers 7 in DP4 and DP5 to the OFF position. (Note: This removes power from the 24 Vdc Power Supplies PS1 and PS2, which are used by FMACs A and B.)

14. Disconnect W1P1 from Relay Box A16J2. (Note: This removes AC power from the FMAC A

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-345

Power Supply module A1.)

15. Disconnect W31P1 from Relay Box A17J2. (Note: This removes AC power from the FMAC B Power Supply module A1.)

16. Disconnect cable assemblies from FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 connectors, refer to Table 6-12.

17. Remove eleven 1 amp fuses from FMAC Interface PWB A15 fuse holders F1 through F10, and F13.

18. Remove two 3 amp fuses from FMAC Interface PWB A15 fuse holders F11 and F12.

19. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove 25 screws (1), lock washers and flat washers that secure FMAC Interface PWB A15 to cabinet.

20. Remove FMAC Interface PWB A15 from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect FMAC Interface PWB for foreign objects.



3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install 25 screws (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure FMAC Interface PWB to cabinet.

4. Connect cable assemblies to FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 connectors, refer to Table 6-11.

5. Install eleven 1 amp fuses in FMAC Interface PWB A15 fuse holders F1 through F10, and F13.

6. Install two 3 amp fuses in FMAC Interface PWB A15 fuse holders F11 and F12.

NOTE: Ensure that only fuse holders F11 and F12 are fitted with 3 amp fuses.

7. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure fuses in FMAC Interface PWB A15 have not opened (ie: short across fuse holders).

8. Connect W1P1 to Relay Box A16J2. (Note: This connects AC power to the FMAC A Power Supply module A1.)

9. Connect W31P1 to Relay Box A17J2. (Note: This connects AC power to the FMAC B Power Supply module A1.)

10. Switch Breakers 7 in DP4 and DP5 to the ON position. (Note: This applies power to the 24 Vdc Power Supplies PS1 and PS2, which are used by FMACs A and B.)



12. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A12 to on position. (Note: This applies AC power to the FMAC A Power Supply module A14.)

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-346

13. Set switch on Common Equipment Cabinet Power Bar A13 to on position. (Note: This applies AC power to the FMAC B Power Supply module A14.)



15. At ok prompt, enter ‘boot’.


16. At ok prompt, enter ‘boot’.



18. Ensure FMAC and FMAC 24V PSU on SCDI A Status and Control Status screen do not indicate a fault.

19. Ensure FMAC and FMAC 24V PSU on SCDI B Status and Control Status screen do not indicate a fault.

20. Ensure all indications on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate a fault.

21. Ensure all indications on Facility Detailed Status screen do not indicate a fault.

22. Ensure all indications on Engine/Generator Status and Control screen do not indicate a fault.

23. Ensure all indications on Site UPS Detailed Status and Control screen do not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-347

Table 6-12. FMAC Interface PWB Connections

FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 See Figure 6-121

FMAC Interface PWB 7A15 See Figure 6-122

Cable Assy Cable Assy

No. Location Tools Required No. Location Tools Required

W1601 J51 Flat Tip Screwdriver W 3 0 P 2 1 J91 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W2002 J52 Flat Tip Screwdriver W 3 0 P 2 0 J92 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W7202 J53 Flat Tip Screwdriver W30P19 J93 Flat Tip Screwdriver



W 3 0 P 2 2 J96 Flat Tip Screwdriver W1101 J 1 1 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W15 J1 Flat Tip Screwdriver W1802 J 1 0 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W45 J3 Flat Tip Screwdriver W2001 J5 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W 3 0 P 2 3 J97 Flat Tip Screwdriver W2003 J7 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W 3 0 P 2 4 J 98 Flat Tip Screwdriver W7203 J16 Flat Tip Screwdriver


W40 J43 Flat Tip Screwdriver W4201 J 132 Flat Tip Screwdriver

W41 J46 Flat Tip Screwdriver W4202 J 142 Flat Tip Screwdriver


W7201 J 13 Flat Tip Screwdriver W11 J36 Flat Tip Screwdriver





11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-348

Figure 6-121. FMAC Interface PWB 7A15

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-349


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-350


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-351

6.3.5.14 Replace Latching Relay Box 7A16, 7A17

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Flat tip screwdriver Small Side cutters, 6 inch

Materials: Tie wraps (various sizes and as required)

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Latching Relay Boxes. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Latching Relay Box 7A16. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Latching Relay Box 7A17.]


Removal









6. Disconnect Relay Box power cable (1) from Cabinet UPS A10 connection J7.

7. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure Relay Box power cable to cabinet.


NOTE: Steps 8, 9 and 10 are applicable to Latching Relay Box 7A17 only.


9. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure Relay Box power cable (1) to cabinet.

10. Route Relay Box power cable (1) through cable access to Unit 7, Common Equipment Cabinet.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-352

13. Disconnect power cable (3) ([3]) from SCDI Workstation A4 [A5].

14. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps that secure power cable (3) ([3]) to cabinet.

15. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure cable W14 [W44] to Relay Box A16 [A17] connector J1. Disconnect cable.

16. Disconnect cable W1 [W31] from Relay Box A16 [A17] J2.

17. Open and remove power cable tray cover (4).

18. Using side cutters, cut and remove tie wraps.

19. Remove Relay Box power cables (6) ([6]) and (7) ([7]) from power cable tray (4).

20. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (5), lock washers and flat washers that secure Relay Box A16 [A17] to cabinet.

21. Remove Relay Box A16 [A17].

Installation

1. Inspect Latching Relay Box for foreign objects.


2. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (5), lock washers and flat washers to secure Relay Box A16 [A17] to cabinet.

3. Install Relay Box power cables (6) ([6]) and (7) ([7]) into power cable tray (4).

4. Install tie wraps to secure power cable (6) ([6]) and (7) ([7]) to power cable tray (4). Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.

5. Install power cable tray cover (4).

6. Connect cable W1 [W31] to Relay Box A16 [A17] J2.

7. Using flat tip screwdriver, install cable W14 [W44] to Relay Box A16 [A17] connector J1.

8. Connect power cable (3) ([3]) to SCDI Workstation A4 [A5].

9. Install tie wraps to secure power cable (3) ([3]) to cabinet. Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.


11. Route Relay Box power cable (1) through cable access to Unit 1, REX/SDP A Cabinet.


NOTE: Steps 12, 13 and 14 are applicable to Latching Relay Box 7A17 only.

12. Route Relay Box power cable (1) through cable access to Unit 2, REX/SDP B Cabinet.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-353

13. Install tie wraps to secure Relay Box power cable (1) to cabinet. Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.



15. Connect Relay Box power cable (1) to Cabinet UPS A10 connection J7.

16. Install tie wraps to secure Relay Box power cable (1) to cabinet. Use side cutters to trim tie wraps.













24. Select Restart SCDI B [Restart SCDI A].


25. Ensure SCDI Main Screen appears (SCDI rebooted).

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-354

Figure 6-124. Latching Relay Box 7A16 [7A17]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-355

Figure 6-125. Latching Relay Box 7A16 [7A17]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-356

6.3.5.15 Replace FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1, 7PS2

Tools: Phillips screwdriver No. 2

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both FMAC 24V Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS2.]


Removal


1. Remove upper panel from cabinet and disconnect ground strap.

2. Switch Breaker 7 in DP4 [DP5] to the off position.

3. Disconnect terminal block (1) from FMAC 24V Power Supply PS1 [PS2].

4. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove four screws (2), lock washers and flat washers that secure FMAC 24V Power Supply PS1 [PS2] to cabinet.

5. Remove FMAC 24V Power Supply PS1 [PS2] from cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect FMAC 24V Power Supply for foreign objects.


2. Using Phillips screwdriver, install four screws (2), lock washers and flat washers to secure FMAC 24V Power Supply PS1 [PS2] to cabinet.

3. Connect terminal block (1) to FMAC 24V Power Supply PS1 [PS2].

4. Switch Breaker 7 in DP4 [DP5] to the on position.



6. Ensure FMAC 24V PSU on SCDI A [SCDI B] Status and Control Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-357

Figure 6-126. FMAC 24V Power Supply 7PS1 [7PS2]

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-358

6.3.5.16 Replace FMAC Modules

Tools: Phillips screwdriver Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTE: The following procedures are for removing and replacing a module within the FMAC. To replace the entire FMAC, use procedures in paragraph 6.3.5.1.

NOTE: The procedures are written for SCDI-A FMAC-A. The LRU in parentheses is for SCDI-B FMAC-B. See Figure 6-127.

Removal


1. Put SCDI-A (B) in standby maintenance.


2. Shutdown SCDI-A (B) by selecting the SCDI Shutdown option located in Local Workstation Actions. Wait until the SCDI goes to the OK prompt.


3. Unplug power cable J2 from 7A16 (7A17) located in the back of cabinet 7.


CAUTION

Failure to turn off Power Switch may result in damage to the equipment.

4. Turn off Power Switch on Power bar A 7A12 (B 7A14) located at the bottom of cabinet 7. This

will remove power to the ADU power supply 7A1A14 (7A2A14). See Figure 6-127.

NOTE: Mark cables to ensure connection success.

5. Remove cabling from the module to be changed. The terminal blocks located on modules A1, A9, A10, A11, A12, and A14 can be removed as a unit. It is not necessary to remove the individual wires.

NOTE: To replace module A16, Azimuth output module, module A17 must be removed in order to remove the wires on the terminal blocks. The terminal blocks on modules A16 and A17 do not come off as a unit. See Figure 6-128

NOTE: To replace module A15, set the DIP switches to the same settings that were used on the old, failed module. See Figure 6-128

6. Loosen the Phillips screw located on the top of the module. The CPU module has two screws. All other modules have one screw.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-359

7. Pull the module down from the top to release it from the back connector and then lift it up to release the module from the bottom lip.

Installation


1. Insert new module and tighten Phillips screw to secure module to frame.

2. Attach all removed cabling for this module.


3. Plug power cable J2 into 7A16 (7A17) located in the back of cabinet 7.


4. Turn on Power Switch on Power bar A 7A12 (B 7A14).


5. When SCDI-A (B) has OK prompt on screen type “boot –r” followed by RETURN to reboot the SCDI.

6. After SCDI-A (B) has rebooted, click on SCDI-A (B) “Detailed Status and Control”.

7. Verify that the FMAC and the associated power supply are green.

8. Open the following “Detailed Status and Control” menus from the SCDI-A (B) main screen and verify that the status of all are normal for your site:

a. APG

b. Facility

c. Eng/Gen

d. Site UPS

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-360

Figure 6-127. Cabinet 7

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-361

Figure 6-128. FMAC LRUs

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-362

6.3.6 Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15

6.3.6.1 Replace Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15 (ACS 600 or ACS 800)

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Flat tip screwdriver, medium Digital Multimeter * * Punch Hammer Open end wrench, 5/8 inch Flat tip screwdriver, small


Personnel: Two

WARNING


NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Motor Controllers. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Motor Controller Unit 14 (Motor Controller A). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Motor Controller Unit 15 (Motor Controller B).]

Replace the motor controller with the same type motor controller. Do not install an ACS600 controller and an ACS800 in the same ASR11 system. Different versions of Firmware in CDP312 motor controller panels (control units) are acceptable for same system installation.


Removal



2. Put both REXs and both MSSRs in maintenance.

3. Set Motor A [Motor B] to Stop.

Location: Power Distribution Unit (PDU) DP4 [DP5]


5. Set Motor A [Motor B] circuit breaker DP4 - CB2/4/6 [DP5 - CB2/4/6] to off position.

6. Attach Lockout clamp to Motor A [Motor B] circuit breaker DP4 - CB2/4/6 [DP5 - CB2/4/ 6].

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-363


Location: Unit 14, Motor Controller A [Unit 15, Motor Controller B]

8. Remove CDP 312 Control Panel (1) from Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. A small screwdriver may be needed to pry the control panel out of its socket. Label control panel. (A or B)

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove two screws (2) from bottom of front panel of Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. To remove lift outward from the bottom of the panel and then unplug the I/O cable. Figure 6-129.

10. If required (ACS 600) use a Phillips screwdriver to remove screws, lock washers, and flat washers that secure cover (3) of the input terminal block (4). Refer to Figure 6-130.

11. If required (ACS 600) use a Phillips screwdriver to remove screws, lock washers, and flat washers that secure cover (5) of the output terminal block (6).

12. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure the 375 volts AC phase to phase or 212 volts AC phase to ground is not present on three wires of input cable W0054 [W0055] of Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections (4).

13. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure 512 volt DC voltages is not present on three wires of output cable W0041 [W0042] of Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections (6)

14. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect input cable W0054 [W0055] from Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections (4). Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen screw that secures input ground wire.

15. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect output cable W0041 [W0042] from Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections (6). Using a large flat blade screwdriver disconnect output ground wire.

16. Using a punch or a flat blade screwdriver and a hammer, loosen conduit star nut (7) that secures input cable W0054 [W0055] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Remove cable.

17. Using a punch or a flat blade screwdriver and a hammer, loosen conduit star nut (8) that secures output cable W0041 [W0042] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Remove cable.

18. At the rear of Cabinet 7 locate the FMAC Interface PWB and use a fuse puller to lift fuses F3 (1 amp) and F12 (3 amp) to remove 24 volts from some of the relay wires of control cable W5201 [W5301].

19. At the Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal block X21, X22, X25, X26, and X27 if needed use a heat gun to heat shrink the labels of wires of control cable W5201 [W5301]. so the labels will not fall off when the wires are removed. Use a very small flat blade tip screwdriver to disconnect all wires attached to this cable.

20. Using a punch or a flat blade screwdriver and a hammer, loosen conduit star nut (9) that secures control cable W5201 [W5301] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Cut the tie warps and remove this cable.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-364

21. To remove the star nut that secures the large green and orange ground wire, it may be necessary to loosen the screws holding the cable mounting plate. Using a punch or flat blade screwdriver loosen and remove conduit star nut. Remove this cable.

22. Using open end wrench, remove or loosen the four mounting bolts (10), lock washers and flat washers that secure Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] to wall.

23. With assistance of second person, lift up and remove Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] from the wall.

Installation


1. Inspect location Unit 14 [Unit 15] for foreign objects.

2. With assistance of second person, using open end wrench, install four mounting bolts (10), lock washers and flat washers to secure Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] securely to the wall.

3. Loosen the screws holding the cable mounting plate. Using a punch or flat blade screwdriver connect and tighten the conduit star nut to the coupling on the large green and orange ground wire. Tighten the screws connecting the mounting plate and reconnect this cable.

4. Route control cable W5201 [W5301] through conduit star nut into Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Using a punch or flat blade screwdriver and a hammer, connect and tighten conduit star nut.

5. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect wires of control cable W5201 [W5301] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal block X21, X22, X25, X26, and X27. Tie-wrap the cable into place.

6. Reinstall fuses F3 (1 amp) and F12 (3 amp) previously removed from backplane of cabinet 7.

7. Route output cable W0041 [W0042] through conduit star nut into Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Using punch and a hammer, tighten conduit star nut.

8. Remove the ground connector and install and tighten the ground wire.

9. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect output cable W0041 [W0042] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections.

10. Route input cable W0054 [W0055] through conduit star nut into Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Using punch or flat blade screwdriver and a hammer, tighten conduit star nut.

11. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten screw to secure ground wire to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B].

12. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect input cable W0054 [W0055] to Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] terminal connections.

13. If required (ACS 600), use a Phillips screwdriver, install three screws,(5) lock washers and flat washers to secure cover of terminal block.

14. If required (ACS 600), use a Phillips screwdriver, install screw (3), lock washer and flat washer to secure cover of terminal block.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-365

15. Plug in the I/O cable on the front panel and then install the cover panel onto the Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B]. Using Phillips screw-driver, install two screws at bottom of front panel.

Note: Do Not Install the associated CDP 312 at this time



17. Remove Lockout Tag from Motor A [Motor B] circuit breaker DP4 - CB8/10/12 [DP5 - CB8/10/12].

18. Set Motor A [Motor B] circuit breaker DP4 - CB8/10/12 [DP5 - CB8/10/12] to on position.


Location: Unit 15, Motor Controller B [Unit 14, Motor Controller A]

Note: When power is restored Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] will have a red failure light illuminated because CDP 312 is missing.

After uploading files from the original motor controller to the new panel and placing the new panel back into the new motor controller, the parameters in the new panel can be lost if the motor controller is power cycled. Power cycling the motor controller will automatically upload its configuration file to the installed panel. The new panel must be installed after the motor controller has been powered on so this unintentional upload overwrite will not occur.

20. On Motor Controller B [Motor Controller A] CDP 312 Control Panel, upload the stored parameters as follows:

Press LOC*REM until L appears on top line (Local Mode)

Press FUNC

Press the up or down arrow until the U is highlighted to select the UPLOAD function

Press ENTER (to copy parameters from Motor Controller)

21. On Motor Controller B [Motor Controller A] CDP 312 Control Panel, wait for upload to complete.

22. Place the CDP312 back to REMOTE by pressing the LOC*REM button until the L extinguishes on the top line.

23. Remove CDP 312 Control Panel from Motor Controller B [Motor Controller A]. A small screwdriver may be needed to pry the control panel out of its socket.


24. Install Motor Controller B [Motor Controller A] CDP 312 Control Panel into Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B].

25. On Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] CDP 312 Control Panel, download the stored

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-366

parameters as follows:

Press FUNC

Press D to select DOWNLOAD function

Press ENTER (to copy parameters to Motor Controller)

26. On Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] CDP 312 Control Panel, wait for download to complete. If the download is not successful, go to step 27, otherwise go to step 28.

27 If the CDP 312 Control Panel firmware version is not the same version number, manually download the parameters from Table 2-20 Paragraph 2.13.1.1.

28 Press LOC*REM until the L extinguishes on the top line (Remote Mode).

29 Remove CDP 312 Control Panel from Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B].

30 Install original CDP 312 Control Panel into Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B].

Location: Unit 15, Motor Controller B [Unit 14, Motor Controller A]

31 Install CDP 312 Control Panel into Motor Controller B [Motor Controller A].


32 Ensure Motor Controller A [Motor Controller B] on APG Control & Status screen does not indicate a fault.

33 Set Motor A [Motor B] to Run.

34 Ensure Motor A [Motor B] indicates Run.

35 Verify proper antenna rotation (check the direction the antenna is turning).

36 Set Motor B [Motor A] to Run

37 Restore both REX’s and MSSR’s back in service and make everything has green status.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-367

Figure 6-129. Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-368

Figure 6-130. Motor Controller Unit 14, Unit 15

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-369

6.3.7 Pedestal Interface Panel Unit 16

6.3.7.1 Replace Pedestal Interface Panel PWB 16A1

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Open end wrench, 5/16 inch


Removal






5. Transition MSSR B to Maintenance Standby.

6. Transition MSSR A to Maintenance Selected.

7. Set MSSR B RF Enable to Off.

8. Set MSSR A RF Enable to Off.

9. Set Antenna Rotation to Stop.

Location: Unit 16, Pedestal Interface Panel

10. Open Pedestal Interface Panel door.

11. Disconnect cables from Pedestal Interface Panel PWB A1, refer to Table 6-13 and see Figure 6-131.

12. Using open end wrench, remove hex bolt (1), lock washer and flat washer that secure ground strap (2) to Pedestal Interface Panel cabinet.

13. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove fifteen screws (3), lock washers and flat washers that secure Pedestal Interface Panel PWB A1 to Pedestal Interface Panel cabinet.

14. Remove Pedestal Interface Pedestal PWB A1 from Pedestal Interface Panel cabinet.

Installation

1. Inspect Pedestal Interface Pedestal PWB for foreign objects.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-370

Location: Unit 16, Pedestal Interface Panel


3. Using Phillips screwdriver, install fifteen screws (3), lock washers and flat washers to secure Pedestal Interface Panel PWB A1 to Pedestal Interface Panel cabinet.

4. Connect cables to Pedestal Interface Panel PWB A1, refer to Table 6-13 and see Figure 6-131.

5. Using open end wrench, install hex nut (1), lock washer and flat washer to secure ground strap (2) to panel.

6. Close Pedestal Interface Panel door.


7. Set Antenna Rotation to Run.

8. Ensure Motor A and Motor B indicate Run.



11. Set MSSR B RF Enable to On.

12. Set MSSR A RF Enable to On.

13. Transition MSSR A to Online Selected.

14. Transition MSSR B to Online Standby.

Table 6-13. Pedestal Interface Panel PWB Cable Connections

Cable Numbers to J Connections

Cable Assy No.

Outlet or Serial Port Tools Required


W1701A J8 Flat Tip Screwdriver








07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-371

Figure 6-131. Pedestal Interface Panel PWB 16A1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-372

6.3.8 Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18

6.3.8.1 Replace Compressor Dehydrator, Unit 18

Tools: Ratchet, with 7/16 and 9/16 inch socket Phillips screwdriver, No.1 Open end wrench, 3/8 inch Open end wrench, 7/16 inch Open end wrench, 1/2 inch Open end wrench, 9/16 inch Punch Hammer Digital Multimeter * * Lockout tag Flat Tip Screwdriver


Personnel: Two

WARNING



Removal



2. Set Compressor Dehydrator circuit breaker DP6 - CB16 to off position.

3. Attach Lockout Tag to Compressor Dehydrator circuit breaker DP6 - CB16.


Location: Unit 18, Compressor Dehydrator

5. Set switch (1) on Compressor Dehydrator to OFF.

6. Disconnect ground strap from compressor dehydrator cover.

7. Using ratchet and open end wrench, remove four bolts (2), lock washers and flat washers that secure Compressor Dehydrator to support brackets (3).

8. With assistance of second person, move Compressor Dehydrator away from wall to access cables.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-373

9. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove fourteen screws (4) that secure cover assembly (6) to Compressor Dehydrator.

NOTE: Do Not Remove Four Screws (5).

10. Remove cover assembly (6) from Compressor Dehydrator.

11. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure AC power is not present at connectors of three wires (7) of power cable (8).

12. Disconnect three wires (7) of power cable (8).

13. Using punch and hammer, loosen conduit star nut (9) that secures power cable (8) to Compressor Dehydrator. Remove cable.

14. Lift air bleed valve (10) to bleed air.

15. Using open end wrench, loosen air hose (11) at Compressor Dehydrator. Remove air hose.

16. Using flat tip screwdriver, disconnect wires of cable W1101 from terminal block (12).

17. With assistance of second person, remove Compressor Dehydrator from support brackets (3).

Installation

1. Inspect Compressor Dehydrator for damage.

2. With assistance of second person, place Compressor Dehydrator on support brackets (3).

3. Connect ground strap to compressor dehydrator.

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, connect wires of cable W1101 to terminal block (12).

5. Using open end wrench, install air hose (9) on Compressor Dehydrator.

6. Route power cable (8) through conduit star nut (9).

7. Using punch and hammer, tighten conduit star nut (9).

8. Connect three wires (7) of power cable (8) to terminal connections.

9. Position cover assembly (6) on Compressor Dehydrator.

10. Using Phillips screwdriver, install fourteen screws (4) to secure cover assembly (6) to Compressor Dehydrator.

11. Using ratchet and open end wrench, install four bolts (2), lock washers and flat washers to secure Compressor Dehydrator to support brackets (3).

12. Set switch (1) on Compressor Dehydrator to ON.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-374


14. Remove Lockout Tag from Compressor Dehydrator circuit breaker DP6 - CB16.

15. Set Compressor Dehydrator circuit breaker DP6 - CB16 to on position.


Location: Unit 18, Compressor Dehydrator

17. Verify operation of Compressor Dehydrator per TI 6310.47, System Operation and Maintenance Instructions, WP 004.05.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-375

Figure 6-132. Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-376

Figure 6-133. Compressor Dehydrator Unit 18

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-377

6.3.9 Pedestal Local Control Panel Unit 34

6.3.9.1 Replace Encoder Power Supply 34PS1, 34PS2

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, medium Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Open end wrench, 8 mm Lockout tag

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are nearly identical for both Encoder Power Supplies. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Encoder Power Supply 34PS1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Encoder Power Supply

34PS2]


Removal



2. Transition Encoders so Encoder Y [Encoder X] is Selected and Encoder X [Encoder Y] is Standby.



4. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP4 - CB8 [DP5 - CB8] to off position.

5. Attach Lockout Tag to Encoder circuit breaker DP4 - CB8 [DP5 - CB8].


Location: Unit 34, Pedestal Local Control Panel

7. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen five captive screw that secure retaining clips to door of panel.

8. Slide five retaining clips off free from door of panel.

9. Open door of panel.

10. Set switch Encoder X [Encoder Y] (1) on switch panel (2) to OFF position.

11. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two retaining clips that secure cable connector (3) to Encoder Power Supply PS1 [PS2]. Disconnect cable connector (3).

12. Using open end wrench, remove four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers that secure Encoder Power Supply PS1 [PS2] to panel.

13. Remove Encoder Power Supply PS1 [PS2] from panel.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-378

Installation

1. Inspect Encoder Power Supply for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location PS1 [PS2] for foreign objects.

3. Using open end wrench, install four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers to secure Encoder Power Supply to panel in slot PS1 [PS2].

4. Connect cable connector (3) to Encoder Power Supply PS1 [PS2]. Using Phillips screwdriver, tighten two retaining clips to secure cable connector (3).

5. Set switch Encoder X [Encoder Y] (1) on switch panel (2) to ON position.

6. Close door of panel.

7. Slide five retaining clips onto door of panel.

8. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten five captive screws to secure retaining clips to door of panel.



10. Remove Lockout Tag from Encoder circuit breaker DP4 - CB8 [DP5 - CB8].

11. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP4 - CB8 [DP5 - CB8] to on position.



13. Ensure Encoder X [Encoder Y] and Encoder X Power Supply [Encoder Y Power Supply] on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate a fault.

14. Ensure no azimuth messages have been raised.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-379

Figure 6-134. Encoder Power Supply 34PS1 [34PS2]

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-380

6.3.9.2 Replace Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply 34PS3

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, medium Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Open end wrench, 8 mm Ratchet, with 8 mm socket and extension Lockout tag


Removal



2. Transition Encoders so Encoder X is selected and Encoder Y is Standby.



4. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to off position.

5. Attach Lockout Tag to Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8.






10. Set switch Wx Bias (1) on switch panel (2) to OFF position.

11. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two retaining clips that secure cable connector (3) to Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply PS3. Disconnect cable connector (3).

12. Using open end wrench and ratchet, remove four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers that secure Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply PS3 to panel.

13. Remove Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply PS3 from panel.

Installation

1. Inspect Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location PS3 for foreign objects.

* *

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-381

3. Using open end wrench and ratchet, install four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers to secure Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply to panel in slot PS3.

4. Connect cable connector (3) to Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply PS3. Using Phil-lips screwdriver, tighten two retaining clips to secure cable connector (3).

5. Set switch Wx Bias (1) on switch panel (2) to ON position.






10. Remove Lockout Tag from Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8.

11. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to on position.



13. Ensure Encoder Y and Beam Switch +5VDC on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-382

Figure 6-135. Wx Beam Switch +5V Power Supply 34PS3

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-383

6.3.9.3 Replace Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply 34PS4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, medium Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Open end wrench, 8 mm Ratchet, with 8 mm socket and extension Lockout tag

WARNING

Space within the Pedestal Local Control Panel makes removal of Wx Beam Switch Power Supply PS4 difficult. Live voltage may be present on Sump Heater Relay K4. Avoid contact.


Removal



2. Transition Encoders so Encoder X is Selected and Encoder Y is Standby.



4. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to off position.







10. Using Phillips screwdriver, loosen two retaining clips that secure cable connector (1) to Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply PS4. Disconnect cable connector (1).

11. Using open end wrench and ratchet, remove four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers that secure Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply PS4 to panel.

12. Remove Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply PS4 from panel.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-384

Installation

1. Inspect Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply for foreign objects.


2. Inspect location PS4 for foreign objects.

3. Using open end wrench and ratchet, install four hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers to secure Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply to panel in slot PS4.

4. Connect cable connector (1) to Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply PS4. Using Phil-lips screwdriver, tighten two retaining clips to secure cable connector (1).







10. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to on position.



12. Ensure Encoder Y and Beam Switch -70 VDC on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-385

Figure 6-136. Wx Beam Switch -70V Power Supply 34PS4

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-386

6.3.9.4 Replace Oil Level Transition Module 34A1

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Flat tip screwdriver, medium

NOTES: This procedure requires the ASR-11 system to be taken out of service: therefore, coordination must be performed with Air Traffic services to schedule downtime before beginning this procedure.

The Oil Level Transition Module has +24V connected using a Terminal Block. Instead of fully removing the Oil Level Transition Module and installing a replacement, the new unit is installed and wires moved from the defective unit to the new unit.

See Figure 6-137, Oil Level Transition Module 34A1, for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Procedure



2. Set REX/SDP B to Maintenance Standby with Channel Processing set to idle.

3. Set REX/SDP A to Maintenance Selected with Channel Processing set to idle.


5. Transition MSSR B to Maintenance Standby.

6. Transition MSSR A to Maintenance Selected.

7. Set MSSR A and B RF Enable to Off.

8. Set Antenna Rotation to Stop.

Location: Power Distribution Unit (PDU) DP4 and DP5


2. Set CEC circuit breaker DP4 – CB7 to the Off position.

3. Attach Lockout Tag to Encoder circuit breaker DP4 – CB7.

4. Close door of DP4.


6. Set CEC circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to Off position.



11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-387


High Voltage is still present inside this panel 9. Using medium flat tip screwdriver, loosen five captive screw that secure retaining clips to door

of panel.



12. Inspect replacement Oil Level Transition Module for damage.

13. Using medium flat tip screwdriver, install new Oil Level Transition Module A1 adjacent to defective Oil Level Transition Module on Terminal Board TB3.

14. Transfer wires from defective Oil Level Transition Module A1 to new Oil Level Transition Module A1, refer to Table 6-14.

15. Using medium flat tip screwdriver, remove defective Oil Level Transition Module A1 from panel.




Table 6-14. Oil Level Transition Module 34A1 Wire Transfer

Wire Transfer

Wire No. or Nomenclature From/To Connector

Tools Required

0V E Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

24V F Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Gearbox A A Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Gearbox B B Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Sump C Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

OV D Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Gearbox A J Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Gearbox B H Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

Sump G Flat Tip Screwdriver, small

WARNING

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-388

Location: Power Distribution Unit (PDU) DP4 and DP5


20. Remove Lockout Tag from Encoder circuit breaker DP4 – CB7.

21. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP4 – CB7 to the On position.




25. Set Encoder circuit breaker DP5 - CB8 to On position.



27. Return ASR-11 Radar System to an operational state.

28. Ensure Motor Gearbox Oil and Pedestal Oil Level on APG Control & Status screen do not indicate any faults.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-389

Figure 6-137. Oil Level Transition Module 34A1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-390

6.3.9.5 Replace Obstruction Light Relay 34K1



Removal





4. Firmly grasp and pull Obstruction Light Relay K1 from socket.

Installation

1. Inspect Obstruction Light Relay for bent pins.


2. Inspect location K1 for foreign objects.

3. Firmly grasp and install Obstruction Light Relay into socket in slot K1 until fully seated.





7. Ensure Obstruction Lights on APG Control & Status screen does not indicate a fault.

Location: Outside

8. Ensure Obstruction Lights are illuminated.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-391

Figure 6-138. Obstruction Light Relay 34K1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-392

6.3.9.6 Replace Pedestal Room Enable Relay 34K2



Removal





4. Firmly grasp and pull Pedestal Room Enable Relay K2 from socket.

Installation

1. Inspect Pedestal Room Enable Relay for bent pins.



3. Firmly grasp and install Pedestal Room Enable Relay into socket in slot K2 until fully seated.


4. Set Pedestal Room Control to Enabled.

5. Ensure Pedestal Room Control indicates Enabled.


6. Press Release Control on switch panel.





10. Ensure Pedestal Room Control indicates Disabled.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-393

Figure 6-139. Pedestal Room Enable Relay 34K2

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-394

6.3.9.7 Replace Polarizer Select Relay 34K3



Removal





4. Firmly grasp and pull Polarizer Select Relay K3 from socket.

Installation

1. Inspect Polarizer Select Relay for bent pins.



3. Firmly grasp and install Polarizer Select Relay into socket in slot K3 until fully seated.





7. Set Polarization to Linear if current Polarization is Circular (or to Circular if current Polarization is Linear).

8. Ensure Polarizer indicates Linear (or Circular).

9. Set Polarization to Circular if current Polarization is Linear (or to Linear if current Polarization is Circular).

10. Ensure Polarizer indicates Circular (or Linear).

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-395

Figure 6-140. Polarizer Select Relay 34K3

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-396

6.3.9.8 Replace Sump Heater Relay 34K4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, medium Digital Multimeter * *



Removal


1. In DP3, set circuit breakers CB1, 3, and 5 to off position.




5. Firmly grasp and pull Sump Heater Relay K4 from socket.

6. In DP3, set circuit breakers CB1, 3, and 5 to on position.

Installation

1. Inspect Sump Heater Relay for bent pins.



3. In DP3, set circuit breakers CB1, 3, and 5 to off position.

4. Firmly grasp and install Sump Heater Relay into socket in slot K4 until fully seated.

5. In DP3, set circuit breakers CB1, 3, and 5 to on position.

6. Using Digital Multimeter, check if 24 VDC is present between Sump Heater Relay K4 terminals 33 and 34. If not, press and hold Test Switch on Sump Heater Relay K4.

7. Using Digital Multimeter, ensure 220 VAC is present between Sump Heater Relay K4 test point L1 and ground.



10. If necessary, release Test Switch on Sump Heater Relay K4


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-397



Figure 6-141. Sump Heater Relay 34K4

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-398

6.3.9.9 Replace Pedestal Temperature Relay 34K5



Removal





4. Firmly grasp and pull Pedestal Temperature Relay K5 from socket.

Installation

1. Inspect Pedestal Temperature Relay for bent pins.



3. Firmly grasp and install Pedestal Temperature Relay into socket in slot K5 until fully seated.





7. Ensure Pedestal Oil Temperature on APG Control & Status screen does not indicate a fault.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-399

Figure 6-142. Pedestal Temperature Relay 34K5

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-400

6.3.10 Remote OMT Unit 52 or Unit 54

6.3.10.1 Replace HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation 52A1, 54A1

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, 1/8” blade.

NOTES: Replacement HP-Z440 workstations are shipped to site with no software loaded. Remote OMT OS and ASR Application S/W restoration procedures in paragraph 6.3.10.2 must be performed on new units as directed in step 8 of the Installation procedure.

Removal and installation procedures are the same for both Remote OMT Workstations. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Remote OMT Workstation 54A1.]

See figure 6-143a and 6-143b for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal and Replacement Procedure

Removing an Operator Maintenance Terminal (OMT) from service does not interfere with the normal operation of the ASR-11 radar system. Check to see if a Radar Control Panel (RCP) is connected to this Remote OMT. Even though the radar service is not interrupted, the Radar Control Panels driven by this Remote OMT and used by Air Traffic will not be operational while the Remote OMT that connects to it is removed from service.

1. At Remote OMT (or SCDI if an OMT is not capable of taking control), take control and disable autoreconfiguration of the SCDIs. SCDIs will attempt to swap when the Remote OMT is removed from service. It is normal for the SCDI to alarm because of the communications loss, but radar data will continue without interruption. The selected SCDI will indicate a red (alarm) status on the RCP. Advise Air Traffic Control of this situation.

2. Advise Air Traffic Control that they will not have use of their RCPs during the replacement of OMT-1 (approximately 3-4 hours). If replacing an OMT-2, OMT-3, or OMT-4, advise Air Traffic that if there are RCPs connected to those OMTs, they will not be available.

Location: Unit 52 or Unit 54, Remote OMT


2. Disable SCDI Autoreconfiguration.

3. Select SCDI Shutdown on Local Workstation Actions screen.

4. Observe power LED on power button (1) of Remote OMT Workstation and wait for the LED to extinguish before continuing.

5. Disconnect power cable (2) from Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

NOTE: Record cable to connector locations for installation procedure.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-401

6. Disconnect Offsite LAN Ethernet cables (3) from Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] RJ45 connectors PCI-J2 and PCI-J3.

7. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure monitor cable (4) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] DVI connector. Disconnect cable.

8. Disconnect USB keyboard cable (5) from Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

9. Disconnect USB mouse cable (6) from Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1]

10. If Remote OMT is fitted with RCP(s), using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure Radar Control Panel cable(s) (7) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] Serial A/B connector(s). Disconnect cable(s).

11. Remove Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

Installation

1. Inspect replacement Remote OMT Workstation for damage or foreign objects.


2. Inspect location 52A1 [54A1] for foreign objects.

3. Position replacement Remote OMT in location 52A1 [54A1].

4. If location is fitted with RCP(s), connect Radar Control Panel cable(s) (7) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] connector(s) Serial A/B. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable(s).

5. Connect mouse USB cable (6) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

6. Connect keyboard USB cable (5) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

7. Connect monitor cable (4) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] DVI connector. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws to secure cable.

NOTE: Do not connect the Offsite LAN Ethernet cables (3) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] at this time. You will be instructed to do so after installing the Operating System (OS), ASR application software, and site tailoring.

8. Proceed to Restore HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation Software paragraph 6.3.10.2.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-402

Figure 6-143a. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] (Front View)

Figure 6-143b. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] (Rear View)

Keyboard USB1-2

(5)

Mouse USB1-1

(6)

RCP SERIAL A

(7)


(4)

Power (2)

(1)

PCI-J2 (3)

RCP SERIAL B

(7)

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-403

6.3.10.2 Restore HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation Software

This procedure provides the necessary steps to load software onto the HP-Z440 Workstation.

NOTE: Until site tailoring on the replacement Remote OMT has been restored, the replacement Remote OMT may generate false messages and falsely indicate failed units as red widgets on various OMT screens. Until this procedure is completed and site tailoring is restored on the replacement Remote OMT, ignore fault messages and red widgets on the replacement Remote OMT.

See Figure 6-143c for find numbers and physical locations.

Contact your SSC Manager and First Level Engineering if any assistance is required.

Prerequisites

1. Obtain a current copy of the Remote OMT site adaptation on a CD. If a site adaptation CD cannot be located, create a new one using one of the following methods:

Locate the SCDI site adaptation CD. It is possible to restore site tailoring using a SCDI’s site tailoring. The restore script will make the necessary changes to modify the site tailoring. The operator will need to acknowledge extra prompts when restoring with this method.

Capture site adaptation from the operational SCDI.

Download site adaptation backed up on ASR-11 Website: http://www.faa.gov/aos/aos232

Burn a new CD using procedure in Order JO 6310.30A, Maintenance Handbook for Airport Surveillance Radar, ASR-11, Paragraph 5-31, Variable Site Parameters (VSP) Backup.

If you cannot perform any of these alternative methods, contact AJW-147, ASR-11 Second Level Engineering for assistance via the FAA Help Desk at (888) 432-2622.

2. It is recommended this entire procedure be read prior to beginning. Reading through the procedure prior to actually performing the tasks on the system will assist with understanding the process.

Requirements

To restore Remote OMT software, the following are needed:

a. DVD-ROM with a label corresponding to the current COTS ASR software build

b. CD containing the current site adaptation data

c. Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTE: The scripts may prompt the user to contact Raytheon for help. In such cases contact your SSC Manager and First Level Engineering if any assistance is required.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-404

Install OS and ASR Application on new Remote OMT Workstation

The system installation procedure installs both the Operating System and the Application Software. Any data that is stored on the Remote OMT Workstation will be erased in this process. Therefore, before executing this procedure you must have a Site Tailoring archive that can be used to restore the Remote OMT Workstation configuration data. Location: Unit 52 or Unit 54, Remote OMT

1. If Remote OMT is already powered off skip to step 5


3. Disable SCDI Autoreconfiguration.

4. Select SCDI Shutdown on Local Workstation Actions screen.

5. Observe power LED on power button of Remote OMT Workstation and ensure LED is off.

6. Ensure both LAN cables (RJ45) that plug into the New Remote OMT Quad Fast Ethernet (QFE) card have been marked with the corresponding port and disconnected. They will be reconnected at the end of this procedure.

The procedures describing cable disconnections are in 6.3.10.1 Replace HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1].

NOTE: Step 9 is time sensitive. Ensure you read and are ready to perform Step 9 before continuing with Step 7 and 8.

7. If necessary, connect the new Remote OMT Workstation input power cable to the Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] power supply at PSJ1.

8. Verify that the new Remote OMT Workstation power LED has illuminated. If not, use the power button on the front of the workstation to turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation.

Set BIOS Settings


NOTE : Step 9 is time sensitive. If it was not executed in time, the BIOS Startup Menu will not be accessible. If that occurred, hold down the power button until the Workstation powers off. Return to step 8 to turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 Remote OMT Workstation.


11. In the Main section of the BIOS Setup Menu, use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Apply Factory Defaults and Exit menu option and press <Enter>.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-405


12. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Yes menu choice and press <Enter>.




15. In the Main section of the BIOS Setup Menu, use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Change Date And Time menu option and press <Enter>.

16. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Set Time menu option and press <Enter>.

17. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to adjust the time values to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the <Tab> key to select time field and press <Enter> when finished adjusting the time.

18. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Set Date menu option and press <Enter>.

19. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to adjust the date values, the <Tab> key to select date field and press <Enter> when finished adjusting the date.

20. Press <Esc> key once to exit the Change Date And Time setup.

21. At the BIOS Setup Menu screen use the <LEFT/RIGHT arrow> keys to navigate to the Advanced section.

22. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Boot Options menu option and press <Enter>.

23. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the PXE Internal NIC boot menu option and press <Enter>.

NOTE: In the following steps, an item is selected when it has a gray shaded background.


NOTE: In the following step, you may need to scroll down in order to see the Legacy Boot Options menu option.

25. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Legacy Boot Options menu option and press <Enter>.

26. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to select the Enable option and press <Enter>.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-406

27. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Legacy Boot Order menu option and press <Enter>.

28. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the hard drive (shown as sSATA0: and the drive model) and press <Enter>.

29. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move the hard drive to the top of the list and press <Enter>.

30. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to CDROM: and press <Enter>.

31. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move CDROM: to the second position of the list and press <Enter>.

32. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to USB: and press <Enter>.

33. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to move USB: to the third position of the list and press <Enter>. All other devices, if any should be below USB:.

34. Press <Esc> to exit the Legacy Boot Order section.


36. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Power Options menu option and press <Enter>.

37. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Operating System Power Options Runtime Power Management menu option and press <Enter>.


39. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to navigate to the Hardware Power Option After Power Loss menu option and press <Enter>.

40. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys to select the Power On option and press <Enter>.


42. Press <Esc> key to exit the BIOS.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-407


43. When prompted to Save Changes?, use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys Select Yes and press <Enter>.

44 Continuously tap the <Esc> key until the Remote OMT Workstation displays the BIOS Startup Menu screen.

NOTE: Step 44 is time sensitive. If it was not executed in time, the BIOS Startup Menu will not be accessible. If that occurred, hold down the power button until the Workstation powers off. Then turn ON the power to the HP-Z440 SCDI Workstation and return to step 44.

Install O/S and ASR Application on Remote OMT Workstation


45. Load the COTS and ASR Software DVD into the DVD drive. The DVD drive on this workstation is located to the right of the power switch and, due to its black front and slim profile, is difficult to see.

46. Wait for the light on the DVD driver to stop flashing.

47. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys on the Startup Menu to select the Boot Menu option and press <Enter>.

48. Use the <UP/DOWN arrow> keys on the Boot Menu to select the menu option that begins with “Legacy – hp” and contains the text “DVD”, then press <Enter>.

49. Wait for a screen that looks somewhat like this.

Welcome to CentOS 6.7! Install or upgrade an existing system

50. Press the <Enter> key to start the Operating System installation.

51. Wait approximately 25 minutes for the OS to display a screen that looks somewhat like this.

Congratulations, your CentOS installation is complete. Please reboot to use the installed system...

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-408

NOTE : Step 54 is time sensitive. Ensure you read and are ready to perform Step 54 before continuing with Steps 52 and 53.

Failure to provide a timely response in Step 54 causes the Operating System and the Gnome Desktop Manager to fill in OS defaults we do not want. If this occurs turn off the power to the Remote OMT Workstation then turn the power back on and start over beginning with step 44 to reload the OS and application software.

52. Click on the Reboot icon in the lower right hand corner.

53. Wait for the Operating System to present a screen with the following text in the top left hand corner of the screen.

Press any key to enter the menu

Booting CentOS 6 (…) in 4 seconds…

54. Press the <ESC> key within 4 seconds of seeing this screen to stop the boot process.

NOTE : If the <Esc> key was not pressed within 4 seconds, the system boots to the Linux desktop. If that occurred, turn off the power to the Remote OMT Workstation then turn the power back on and start over beginning with step 44 to reload the OS and application software.

55. Press the <a> key so that you can specify the Linux Run level. 56. Once you have pressed the <a> key the Remote OMT Workstation will display the line.

<t=nouveau nouveau.modeset=0

The cursor will appear at the end of the line.

57. Repeatedly press the <Left-Arrow> key to move cursor to the left until you end up with a line that includes the text shown below with the cursor positioned to the right of the 5.


58. Use the <Backspace> key to erase the 5 and replace it with a 3. The line should now look like this…


59. Press the <Enter> key to continue the boot process and wait for a screen that looks like this.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-409

CentOS release 6.7 (Final)

Kernel 2.6.32-573.el6.i686 on an i686

localhost login:

60. Login as follows

localhost login: root <Enter>

Password: root <Enter>

61. Execute the ASR application installation command as indicated below.

[root@localhost ~]# ray-install <Enter>

The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with… (example)

... standby, waiting for cdrom mount: block device /dev/sr0 is write-protected, mounting read-only ------ initiating installation of CDH500443_013 ... ... ------ BASIC FILE TRANSFER ----- ... ... ------ TOOL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ RESETTING GLOBAL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ PREPARING INSTALLATION ------ ... ... ----- STARTING SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ----- ... --- ( full system level,X not needed ) --- ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:46:01 UTC 2016 --- ... ... processing entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_100_sequence ... ... Processing Packages At Run Level 100 ... ... STEP ..STATUS.. Package Name ... -------------------------------------------------------------------- ... 0010 NEW / CHNG first_once_only ... 0020 NEW / CHNG first_items ... 0030 NEW / CHNG root_x_config ... 0040 NEW / CHNG unwanted_services ... 0050 NEW / CHNG NVIDIA_340_32_x86 ... Verifying archive integrity... OK ... Uncompressing NVIDIA Accelerated Graphics Driver for Linux-x86 340.32 ...

The Remote OMT Workstation will reboot once the above part of the installation has been completed without errors.

62. Wait for the standard Gnome Greeter Login Window titled Raytheon which will have three lines in it as follows

operator account

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-410

ray account

Other ...

63. Click on Other ... and respond to the Greeter prompts as follows

Username: root <Enter> Password: root <Enter>

64. Wait for the icons on the left side of the screen to appear.

65. Right-Click on the blue background and select the Open in Terminal menu item. This will bring up a command line window.

66. Execute the following command in the command line window

root # date -u

The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with a message similar to the example below.

Mon Apr 18 20:39:12 UTC 2016

67. Verify that this time is the correct UTC time. If not, correct the time by using the command.

root # date -u <mmddHHMMyyyy.ss>

where mm month in 2-digit format

dd day of the month in 2-digit format

HH hour in 24-hour format

MM minute in the hour in 2-digit format

yyyy year (must be 4 digits)

ss seconds in 2-digit format

An example of a correct command is given below

root # date -u 040820482016.00

This example sets the date to April 8, 2016 and the time to 20:48:00 UTC and the workstation will display this date and time in the form…Fri Apr 08 20:48:00 UTC 2016

68. Continue the installation by executing the following command in the command line window.

root # ray-install

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-411

The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with the following text in the command line window. mount: block device /dev/sr0 is write-protected, mounting read-only ... ... ------ BASIC FILE TRANSFER ------ ... ... ------ TOOL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ RESETTING GLOBAL DEFINITIONS ------ ... ... ------ PREPARING INSTALLATION ------

The following text (example) will be displayed in an xterm window titled sh. ... ... ----- STARTING SOFTWARE PACKAGE LOAD ----- ... --- ( at X Display level ) --- ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:49:17 UTC 2016 --- ... ... checking entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_100_sequence ... ... processing entries in /media/CDH500443_013/radar/group_200_sequence ... ... Processing Packages At Run Level 200 ... ... STEP ..STATUS.. Package Name ... -------------------------------------------------------------------- ... 0010 NEW / CHNG NVIDIA_340_32_x86_part_2 ... 0020 NEW / CHNG root_x_upgrade ... 0030 NEW / CHNG mps800_services ... 0040 NEW / CHNG pti_P018540 ... 0050 NEW / CHNG startech ... 0060 NEW / CHNG low_priority_items ... 0070 NEW / CHNG asr_kokc-1_013 ... 0080 NEW / CHNG multi_kokc-1_013 ... 0100 NEW / CHNG network_configuration ... 0110 NEW / CHNG admin_control_files ... 0120 NEW / CHNG security_group_1 ... 0130 NEW / CHNG workstation_startup_files ... ... --- Mon Apr 18 14:49:57 UTC 2016 --- ... --- END OF Linux Run Level 5 PACKAGE LOAD --- ... ... change_base "/opt/.asr_kokc-1_013+ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904..." "" ... ... Mon Apr 18 14:49:58 UTC 2016 ... ... Please select one of the following entries ... to define the configuration for this workstation. ... ... ... SCDIA : System Control Data Interface A ... ... SCDIB : System Control Data Interface B

... ... OMT1 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 1 ... ... OMT2 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 2 ... ... OMT3 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 3 ... ... OMT4 : Operator Maintenance Terminal 4 ... ... MSOMT1 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 1 ... ... MSOMT2 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 2 ... ... MSOMT3 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 3 ... ... MSOMT4 : Multi-Site Maintenance Terminal 4 ... ... NOTE : You may also enter 'q' to quit. If you do quit, you may ... :

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-412

... : a) re-display this menu and then continue, by executing the

... : command '/usr/local/bin/change_base "RAY-INSTALL"'

... :

... : b) execute the command 'ray-install'

... : to re-install the software.

... :

... : c) abort the installation and continue with

... : the currently running baseline.

... :

... : You cannot complete the installation manually at this point.

... :

... YOUR CHOICE ?

69. Answer the question with one of the following.

For OMT1, type: OMT1 <Enter> For OMT2, type: OMT2 <Enter> For OMT3, type: OMT3 <Enter> For OMT4, type: OMT4 <Enter>

Example response for OMT1 is shown below.

...

... This workstation needs to be rebooted and is about to become node "OMT1".

...

... Press the Enter key when you are ready to reboot. Enter 'q' if you want to quit ... and leave the current configuration in place. If you do quit, you can use the command ... ... change_base /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013+ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_36357 OMT1 ... ... to complete this installation at a more convenient time. ... Ready ?


Example response is shown below.

...

... ... INSTALL ...... : NVIDIA_340_32_x86_part_2 ZPSL-2015_11_17-15_48_...

...

... WARNING: The Composite X extension does not currently interact...

... the CIOverlay option(s); the Composite X extension will be

... disabled.

...

... ... INSTALL ...... : root_x_upgrade ZPSL-2016_02_05-11_58_20+53385_20

... ... INSTALL ...... : mps800_services ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_21_27+27654_630

... ... INSTALL ...... : pti_P018540 ZPSL-2016_04_10-21_49_58+41694_1363

... ... INSTALL ...... : startech ZPSL-2016_03_14-16_52_19+58182_352 ... ... INSTALL ...... : low_priority_items ZPSL-2016_03_07-20_08_54+527... ... ... INSTALL ...... : network_configuration ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_43_59+... ... ... INSTALL ...... : admin_control_files ZPSL-2016_03_18-13_47_24+26... ... ... INSTALL ...... : security_group_1 ZPSL-2016_03_01-11_13_49+08397_16 ... ... INSTALL ...... : workstation_startup_files ZPSL-2016_03_22-21_44... ... ... INSTALL ...... : asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_3... executing /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-413

02_11_.../bin/rm_link_script executing /opt/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+.../bin/link_script home directory /usr/home/.asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_... restored ... ... EXPORTS .FROM. : asr_kokc-1_013 ZULU-2016_04_11-02_11_39+10904_3... ... ... PLEASE REMOVE THE MEDIA PRIOR TO RESTARTING THE APPLICATION ... ... Press the Enter key to proceed or 'q' to quit. ... ... Note : You have the following choices if you quit. ... ... : a) execute the command '/usr/local/bin/change_base "LATEST" ... : in which case you will be taken back to the "This workstation ... : needs to be rebooted" prompt. ... : ... : b) execute the command '/usr/local/bin/change_base <build_ide... ... : to the selected build. You will be taken back to the ... : "This workstation needs to be rebooted" prompt before ... : control is transferred to the baseline of which the selected ... : build identifier is a part. ... : ... : c) execute the command 'ray-install' to re-install the software. ... : ... : You must pick one of the above commands as the workstation is... ... : operational at this point. The configuration cannot be completed ... : manually. ... : ... : You are permitted to change the configuration by selecting the ... : desired configuration via the second (optional) change_base ... : parameter (eg. change_base LATEST SCDIB). ... : ... YOUR CHOICE ?

71. Ignore the warning regarding the Composite X extension as this feature is not used in this configuration.

72. Remove the media from the DVD drive and close the drive tray.


Workstation will reboot and start running the Application Software using the factory default adaptation.

74. Verify that the application software is running on the New Remote OMT Workstation and that the top level SCDI screen is displayed.

Restore Site Tailoring on Remote OMT Workstation

This procedure will restore the site specific operating parameters or site variable parameters (VSPs).

Location: New Remote OMT Workstation

75. Obtain the LOGIN_WINDOW via the Local Work Station Actions / UNIX Admin menu item.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-414

76. Login as ray.

login : ray Password: ray

77. A command line window titled with RAY will appear and the LOGIN_WINDOW will disappear after a short delay (2 sec).


<node>{adminuserid}<step#>:autosu

79. Insert the CD containing current site adaptation into the Remote OMT’s DVD drive. The DVD drive on this workstation is located to the right of the power button and, due to its black front and slim profile, is difficult to see.


root # cd /misc/cd

81. Execute the following command to read the CD and display available files.

root # ls

The command will list archive file(s) which have the naming format:

xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar

Example : rsw_011_2014_09_01_omt.tar rsw_011_2014_09_01_omt2.tar

The fields in the file name are interpreted as follows:

xxx This is three character site identifier (lower case)

bbb This is a three digit number that identifies the software build.

yyyy This is a four digit number specifying the year in which the data was saved.

mm This is a two digit number specifying the month in which the data was saved.

dd This is a two digit number specifying the day in which the data was saved.

hhhhh This is a workstation host identifier.

82. Select the archive matching the hostname of the Remote OMT. Ensure that the build identifier

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-415

matches the software build that was just loaded on to the Remote OMT. Copy this file from the CD to the Remote OMT.

root # cp <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> /usr/home/sband Where <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> is replaced with the filename of the tar file you are restoring from.

83. Wait for the command line prompt to appear, then extract the site tailoring tar file.

root # cd /usr/home/sband root # rm –rf site_tailoring root # tar xvf <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> Where <xxx_bbb_yyyy_mm_dd_hhhhh.tar> is replaced with the filename of the tar file you are restoring from (same as prior step).

The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with a long listing of files extracted from the tar file into the site_tailoring directory. If there are no files listed, the tar file did not extract correctly. In this case, ensure the tar filename typed in is correct and that the file was successfully copied from the CD and then repeat the tar xvf command.

84. Restore site tailoring to this workstation.

root # restore.sh

The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with a long listing of updated files. If any errors or missing files are encountered, the script will pause and require the <Enter> key to be pressed

to continue. If you have questions about any error messages, contact AJW-147, ASR-11 Second Level Engineering for assistance via the FAA Help Desk at (888) 432-2622.

The final lines should read:

Update log is available at /usr/home/sband/site_tailoring/update_log

Update Site Tailoring finished with 0 warning(s).

85. Eject the CD and remove it from the workstation.

root # eject

The DVD drive will pop open. Remove the CD and close the DVD drive drawer.

86. Halt the application.

root # sband-killall The Remote OMT Workstation will respond with the text below assuming that the Application Software is running. The message will be shorter if the Application Software is not running. ... ... Try 1 for local workstation ... ... ... ... ... ... Pass 1 : Killing Local Process Set Tasks ... ... ...

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-416

... ... ... : root 26275 1 ./startup_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : sleep 3 (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7062 7060 lrid_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7063 7060 read_write_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7064 7060 jv_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16) ... ... ... : root 7065 7060 jt_oenet_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16) ... ... ... : root 7066 7060 ju_RCP_comm_task local_process_set (kill -16) ... ... ... : root 7067 7060 oi local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7071 7060 jy_Multisite_managment local_process_set (kill -16) ... ... ... ... ... ... Pass 2 : There are no orphaned Application Software tasks to be killed. ... ... ... ... Try 2 for local workstation ... ... ... ... ... ... Pass 1 : Killing Local Process Set Tasks ... ... ... ... ... ... : sleep 3 (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7064 1 jv_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7065 1 jt_oenet_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7066 1 ju_RCP_comm_task local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... : root 7071 1 jy_Multisite_managment local_process_set (kill -9) ... ... ... ... ... ... Pass 2 : Killing Orphaned Application Software Tasks ... ... ... ... ... ... : root 7068 1 print_intf_task 10 11 ... ... ... ... Try 3 for local workstation ... ... ... ... All application software tasks have been removed successfully.

87. Connect Offsite LAN Ethernet cables (3) to Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] RJ45 connectors PCI-J2 and PCI-J3.

88. Restart the Remote OMT Workstation.

root # init 6

The Remote OMT Workstation will shut down the operating system and reboot.

Wait for the Application Software to display.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-417

Figure 6-143c. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] (Rear View)


90. Enable SCDI Autoreconfiguration.

91. Verify that the restore operation was successful by inspecting the Remote OMT interface. The current site configuration should be correctly represented.

92. If the Remote OMT connects to a RCP, verify that the current site configuration is correctly represented by the RCP light indicators.

93. Certify that the ASR-11 radar is operating correctly on the New Remote OMT Workstation.

This completes the restoration of the Remote OMT Workstation Software and site tailoring.

PCI-J3 (3)

PCI-J2 (3)

RCP SERIAL B

(7)

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-418

6.3.10.3 Replace HP-Z440 Remote OMT Keyboard 52A2, 54A2

NOTE: Removal and installation procedures are the same for all Remote OMT keyboards. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Remote OMT keyboard 52A2. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Remote OMT keyboard 54A2].

See Figure 6-144a for Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal

Location: Unit 52 or Unit 54 Remote OMT

1. Disconnect Remote OMT keyboard 52A2 [54A2] cable from Remote OMT Workstation USB connector USB1-2(1).

2. Remove Remote OMT keyboard 52A2 [54A2].

Installation

1. Inspect replacement Remote OMT keyboard for damage or foreign objects.


2. Install Remote OMT keyboard to location 52A2 [54A2].

3. Connect Remote OMT keyboard cable to Remote OMT Workstation 52A2 [54A2] USB connector USB1-2 (1).

4. Select UNIX Admin on Local Workstation Actions screen.

5. Enter valid username and password and complete login. Ensure terminal window appears.

6. Select terminal window.

7. Press keys on Remote OMT Keyboard 52A2 [54A2]. Ensure key presses appear in terminal window.

8. Close terminal window.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-419

Figure 6-144a. Remote OMT Workstation 52A1 [54A1] (Rear View)

6.3.10.4 Replace Remote OMT Mouse 52A3, 54A3

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are the same for all Remote OMT Mice. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Remote OMT Mouse 52A3. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Remote OMT Mouse 54A3.]

See Figure 6-144a for HP-Z440 Find Numbers and physical locations.

Removal


1. At the HP-Z440 workstations, disconnect Remote OMT Mouse 52A3 [54A3] from Remote OMT Workstation USB connector USB1-1(2).

3. Remove OMT Mouse 52A3 [54A3].

Keyboard USB1-2

(1)

Mouse USB1-1

(2)

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-420

Installation

1. Inspect replacement Remote OMT Mouse for damage or foreign objects.


2. Install Remote OMT Mouse in location 52A3 [54A3].

3. At the HP-Z440 workstations, connect Remote OMT Mouse 52A3 [54A3] to Remote OMT Workstation USB connector USB1-1(2).

5. Position cursor on SCDI Main Screen background, and press left button on Remote OMT Mouse 52A3 [54A3]. Ensure Site Pop-up Menu appears.

6.3.10.5 Replace Remote OMT Monitor 52A4, 54A4

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are same for both Remote OMT Monitors. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Remote OMT Monitor 52A4. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Remote OMT Monitor 54A4.]

Removal


1. Press power switch on Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

2. Ensure power indication on Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4] is not illuminated.

3. Disconnect power cable from Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

4. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure SCDI Monitor video cable to Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4] video connector. Disconnect cable.

5. Remove Remote OMTI Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

Installation

1. Inspect replacement SCDI Monitor for damage or foreign objects.


2. Install Remote OMT Monitor in location 52A4 [54A4].

3. Connect Remote OMT Monitor video cable to Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4] video connector. Using a flat tip screwdriver tighten two captive screws.

4. Connect Remote OMT Monitor power cable to SCDI Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

5. Press power switch on Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-421

6. Ensure power indication on Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4] is illuminated.

7. Ensure SCDI Main Screen appears on Remote OMT Monitor 52A4 [54A4].

Figure 6-145. Removed by SDR-ASR11-051

* *

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-422

6.3.11 Radar Control Panel (RCP) Unit 56 Unit 57 or Unit 60

6.3.11.1 Replace Radar Control Panel 56A1, 57A1, 60A1

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Flat tip screwdriver, small Open end wrench, 7/32 inch

NOTES: Removal and Installation procedures are the same for all Radar Control Panels. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Radar Control Panel 56A1. [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Radar Control Panel 57A1 and 60A1.]


Removal

1. Remove power cable from wall outlet.

Location: Radar Control Panel, Unit 56 or Unit 57 or Unit 60

2. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove eight screws (1) that secure Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] to mounting panel.

3. Carefully lift Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] from mounting panel.

4. Disconnect power cable (2) from Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] connector J1.

5. Using flat tip screwdriver, loosen two captive screws that secure input/output cable (3) to Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] connector J2. Remove cable.

6. Using open end wrench, remove hex nut (4), lock washer and flat washer that secure ground cable (5) to Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1]. Remove ground cable.

Installation

1. Inspect Radar Control Panel for bent pins or foreign objects.

Location: Radar Control Panel, Unit 56 or Unit 57 or Unit 60

2. Inspect location 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] for foreign objects.

3. Using open end wrench, install hex nut (4), lock washer and flat washer to secure ground cable (5) to Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1].

4. Connect input/output cable (3) to Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] connector J2. Using flat tip screwdriver, tighten two captive screws of input/output cable (3).

5. Connect power cable (2) to Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] connector J1.

6. Using Phillips screwdriver, install eight screws (1), lock washers and flat washers to secure Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1] to mounting panel.

7. Install power cable in wall outlet.

8. Select Lamp Test. Ensure all lamps illuminate. Ensure Panel indication (6) is green.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-423

Figure 6-146. Radar Control Panel 56A1 [57A1] [60A1]


6-424

6.3.12 Miscellaneous Support Procedures

6.3.12.1 Wx Receiver Gain Calibration

This procedure sets the Wx Channel Gain VSP for a REX/SDP Cabinet. It is typically run prior to Weather Optimization, or following the replacement of an RF Assembly (1A1, 2A1), or Weather Downconverter (1A3, 2A3).

Tools: Weather Optimization PC. CAT5 Ethernet Cable with RJ45 connectors, approximately 10 feet in length. 50 ohm low power termination. Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws.

NOTES: The Wx Receiver Modules can vary ± 3 dB over frequency and temperature due to manufacturing tolerances. This procedure sets the Weather Channel Gain VSPs to reflect the actual Receiver. Depending on temperature when this procedure is performed, different VSP values can be obtained. Approximately 0.5 dB of the Wx Reporting Error Budget has been allocated to Wx Receiver Gain to cover any differences that may occur from calibration to calibration.

This procedure must be performed when the REX/SDP channels run fault free.

At DoD sites, this procedure requires the Site Administrator to set the security mode to RAY mode. The Site Administrator must obtain a UNIX window, login, and type set_secure_RAY at the command prompt.

[Text in square parenthesis is applicable to REX/SDP-B]

Procedure


1. If a remote OMT has control release control on the OMT. At the selected SCDI, bring up the Site popup menu and select the Site Control - Take Control option to open the CONTROL ACCESS screen. Enter a valid username and password. Click Enter to accept the request for control.

2. Ensure SCDI A has system control.

3. Ensure that REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] is Online Selected and REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] is Online Standby.

Location: Weather Optimization PC

4. Ensure the Weather optimization PC is connected to Ethernet Switch 7A6A1 on SCDI A (on any available port). Power-on the PC. Ensure the PC’s IP address is 138.1.1.5.

NOTE: The following steps are valid for Windows XP. These steps will change depending on the version of Windows used.

* *

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-425

5. To set PC’s IP address, if necessary:

a. Double-click on Network and Dial-up Connections.

b. Highlight the appropriate Local Area Connection.

c. Right-click and select properties.

d. Scroll down in the components window. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

e. Click Properties.

f. Select “Use the Following IP Address”.

g. Enter 138.1.1.5 in the IP Address window.

h. Click on the Subnet Mask window. A number will automatically appear.*

i. Click OK to exit the first window.

j. Click Close to exit the second window.

6. Double click on the Radar Toolbox icon to open Radar Toolbox.

7. On the Radar Toolbox main screen, on the Menu Bar select “Gain VSP” to open the Weather Gain Calibration screen.

8. Ensure Radar Toolbox is set in the ASDP mode by checking lower right corner for “SDP/ASDP=ASDP”. If it reads “SDP/ASDP=SDP” perform the following steps:

a. Click on “File”.

b. Click on “Toggle SDP/ASDP”.


9. Bring up the REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] popup menu and select the Change Equipment Role – “Change to Maintenance” to transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Standby.

10. Bring up the REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Equipment Control Screen and change the SDP Data Stream to REX A [REX B]

Location: REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], Cabinet Unit 1 [Cabinet Unit 2]

11. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect W3203 [W3303] on the top of the RF Assembly unit A1A1 (Weather Beam). Install a 50 ohm termination.


12. On the Radar Toolbox Weather Gain Calibration screen, select Get Data.

NOTE: A prompt will appear directing the user to ensure that an Ethernet connection is established per step 4 above. Select OK.

13. A popup window “You are Ready to Capture Data” will appear outlining the following steps

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-426

13 to 16 as contained in this procedure. Do not select OK until instructed to do so after step 16.


14. Select the REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] icon to open the REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] popup menu. Select the test terminal to “Change Beam and STC Overrides” option to open the change Beam and overrides screen as shown in Figure 6-147.

Figure 6-147. Beam and STC Overrides

15. On the change Beam and STC overrides screen, select weather STC override enabled to true. Set weather STC override to 72 and select change. Close the screen.

16. Select REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] icon to open the REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] popup menu. Select the test terminal, “Capture Radar Data to Disk” screen.

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-427

Figure 6-148. Capture Radar Data to Disk

17. On the Capture Radar Data to Disk screen as shown in Figure 6-148, set the capture parameters as follows:

Azimuth Start (deg): 100

Azimuth Extent(deg): 21.0

Range Start (gate num): 8

Range Extent (deg): 96

Verify that Azimuth Extent has not changed (it can change if Range Extent is set at limits)

Capture Source: Weather channel pulse compressed data

Select “Save to Disk”.

Repeat “Save to Disk” 3 more times.

Close the screen.


18. On the Radar Toolbox popup window select OK on the “You are Now Ready to Capture Data” screen.

19. Click “OK” on the “Data Capture Complete”

20. Click “Calibrate” to obtain REXA [REXB] Gain VSP.

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-428

21. On the “Weather Calibration Complete” screen, record the VSP value below and click “OK”.

Gain VSPs: __________

Location: REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B], Cabinet Unit 1 [Cabinet Unit 2]

22. At the top of REX/SDP A RF Assembly A1A1, remove the 50 ohm termination and reconnect W3203.


NOTE: The current collection of I + Q data is automatically stored on the c:/ drive of the PC for archiving purposes as follows:

Data c:\wxopt\WxGainVSPData

The previous collection of I + Q data (collected from the previous calibration is automatically stored on the c:/ drive of the PC for archiving purposes as follows:

Data c:\wxopt\WxGainVSPData\Archive

Every time a receiver gain calibration is performed, the data from the previous calibration is automatically transferred to the c:\wxopt\WxGainVSPData\Archive\ folders and the data from the previous calibration is automatically deleted.

23. If performing a Weather Optimization, go back to step 3 and repeat for Channel B.

24. Close Radar Toolbox. Power down and disconnect the PC.


25. Ensure REX/SDP A and REX/SDP B are in Maintenance.

26. Bring up the site popup menu, select “Adaptation Data”.

27. Select “Edit Maintenance Set”.

28. Select “Start Edit” then select “Continue” on the Edit Adaptation Menu.

29. Enter the new VSP in the adaptation file from the data recorded in step 20, after the text that appears like the following.

PN1156: PSRA Receiver Gain

[PN1157: PSRB Receiver Gain]

30. Click on the “File” button on the text edit screen. This saves the changes for the new VSPs.

31. Select “Quit” on the text edit screen by right clicking the top bar of the screen. This closes the screen.

32. Select “Check Data”.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-429

33. Select “Close” on the display screen to complete editing. Leave the Adaptation Data screen open.

34. Bring up the SCDI B popup window and select Change Equipment Role – Change to Maintenance to transition SCDI B to Maintenance Standby.

35. Bring up the SCDI A popup window and select Change Equipment Role – Change to Maintenance to transition SCDI A to Maintenance Selected.

36. Confirm when prompted.

37. Copy from the maintenance set to the online set by selecting “Perform Copy” on the Adaptation Data screen.

38. Distribute from the online set to both REX/SDPs and SCDIs by selecting “Distribute to All” in the distribution selections. Wait for “success” to appear in the message window.

39. After successful distribution, close the adaptation data window by selecting “Close”.

40. Bring up the SCDI A popup menu Change Equipment Role – Transition SCDI A to Online Selected.

41. Bring up the SCDI B popup menus Change Equipment Role – Transition SCDI B to Online Standby.

42. Bring up the REX/SDP popup window and select Change Equipment Role – Transition REX/SDP A to Online Selected.

43. Bring up the REX/SDP popup window and select Change Equipment Role – Transition REX/SDP B to Online Standby.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-430

6.3.12.2 Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration

This procedure calibrates the Transmitter J1 Port (output monitor). It is typically run following the replacement of the Transmitter Waveguide Directional Coupler (6DC1), Forward Power Monitor Attenuator (6AT1), or Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider (6A1).

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor

Oscilloscope N Type Right Angle Adapter 10 dB Attenuator (Calibrated), N-Type Female Connectors Test RF Cable, 4 feet, Low Loss, N-Type Male Connectors, 50 ohm (RG214 or equivalent) N Type Adapter, Female to Female BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet BNC-T

NOTES: To avoid adding unknown losses during this calibration, it is necessary to locate test equipment as close as possible to Transmitter Forward Power Monitor J1. This can be achieved by securely placing Test Equipment on top of Unit 4, Transmitter Power Supply Cabinet.


See Figure 6-151 for test equipment setup.

A number of parameters are recorded and calculated during this procedure. A sample Worksheet is provided in Table 6-16.



2. If necessary, transition REX/SDPs so REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] is Online Selected and REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] is Online Standby.

3. Transition REX/SDP B to Maintenance Standby.

4. Transition REX/SDP A to Maintenance Selected.

5. Select All Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies OFF.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A Cabinet


7. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to Long Pulse Trigger from SDP RIC CCA A9A10 connector J1A6 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector. Refer to Figure 6-150 Trigger Connections.

8. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column A) frequencies identified on Local Oscillator A5 (or

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-431

FRD) as follows:

Frequency Assignment 1 = average of F1 / F2 (highest two frequencies)

Frequency Assignment 2 = average of F3 / F4 (lowest two frequencies)


9. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Universal Power Meter, allow 5-minute warm-up, then calibrate

power sensor.

10. Set Universal Power Meter as follows:

Sensor = Peak

Trigger= External

Average= 16

Trigger Level = 0.4 V

Delay= 30 µsec

11. Connect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay cable to Oscilloscope Channel 1.

12. Connect Peak Power Sensor Detector Output cable to Oscilloscope Channel 2.

13. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to Oscilloscope External Trigger via the BNC T.

14. Trigger Oscilloscope from External Trigger.

15. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-15 column B) Coupling Factor of Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 Forward Port 1 at Frequency Assignment 1 and Frequency Assignment 2.

16. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable 6W1 from Transmitter Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.

17. Connect 10 dB Attenuator to Waveguide Directorial Coupler DC1 J1.

18. Connect Peak Power Sensor to 10 dB Attenuator.

19. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-15 column C) insertion loss of 10 dB Attenuator as Attenuator Calibration at Frequency Assignment 1 and Frequency Assignment 2.

20. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1

21. Connect RF Test Cable to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.

22. Using N-Type Adapter, connect cable 6W1to RF Test Cable.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-432


23. Set REX/SDP A Frequency Selection to F1.

24. Select All Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies ON.

25. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to middle of Detector Output (Oscilloscope Channel 2). Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay if necessary.

26. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column D) peak power as Measured Power for Frequency Assignment 1.




28. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column D) peak power as Measured Power for Frequency Assignment 2.




30. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from 10 dB Attenuator.

31. Disconnect 10 dB Attenuator form Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.

32. Disconnect cable 6W1 from N-Type Adapter.

33. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable 6W1 to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.

34. Disconnect RF Test Cable and N-Type Adapter from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.

35. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.



37. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Transmitter J1 Port.




11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-433


40. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to middle of Detector Output (Oscilloscope Channel 2). Adjust if necessary.

41. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column E) peak power as Power at J1 Port for Frequency Assignment #1.




43. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column E) peak power as Power at J1 Port for Frequency Assignment 2.

44. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from Transmitter J1 Port.

45. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column F) Tx Output Power for Frequency Assignment 1 and Frequency Assignment 2 according to the following:

Tx Output Power = Coupling Value + Attenuator Calibration + Measured Power

46. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 column G) J1 Port Calibration for Frequency Assignment 1 and Site Frequency Assignment 2 according to the following:

J1 Port Calibration = Tx Output Power – Power at J1 Port

47. Update label at Transmitter J1 Port with J1 Port Calibration for Frequency Assignment 1, Frequency Assignment 2, and Average Value.



49. Using an ESD wrist strap, disconnect BNC Test Cable from Long Pulse Trigger Connection.

50. Restore PSR to normal operation.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-434

Figure 6-149. Trigger Connections

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-435

Figure 6-150. Tx Forward Power Monitor Point Calibration

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-436

Figure 6-151. Test Equipment Setup


6-437

Table 6-16. Transmitter J1 Port Calibration

Parameter A B C D E F G

Frequency Assignment

Coupling Value

Attenuator Calibration

Measured Power

Power at J1 Port

Tx Output Power

J1 Port Calibration

Source Recorded Recorded Recorded Measured Measured Calculated

= B + C + D

Calculated

= F -E

Units MHz dB dB dBm dBm dBm dB

Frequency

Assignment1

{8} {16} {20} {27} {42} {46} {47}

Frequency

Assignment 2

{8} {16} {20} {29} {44} {46} {47}

{step numbers in curly parenthesis}

**

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-438

6.3.12.3 Waveguide Bolt Torquing

This procedure ensures waveguide connections are properly torqued to prevent unsafe RF emissions. It must be performed on all waveguide flanges following replacement of any waveguide units: Waveguide Combiner (3A17), High Power Load (6AT4), Waveguide Transfer Switch Termination (6AT5), Waveguide Directional Coupler (6DC1, 6DC2), Harmonic Filter (6FL1), Circulator Assembly (6HY3), Waveguide Transfer Switch (6S1) or Receiver Protector (6Z1, 6Z2), or any other waveguide pieces.

Tools: Torque wrench, 3/8 inch drive, with 10 mm socket Open end wrench, 10 mm (if necessary)

Procedure

Location: Waveguide Flange

1. Ensure gasket is present between waveguide flanges.

2. Set torque wrench to 5.6 Nm (49.6 inch-pounds).

3. Using torque wrench and open end wrench (if necessary), tighten bolts in order indicated in Figure 6-152. If possible, place torque wrench on nut and open end wrench on bolt.

4. Set torque wrench to 10.7 Nm (94.7 inch-pounds).

5. Using torque wrench and open end wrench (if necessary), tighten bolts in order indicated in Figure 6-152. If possible, place torque wrench on nut and open end wrench on bolt.

Figure 6-152. Waveguide Bolt Torquing 6.3.12.4 Reserved

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-439

6.3.12.5 Selected Encoder Alignment

This procedure aligns a Selected Encoder to the MSSR Parrot (MRSM). This procedure is typically run following replacement of a Rotary Joint (25A6).

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTES: Normal text applies to the alignment of Selected Encoder X. [Text in square brackets applies to the alignment of Selected Encoder Y].

This procedure requires the ASR-11 system to be taken out of service; therefore, coordination must be performed with Air Traffic services to schedule downtime before beginning this procedure.

Procedure



2. Using Phillips screwdriver, remove screw (1) that secures cover plate of FMAC A1 module 15.

3. Carefully remove cover plate of FMAC A1 module 15 to expose Encoder Alignment DIP Switches.



6. Record position of Encoder Alignment DIP Switches in Figure 6-152.

NOTE: Ensure Dip Switch settings for both FMAC Modules A1 and A2 are the same.


NOTE: Performing this procedure from SCDI-A will calculate the encoder offset using FMAC-A1 module 15 DIP switch settings. Performing this procedure from SCDI-B will calculate the offset using FMAC A2 module 15 DIP switch settings.


8. Disable Encoder Autoreconfiguration.

9. Open Azimuth Alignment screen, and set:

Selected Encoder to MSSR Parrot (MRSM)

3/A Code of MSSR Parrot (MRSM) (from Site Survey)

Surveyed Azimuth of MSSR Parrot (MRSM) (from Site Survey)

Enter Current DIP Switch Settings based upon upper [lower] block of 16 Encoder Alignment DIP Switches.

10. Select Calculate. Ensure upper two Alignment DIP Switch Settings indicate Valid.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-440

11. Record Alignment DIP Switch Settings in Figure 6-153.


12. Using flat tip screwdriver, modify upper [lower] block of 16 Encoder Alignment DIP Switches on FMAC A1 module 15 to Alignment DIP Switch Settings.



14. On Azimuth Alignment screen, update Current DIP Switch Settings with Alignment DIP Switch Settings.

15. Select Calculate. Ensure upper two Alignment DIP Switch Settings indicate Valid. Ensure difference between Current DIP Switch Settings and Alignment DIP Switch Settings is no greater than the bottom two bits.


16. Carefully position cover plate on FMAC A1 module 15.

17. Using Phillips screwdriver, install screw (1) to secure cover plate of FMAC A1 module 15.





21. Ensure Encoder X [Encoder Y] on APG Control & Status screen does not indicate a fault.


23. Enable Encoder Autoreconfiguration.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-441

Figure 6-153. Selected Encoder Alignment

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-442

6.3.12.6 Standby Encoder Alignment

This procedure aligns a Standby Encoder to a previously aligned Selected Encoder. This procedure is typically run following replacement of an Encoder (35B3, 35B4) or a Rotary Joint (35A6) after the Selected Encoder is aligned.

Tools: Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Flat tip screwdriver, small

NOTES: Normal text applies to aligning a Standby Encoder X. [Text in square brackets applies to aligning a Standby Encoder Y].

This procedure requires the ASR-11 system to be taken out of service; therefore, coordination must be performed with Air Traffic services to schedule downtime before beginning this procedure.

Procedure




3. Carefully remove cover plate off FMAC A1 module 15 to expose Encoder Alignment DIP Switches.



6. Record position of Encoder Alignment DIP Switches in Figure 6-154.


NOTE: Performing this procedure from SCDI-A will calculate the encoder offset using FMAC-A1 module 15 DIP switch settings. Performing this procedure from SCDI-B will calculate the offset using FMAC A2 module 15 DIP switch settings.


8. Disable Encoder Autoreconfiguration.

9. Open Azimuth Alignment screen, and set:

Standby Encoder to Selected Encoder

Enter Current DIP Switch Settings based upon upper [lower] block of 16 Encoder Alignment DIP Switches.

10. Select Calculate. Ensure upper two Alignment DIP Switch Settings indicate Valid.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-443

11. Record Alignment DIP Switch Settings in Figure 6-154.





14. On Azimuth Alignment screen, update Current DIP Switch Settings with Alignment DIP Switch Settings.

15. Select Calculate. Ensure upper two Alignment DIP Switch Settings indicate Valid. Ensure difference between Current DIP Switch Settings and Alignment DIP Switch Settings is no greater than the bottom two bits (LSBs).








21. Ensure Encoder X [Encoder Y] on APG Control & Status screen does not indicate a fault.


23. Enable Encoder Autoreconfiguration.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-444

Figure 6-154. Standby Encoder Alignment

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-445

6.3.13 Radar Certification Parameter Setup

6.3.13.1 Online MDS Test Signal Setup

This procedure sets the level of the Short Pulse and Long Pulse End-to-End Test Signal used for FM and Online MDS Testing. It is typically run following the replacement of a Stability Monitor (1A2, 2A2), Upconverter (1A6, 2A6) or NTIA Filter Assembly (1A12, 2A12).

Tools: Flat tip screwdriver, small Open end wrench, 7/16 inch Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope N Type Right Angle Adapter, Male to Female

NOTE: Normal text applies to setting the Short Pulse and Long Pulse MDS Test Signal VSPs for REX/SDP Channel A. [Text in square brackets applies to setting the Short Pulse and Long Pulse MDS Test Signal VSPs for REX/SDP Channel B].


See Figure 6-156 for test signal measurement.

Procedure



2. If required, transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Standby, with Channel Processing set to Idle.


3. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Universal Power Meter.


Sensor = Peak

Trigger = Internal

Average = 16

Trigger Level = -20 dBm (nominal)

Delay = 700 nsec (nominal)

5. Connect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay to Oscilloscope Channel 1.

6. Connect Peak Power Sensor Detector Output to Oscilloscope Channel 2.

7. Trigger Oscilloscope from Channel 1 (Sample Delay

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-446


9. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W39 from Stability Monitor A2 connector J2.

10. Using N Type Right Angle Adapter, connect Peak Power Sensor to Stability Monitor A2 connector J2.


11. Open Manual End to End Tests screen for REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] and set:

Pulse (Target/Weather) to Short

Test Source to Upconverter

Number of CPIs to 100

Range Gate Index to 48

Test Cycling to Continuous

(other parameters on screen do not need to be set)

12. Select Run Test.


13. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to middle of Detector Output (Oscilloscope Channel 2). Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay and/or Trigger Level, if necessary (see Figure 6-156).

14. Using Universal Power Meter, measure peak power of Short Pulse End-to-End Test Signal.



16. Using open end wrench, loosen locking nut (1) on NTIA Filter Assembly variable attenuator A12AT1.

17. Using flat tip screwdriver, set variable attenuator adjustment (2) until reading on Universal Power Meter is -17.0 ± 0.25 dBm.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A[Unit 2, REX/SDP B] Cabinet

18. Using Universal Power Meter, record peak power as Short Pulse Amplitude.


19. Select Stop Test.

20. Set Pulse (Target/Weather) to Long, Range Gate Index to 320.

21. Select Run Test.


22. Set Universal Power Meter Delay to 25 µsec.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-447

23. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to middle of Detector Output (Oscilloscope Channel 2). Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay, if necessary (see Figure 6-156).

24. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record peak power as Long Pulse Amplitude.

25. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from Stability Monitor A2 connector J2.

26. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W39 to Stability Monitor A2 connector J2.


27. Using open end wrench, secure locking nut (1) on NTIA Filter Assembly variable attenuator A12AT1.



29. Modify adaptation data, refer to Paragraph 4.7:

pn1184 - REX-SDP A Short Pulse MDS Test Signal [pn1192: REX-SDP B Short Pulse MDS Test Signal] to Short Pulse Amplitude

pn1185 - REX-SDP A Long Pulse MDS Test Signal [pn1193 REX-SDP B Long Pulse MDS Test Signal] to Long Pulse Amplitude.


30. Press RESET on SDP by power cycling the SDP power supply A9A13.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-448

Figure 6-155. Online MDS Test Signal Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-449

Figure 6-156. Online MDS Test Signal Measurement

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-450

6.3.13.2 Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

This procedure aligns the Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector. This procedure is typically performed after replacing a Forward Power Monitor 1:4 Divider (6A1), Forward Power Monitor Video Detector (6A2), Forward Power Monitor Attenuator (6AT1) or Transmitter Waveguide Directional Coupler (6DC1).

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope 20 dB Variable Attenuator, N Type Tuning screwdriver BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet BNC Test Cable 2, 8 feet BNC-T Connector Maintenance step stool ESD Wrist Strap

NOTES: See Figure 6-157, 6-158 and 6-159 for Find Numbers and physical locations

See Figure 6-160 for Test Equipment Setup.

Procedure


1. If Monitor only, take control.

2. If necessary, transition REX/SDPs so REX/SDP A is Maintenance Selected and REX/ SDP B is Maintenance Standby.

3. On the SCDI Display select REX/SDP A. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control, then set REX/SDP A Frequency Selection to F1 with Channel Processing set to Active.

4. On the SCDI Display select REX/SDP B. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control, then set REX/SDP B Frequency Selection to F1 with Channel Processing set to Active.

5. On the SCDI Displays select Tx. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control and set all Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies OFF.

Location: Unit 6, Waveguide Assembly, Front of Cabinets

6. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable 6W1 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1 (See Figure 6-148).

7. Set 20 dB Variable Attenuator to minimum attenuation.

8. Connect 20 dB Variable Attenuator to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.

9. Connect cable 6W1 to 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-451

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP Cabinet

10. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to Long Pulse Trigger from SDP RIC CCA A9A10 connector J1A6 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector.

11. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Universal Power Meter


Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 1


Delay = 30 usec



15. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to oscilloscope external trigger BNC T-connector.



17. Select all Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies to ON.


18. Open Transmitter Detail Status screen.

19. At Tx Transmitter Status screen, ensure both –“Xmtr Short Pulse” and “Xmtr Long Pulse” RF Output Power do not indicate a fault (green)


20. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Tx Monitor J1 Port.

21. Observe sticker and Record the loss at Tx Monitor Port J1 for Frequency Assignment 1.

J1 Calibration Frequency Assignment 1 ______________=dB

22. Calculate Normal/Low Transition level according to following

Normal/Low Transition =71.4 dBm - J1 Calibration

=dBm

23. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Long Pulse.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-452

24. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to the peak of Detector Output. Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay, if necessary.


25. Using Universal Power Meter, measure the peak power. Adjust 20 dB Variable Attenuator until measurement is within 0.1 dB (+) of Normal/Low Transition as calculated above.


26. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from Tx Monitor J1 Port


27. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay cable from Oscilloscope Channel 1.

28. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Detector Output cable from Oscilloscope Channel 2.

29. Connect ESD wrist strap to wrist and cabinet grounding.

30. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Trigger In cable from BNC-T connector.

31. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 1 from BNC-T connector.

32. Remove BNC-T from Oscilloscope External Trigger port.

33. Connect BNC Test Cable 1 to Oscilloscope External Trigger port.


35. Disconnect cable W1904 from Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J2

36. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J2.

37. Connect opposite end of BNC Test Cable 2 to Oscilloscope Channel 1.

38. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view the detected Long Pulse.

39. Set Oscilloscope markers to measure the peak DC Voltage of the detected signal.

40. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R2 on Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 until the peak detected voltage is 500 mV + 10 mV.




42. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J2.

43. Disconnect cable W1903 from Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J1.

44. Connect cable W1903 to Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J2.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-453

45. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J1.

NOTE: Cables should now be swapped.






49. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R1 on Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 until the peak detected voltage is 500 mV + 10 mV.




51. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J1.

52. Disconnect cable W1903 from Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector6 A2 J2.

53. Connect cable W1903 to Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector6 A2 J1.

54. Connect cable W1904 to Transmitter Forward Power Video Detector 6A2 J2.

55. Disconnect cable W1 from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

56. Disconnect 20 dB Variable Attenuator from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.

57. Using slip-joint pliers, connect cable W1 to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J1.


58. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect BNC Test Cable 1 from Long Pulse Trigger Connection.

59. On the SCDI Display select REX/SDP A. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control, then set REX/SDP A Frequency Selection to Diversity with Channel Processing set to Active.

60. On the SCDI Display select REX/SDP B. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control, then set REX/SDP B Frequency Selection to Diversity with Channel Processing set to Active.

61. On the SCDI Displays select Tx. From the pull down menu select Equipment Control and set all Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies OFF.

62. Perform Tx Forward Power Certification Setup 6.3.13.3.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-454

Figure 6-157. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

6A2 6A1 6AT1

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-455

Figure 6-158. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Trigger Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-456

Figure 6-159. Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-457



6-458

6.3.13.3 Tx Forward Power Certification Setup

This procedure sets up the PSR Transmitter Forward Power scale and bias certification parameters. This procedure is typically run following replacement of a Transmitter Forward Power Monitor Video Detector (6A2).

Tools: Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope, Fluke PM3380A or equivalent Digital Multimeter Weather Optimization Laptop (optional) #1 Philips Screw Driver Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet, BNC Male Connectors BNC-T Maintenance step stool ESD Wrist Strap

NOTES: Normal text applies to setting up PSR Tx Forward Power Certification Parameters for Channel A. [Text in square brackets applies to setting up PSR Tx Forward Power Certification Parameters for Channel B].

See Figure 6-161, Figure 6-161a, Figure 6-162 and Figure 6-163 for Find Numbers and physical locations.


A number of parameters are recorded and calculated during this procedure. A sample Worksheet is provided in Table 6-17. (An automated calculator for Table 6-16 is available.)

Procedure


1. If Monitor only, take control.

2. Transition REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] to Maintenance Standby.

3. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Selected.

4. From the REX/SDP pull down menu select equipment control, then set REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Frequency Selection to F1. This is required only on the selected channel.

5. Ensure SCDI Main Screen Tx Box indicates 8 of 8.


6. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to Short Pulse Trigger connector from SDP RIC CCA A9A10J1A5 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector.

Location: Front of Unit 3, Transmitter RF Cabinet.

7. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Universal Power Meter.

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-459


Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 16


Delay = 9.5 usec



11. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to Oscilloscope External Trigger BNC T-connector.


13. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Tx Monitor Port J1.

14. Record (Table 6-17 row A) Transmitter Monitor Port J1 loss value at Frequency Assignment 1.

15. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Short Pulse.

16. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to the peak of the Detector Output. Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay if necessary.

17. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (Table 6-17 row B) the peak power as Short Pulse Measured Power for 8 Amplifier Modules.


18. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, move the BNC Test Cable from the Short Pulse Trigger connector from SDP RIC CCA A9A10J1A5 to the Long Pulse Trigger connector from A9A10J1A6.


19. Set Universal Power Meter Delay to 30 µsec.


21. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to the middle of the Detector Output. Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay if necessary.

22. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (Table 6-17 row B) peak power as Long Pulse Measured Power for 8 Amplifier Modules.


23. Open terminal block cover on FMAC A1 module A10.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-460

24. Using Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-3 and TB1-4 [TB1-11 and TB1-12] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (Table 6-17 row C) as Short Pulse Detected Voltage for 8 Amplifier Modules.

25. Using the Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2 [TB1-9 and TB1-10] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (Table 6-17 row C) as Long Pulse Detected Voltage for 8 Amplifier Modules.


26. From the TX pull down menu select Equipment Control and set Amplifier Module 1 to OFF.

27. Set Amplifier Module 5 to OFF.



29. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (Table 6-17 row D) the peak power as Long Pulse Measured Power for 6 Amplifier Modules.


30. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, move the BNC Test Cable from the Long Pulse Trigger connector to the Short Pulse Trigger connector.


31. Set Universal Power Meter Delay to 9.5 usec.

32. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Short Pulse.


34. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record (Table 6-17 row D) the peak power as Short Pulse Measured Power for 6 Amplifier Modules.


35. Using Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-3 and TB1-4 [TB1-11 and TB1-12] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (Table 6-17 row E) as Short Pulse Detected Voltage for 6 Amplifier Modules.

36. Using Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2 [TB1-9 and TB1-10] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (Table 6-17 row E) as Long Pulse Detected Voltage for 6 Amplifier Modules.

37. Close terminal block cover on FMAC A1 module A10.


38. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from Transmitter J1 Port.


6-461


39. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect the BNC Test Cable the Short Pulse Trigger connector.


40. Select All Amplifiers and Amplifier Power Supplies ON. Set REX A [REX B] frequency selection to diversity. Transition REX A to online selected and REX B to online standby.

41. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-17 rows F,G) the Short Pulse and Long Pulse Tx Forward Power for 8 and 6 Amplifier Modules as follows:

Short Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules = Short Pulse Measured Power, 8 Amplifier Modules + Calibration, Frequency Assignment 1 – 30 dB conversion dBm to dBW

Long Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules = Long Pulse Measured Power, 8 Amplifier Modules + Calibration, Frequency Assignment 1 – 30 dB conversion dBm to dBW

Short Pulse Tx Forward Power, 6 Amplifier Modules = Short Pulse Measured Power, 6 Amplifier Modules + Calibration, Frequency Assignment 1 – 30 dB conversion dBm to dBW

Long Pulse Tx Forward Power, 6 Amplifier Modules = Long Pulse Measured Power, 6 Amplifier Modules + Calibration, Frequency Assignment 1 – 30 dB conversion dBm to dBW

42. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-17 row H) the Short Pulse and Long Pulse Scale as follows:

Short Pulse Scale =

[10 log(Short Pulse Detected Voltage, 8 Amplifier Modules) – 10 log (Short Pulse Detected Voltage, 6 Amplifier Modules)] / [(Short Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules + TX J1 Loss Factor For Frequency Assignment 1 – 30) – (Short Pulse Tx Forward Power, 6 Amplifier Modules + TX J1 Loss Factor For Frequency Assignment 1 – 30)]

Long Pulse Scale =

[10 log(Long Pulse Detected Voltage, 8 Amplifier Modules) – 10 log (Long Pulse Detected Voltage, 6 Amplifier Modules)] / [(Long Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules + TX J1 Loss Factor For Frequency Assignment 1 – 30) – (Long Pulse Tx Forward Power, 6 Amplifier Modules + TX J1 Loss Factor For Frequency Assignment 1 – 30)]

43. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-17 row I) the Short Pulse and Long Pulse Bias as follows:

Short Pulse Bias = 10 * log(Short Pulse Detected Voltage, 8 Amplifier Modules) – (Short Pulse Scale * Short Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules)

Long Pulse Bias = 10 * log(Long Pulse Detected Voltage, 8 Amplifier Modules) – (Long Pulse Scale * Long Pulse Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules)

* *

* *

05/08/2014 SSM-ASR-11-115 TI 6310.57A

6-462

Modify adaptation data with new Short and Long Bias and Scale, and reset Short and Long Pulse Calibration, refer to Paragraph 4.7

Pn0228 [pn0240]: Short Pulse Calibration = 0

Pn0227 [pn0239]: Short Pulse Scale

Pn0226 [pn0238]: Short Pulse Bias

Pn0225 [pn0237]: Long Pulse Calibration = 0

Pn0224 [pn0236]: Long Pulse Scale

Pn0223 [pn0235]: Long Pulse Bias

NOTE: Calibration is reset to 0 during this procedure. The values on the Certification Parameters screen are aligned to the measured power using the Bias and Scale. Periodic calibrations do not adjust the Bias and Scale, but offset the values using the Calibration.


*

*


6-454A

Figure 6-161a. FMAC Module Locations

*

*


This page intentionally left blank.

6-454B

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-455

Targe

t Dow

nconve

rter

We

ather D

ow

ncon

verter

Local O

scillator

Upco

nverte

r

Figure 6-162. Tx Forward Power Certification Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-456

Figure 6-163. Tx Forward Power Certification

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-457

Figure 6-164. Tx Forward Power Certification Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-458


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-459

Table 6-17. Transmitter Forward Power Certification Setup Worksheet

Parameter Source Units Value

A Calibration, Frequency Assignment 1

Recorded dB

{14}

Short Pulse Long Pulse

B Measured Power, 8 Amplifier Modules

Measured dBm

{17} {22}

C Detected Voltage, 8 Amplifier Modules

Measured V

{24} {25}

D Measured Power, 6 Amplifier Modules

Measured dBm

{34} {29}

E Detected Voltage, 6 Amplifier Modules

Measured V

{35} {36}

F

Tx Forward Power, 8 Amplifier Modules

Calculated = B + A – 30

dBW

{41} {41}

G

Tx Forward Power, 6 Amplifier Modules

Calculated = D + A – 30

dBW

{41} {41}

H Scale Calculated 10logC – 10logE

= _______ F - G

{42} {42}

I Bias Calculated = 10logC –

(H*F)

{43} {43}

{step numbers are in curly parenthesis}

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-460

6.3.13.4 Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Alignment

This procedure aligns the Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector. This procedure is typically performed after replacement of a Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector (6A3), Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator (6AT2) or Transmitter Waveguide Directional Coupler (6DC1).

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws #2 Philips Screw Driver Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope 20 dB Variable Attenuator, N Type - potentiometer style Tuning screwdriver N-Type Right Angle Adapter BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet BNC Test Cable 2, 8 feet BNC-T Connector RF Test Cable, N-Type Connectors Maintenance step stool ESD Wrist Strap

NOTES: See Figure 6-166 and Figure 6-167 for Find Numbers and physical locations See Figure 6-168 for Test Equipment Setup.

Procedure


1. Record average of Frequencies identified on Local Oscillator A5.

MHz

Location: Unit 6, Waveguide Assembly, front of cabinets.

2. Connect Peak Power Sensor to Universal Power Meter, allow 5-minute warm-up, then calibrate power sensor.

3. Set Universal Power Meter as follows: Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 1


Delay = 30 usec



6. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to the Short Pulse trigger connector from SDP RIC CCA A9A10J1A5 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector

* *

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-461

7. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to Oscilloscope External Trigger via BNC T-connector.

8. Record Tx Reverse Power Coupling Factor of Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 at recorded average of Frequencies on Local Oscillator (use the closest Coupling Factor available).

_________dB

To prevent outage ensure steps 13 through 21 are

performed on DC2.

9. Calculate the power for a 2.0:1 VSWR as follows:

2.0:1 VSWR Power = 72.55 dBm (18 kW) – 9.5 dB – Tx Transmitter Reverse Power Coupling Factor

= _________dB

10. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.

11. Connect RF Test Cable to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1. See Figure 6-167.

12. Set 20 dB Variable Attenuator to maximum attenuation.

13. Connect 20 dB Variable Attenuator to the RF Test Cable connected to DC2 J1.

14. Connect Peak Power Sensor to 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

15. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Short Pulse


17. Using Universal Power Meter, measure the peak power. Adjust 20 dB Variable Attenuator until measurement is within 0.1 dB (±) of 2.0:1 VSWR Power.

NOTE: Because of operation in frequency diversity, the level of the detected voltage will vary over frequency. Set attenuator based on maximum reading.

18. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

19. Disconnect cable W1905 from Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 connector J1.

20. Disconnect cable W1906 from Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 connector J2

21. Using #2 Philips screwdriver, remove two screws (1) securing Video Detector 6A3 to bracket (2) to gain access to DC1 J2.

CAUTION

*

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-462

22. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Assembly from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J2, leaving N-Type right angle adapter connected to the detector input.

23. Connect the N-Type right angle adapter connected to the Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Assembly input to the 20 dB Variable Attenuator. The RF input to the Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Assembly is now being supplied from DC2 JI through the 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

24. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay cable from Oscilloscope Channel 1.

25. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Detector Output cable from Oscilloscope Channel 2.

26. Connect ESD wrist strap to wrist and cabinet grounding.

27. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Trigger In cable from Oscilloscope External Trigger.

28. Remove BNC-T from Oscilloscope and reconnect BNC Test Cable 1 to Oscilloscope External Trigger.


30. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A3 Connector J1.




34. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R1 on Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 until the peak detected voltage is 270 mV ± 50 mV.

NOTE: Because of operation in frequency diversity, the level of the detected voltage will vary over frequency. Set adjustment based on maximum reading.

35. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 connector J1.

36. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 connector J2.


38. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R2 on Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 until the peak detected voltage is 270 mV ± 50 mV.

NOTE: Because of operation in frequency diversity, the level of the detected voltage will vary over frequency. Set adjustment based on maximum reading.

39. Disconnect Transmitter Reverse Power Detector Assembly from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

40. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 J2.

*

* *

*

07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A

6-463

41. Using slip-joint pliers, connect N Type Right Angle Adapter to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC1 J2.

42. Using #2 Philips screw driver, install two screws (1) to secure Video Detector 6A3 to bracket (2).

43. Disconnect 20 dB Variable Attenuator from RF Test Cable.

44. Disconnect RF Test Cable from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.


46. Connect cable W1905 to Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 J1.

47. Connect cable W1906 to Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A3 J2.


48. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect BNC test Cable from the Short Pulse Trigger connector.

49. Return PSR to normal operating condition.

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-464

Figure 6-166. Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-465

Figure 6-167. Transmitter Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-466


To Trigger Connector

To 20 dB Variable Attenuator

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-467

6.3.13.5 Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

This procedure aligns the Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector. This procedure is typically performed after replacement of an Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector (6A4), Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Attenuator (6AT3) or Antenna Waveguide Directional Coupler (6DC2).

Tools: Scientific Calculator Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws

#1 Philips Screw Driver Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope 20 dB Variable Attenuator, N Type Tuning screwdriver N Type Test Cable, 6 feet BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet BNC Test Cable 2 BNC T ESD Wrist Strap


See Figure 6-171 for test equipment setup. Procedure


1. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to the Long Pulse Trigger connector from SDP RIC CCA A9A10J1A6 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector.

2. Record average of Site Frequencies (Refer to FRD or FTA)

MHz




Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 16


Delay = 30 usec

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-468

5. Connect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay to Oscilloscope Channel 1.

6. Connect Peak Power Sensor Detector Output to Oscilloscope Channel 2.

7. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In to Oscilloscope External Trigger-In T-connector.

8. Trigger Oscilloscope from External Trigger (+ slope).

9. Record of Waveguide DC2 Directional Coupler Reverse Power Coupling Factor at recorded average of Site Frequencies. (use the closest Coupling Factor available).

dB

10. Calculate the power for a 3.0:1 VSWR as follows:

3.0:1 VSWR Power = 72.55 dBm (18 kW) – 6.0 dB - Antenna Reverse Power Coupling Factor

dB

11. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Waveguide Directional Coupler Forward Power Termination AT8 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1.



14. Connect 20 dB Variable Attenuator to RF Test Cable.


16. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Long Pulse


18. Using Universal Power Meter, measure the peak power. Adjust 20 dB Variable Attenuator until measurement is within +/-0.1dB of 3.0:1 VSWR Power.

NOTE: If the power meter reading is varying, set Attenuator based on maximum reading.


20. Disconnect W1908 from Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J1.

21. Disconnect W1907 from Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J2.

22. Using #1 Philips screwdriver, remove two screws (1) securing Video Detector A4 to bracket.

23. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Antenna Reverse Power Detector Assembly (Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector A4 and Attenuator AT3) from DC2. See Figure 6-170.

24. Connect AT3 and Video Detector to 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

25. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Sample Delay, Detector Output and Trigger-In from Oscilloscope.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-469

26. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J1.




30. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R1 on Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 until the peak detected voltage is 420 mV +/-10 mV.


31. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J1.

32. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J2.


34. Using tuning tool, adjust potentiometer R2 on Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 until the peak detected voltage is 420 mV + 10 mV.


35. Disconnect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4, from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

36. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J2.

37. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Antenna Reverse Power Detector Assembly (Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector A4 and Attenuator AT3) to CP2. See Figure 6-170.

38. Using #2 Philips screwdriver, install two screws (1) to secure Video Detector A4 to bracket (2).

39. Disconnect 20 dB Variable Attenuator from RF Test Cable.



42. Connect W1908 to Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J1.

43. Connect W1907 to Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector A4 J2.


44. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect BNC test Cable from the Long Pulse Trigger connector.

45. Perform Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup Paragraph 6.3.13.6.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-470

Figure 6-169. Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-471

Figure 6-170. Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-472


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-473

6.3.13.6 Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup

This procedure sets up the PSR Antenna Reverse Power certification parameter. This procedure is typically run following replacement of an Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector 6A4. This procedure utilizes an extreme low (1.20:1) and high (1.54:1) VSWR input to the Video Detector to establish a calibrated range that will encompass the operating range of VSWR in all ASR-11 systems. In addition, the Forward port (J1) on Directional Coupler DC2 is used as an RF generator port with the variable attenuator and power meter used for manipulating and indicating the appropriate RF signal into the Video Detector.

Tools: Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope Digital Multimeter Weather Optimization Laptop (optional when using “Reverse Power Cal. Ver.2.xls”) Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws #2 Philips Screw Driver 20 dB Variable Attenuator, N Type BNC Test Cable 1, 12 feet BNC-T Connector RF Test Cable, N Type Connectors Maintenance step stool ESD Wrist Strap

NOTES: Normal text applies to setting up PSR Antenna Reverse Power Certification Parameters for Channel A. [Text in square brackets applies to setting up PSR Antenna Reverse Power Certification Parameters for Channel B].

See Figure 6-172, 6-173, 6-174 and 6-175 for Find Numbers and physical locations.


A number of parameters are recorded and calculated during this procedure. A sample Worksheet is provided in Table 6-18. (An automated calculator for Table 6-18 is available.)

Procedure



2. Transition REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] to Maintenance Standby.

3. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance Selected.

4. From the REX/SDP pull down menu select equipment control, then set REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Frequency Selection to F1. This is required only on the Selected Channel.


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-474


6. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to the Long Pulse Trigger from SDP RIC CCA A9A10J1A6 and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector.

7. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row A) average of Frequencies (Refer to FDR or FTA)




Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 1


Delay = 30 usec



12. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to Oscilloscope External Trigger via BNC-T connector.


14. Refer to Figure 6-174. Using #2 Philips screw driver, remove two screws (1) securing Video Detector 6A4 to side of bracket (2) to gain access to DC2 connector J2.

15. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Assembly (Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector A4 and Attenuator AT3) from DC2.

16. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row B) Coupling Factor of Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 at recorded average of Frequencies.

17. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row C) the power for a 1.54:1 VSWR as follows:

1.54:1 VSWR Power = 72.55 dBm (18 kW) - 13.4 dB - Antenna Reverse Power Coupling Factor

18. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-17 row D) the power for a 1.20:1 VSWR as follows:

1.20:1 VSWR Power = 72.55 dBm (18 kW) - 20.8 dB - Antenna Reverse Power Coupling Factor

19. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect Waveguide Directional Coupler Termination AT8 from Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J1,


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-475


22. Connect 20 dB Variable Attenuator to RF Test Cable.




26. Using Universal Power Meter, measure the peak power. Adjust 20 dB Variable Attenuator until measurement is within +/-0.1 dB of 1.54:1 VSWR Power.


28. Connect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Assembly (6A4) to 20 dB Variable Attenuator. Previous bracket removal allows Video Detector to be moved to accommodate connection with the attenuator.


29. Refer to Figure 6-175. Open terminal block cover on FMAC A1 module A10.

30. Using Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-5 and TB1-6 [TB1-13 and TB1-14] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row E) as Detected Voltage for 1.54:1 VSWR.


31. Disconnect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Assembly (6A4) from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.


33. Using Universal Power Meter, measure the peak power. Adjust 20 dB Variable Attenuator until measurement is within +/- 0.1dB of 1.20:1 VSWR Power. (Note: A fixed 10dB Attenuator maybe added to the 0-20dB Variable Attenuator to attain power adjustment. If fixed 10dB Attenuator is added ensure it is connected during Step 35).


35. Connect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor A4 and Attenuator AT3 to 20 dB Variable Attenuator. (If a fixed 10 dB attenuator was required in step 33, ensure it is also connected).


36. Open terminal block cover on FMAC A1 module A10.

37. Using Digital Multimeter, measure the voltage between terminals TB1-5 (+ lead) and TB1-6 (- lead) [TB1-13 and TB1-14] on FMAC A1 module A10. Record (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row F) as Detected Voltage for 1.20:1 VSWR.

38. Close terminal block cover on FMAC A1 module A10

05/08/2014 SSM-ASR11-115 TI 6310.57A

6-476


39. Disconnect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Video Detector Assembly (6A4) from 20 dB Variable Attenuator.

40. Using #1 Philips screwdriver, install two screws (1) to secure Video Detector 6A4 to bracket (2).

41. Using slip-joint pliers, connect Antenna Reverse Power Monitor Detector A4 and Attenuator AT3 to Waveguide Directional Coupler DC2 J2.




44. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect BNC Test Cable 1 from RIC CCA A9A10 J1A6.

45. From the REX/SDP pull down menu, select equipment control, then set REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Frequency Selection back to diversity. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Online Selected. Transition Rex/SDP B [REX/SDP A] to Online Standby.

Location: Selected SCDI (May use “Reverse Power Cal. Ver2.xls” spreadsheet)

46. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row G) the Absolute Power for a 1.54:1 VSWR as follows:

Absolute 1.54:1 VSWR Power = 1.54:1 VSWR Power + Antenna Reverse Power Coupling Factor -30 dB

47. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-18 row H) the Scale as follows:

Scale = 10log(Detected Voltage, 1.20:1 VSWR) - 10log(Detected Voltage, 1.54:1 VSWR) / (Power for 1.20:1 VSWR - Power for 1.54:1 VSWR)

48. Calculate (in Worksheet, Table 6-16 row I) the Bias as follows:

Bias = (10 * log(Detected Voltage, 1.54:1 VSWR) - (Scale * Power for 1.54:1 VSWR)

49. Modify adaptation data with new Bias and Scale, and reset Calibration, refer to Paragraph 4.7.

pn0231 [pn0243]: Calibration = 0

Pn0230 [pn0242]: Scale

Pn0229 [pn0241]: Bias

NOTE: Calibration is reset to 0 during this procedure. The values on the Certification Parameters screen are aligned to the measured power using the Bias and Scale. Periodic calibrations do not adjust the Bias and Scale, but offset the values using the Calibration.

50. Return the PSR to normal operating condition

*

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-477

Table 6-18. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup Worksheet


Parameter Source Units Value

A Average Local Oscillator Frequency Recorded MHz {7}

B Antenna Reverse Power Coupling Factor Recorded at Frequency A dB {16}

C 1.54:1 VSWR Power Calculated = 72.55 - 13.4 - B dBm {17}

D 1.20:1 VSWR Power Calculated = 72.55 - 20.8 - B dBm {18}

E Detected Voltage, 1.54:1 VSWR

Measured V {30}

F Detected Voltage, 1.20:1 VSWR

Measured V {37}

G Absolute 1.54:1 VSWR Power Calculated = C + B - 30 dBW {46}

H Scale Calculated = 10 log F - 10 log E D - C

{47}

I Bias Calculated = 10 log E – H * G {48}

{Step numbers are in curly parenthesis

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-478

Figure 6-173. Antenna Reverse Power Certification Setup

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-479


6A4

Video Detector Assembly

*

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-480


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-481


To Trigger Connector

To 20 dB Variable Attenuator

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-482

6.3.13.7 Driver Forward Power Video Detector Alignment

This procedure aligns the Driver Forward Power Video Detector. This procedure is typically performed after replacement of a 1:2 Divider/Video Detector (4A20A1, 4A20A2).

Tools: Slip-joint pliers, with Teflon coated jaws Universal Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Oscilloscope Tuning screwdriver N Type Right Angle adapter BNC Test Cable 1, 20 feet BNC Test Cable 2 , 8 feet BNC T-Connector BNC Y-Connector RF Test Cable, N Type, 6 feet ESD Wrist Strap

NOTE: Removal and installation procedures of a Driver Forward Power Video Detector is the same for either Driver Channel. The main text of this procedure is applicable to Driver Forward Power Video Detector A (4A20A1). [Text in square parenthesis is applicable to Driver Forward Power Video Detector B (4A20A2).]

See Figure 6-177, 6-178, and 6-179 for Find Numbers and physical locations.


Procedure

NOTE: During this Driver Forward Power Video Detector Alignment procedure it is possible to generate an “EMERGENCY INHIBIT” while a channel is in “MAINTENANCE” and then the channel will need to be reset to active. The “EMERGENCY INHIBIT” on the channel in “MAINTENANCE” will not affect the on-line channel. The “EMERGENCY INHIBIT” condition can occur if the initial setting of R3 on the Video detector is set to low. To avoid this “EMERGENCY INHIBIT” condition R3 can be set fully counter clock wise before starting this procedure.



2. If necessary, transition REX/SDPs so REX/SDP B [REX/SDP A] is Online Selected and REX/SDP A (REX/SDP B) to Online Standby.

3. Transition REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] to Maintenance.

Location: Front of Unit 1, REX/SDP A [REX/SDP B] Cabinet

4. Open front door of cabinet

5. Using an ESD wrist strap, connect one end of a BNC Test Cable to the Long Pulse Trigger from SDP RIC CCA 1A9A10J1A6 [2A9A10J1A6] and the other end to Oscilloscope’s external trigger input, via a T-connector.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-483


6. Open rear door of cabinet

7. Connect Peak Power Sensor to calibrated Universal Power Meter, allow 5-minute warm-up, then calibrate power sensor.


Sensor = Peak

Trigger = External

Average = 8


Delay = 60 usec



11. Connect Peak Power Sensor Trigger-In cable to Oscilloscope External Trigger to BNC-T connector.

12. Connect BNC Test Cable 1 to BNC-T connector.


14. Disconnect cable 4W10 [4W9] from 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] J1 (if needed).

15. Using slip-joint pliers, disconnect cable W5402 [W5502] from 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] J2.

16. Connect an N-Type Right Angle Adapter to the Peak Power Sensor and connect this to J2.

17. Set Oscilloscope timebase to view Long Pulse

18. Using Oscilloscope, ensure trailing edge of Sample Delay (Oscilloscope Channel 1) is aligned to the peak of the Detector Output. Adjust Universal Power Meter Delay if necessary. Refer to Figure 6-169.

19. Using Universal Power Meter, measure and record peak power below: ___________ dBm. Verify average peak power ≥ 17.90 dBm.

NOTE: Because of operation in frequency diversity, power meter readings will vary over frequency. Observe maximum reading.

20. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor from 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J2.

21. Reconnect cable W5402 [W5502] back to 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J2.

22. Disconnect Peak Power Sensor Sample and Detector cables from Oscilloscope channels 1 and 2.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-484

23. If not already connected, connect a BNC Y connector to 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J1 and then connect cable 4W10 {4W9} to Y connector.

24. Connect BNC Test Cable 2 to Y connector on 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J1.


26. Set Oscilloscope time base to view the detected Long Pulse.

27. Set Oscilloscope cursors to measure the peak DC Voltage of the detected signal.

28. Using tuning tool, carefully adjust potentiometer R3 on 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] until the peak detected voltage is 850 mV + 10 mV (CCW increases video level).

NOTE: Use Caution when adjusting R3 below a specific value as an emergency inhibit may occur. If this happens, adjust R3 CCW and reset Channel A[B] Emergency Inhibit at the TX Control screen of the selected SCDI, repeat until 850 mV is achieved.

Because of operation in frequency diversity, the level of the detected voltage will vary over frequency. Set adjustment based on minimum reading.


29. Locate R115 on the RF Monitor CCA, 4A2A4 Ch A, [4A2A7 Ch B] (may have to remove tape on faceplate to adjust).

30. Verify the Driver Power in on.

31. At the SCDI TX Detailed Status Screen observe Driver A[B] for RF Output Power is Green.

32. Adjust R115 on the associated RF Monitor CCA until the Driver Power just transitions from Green to Red (CW).

33. Adjust R115 back slowly CCW until Driver Power transitions to Green.


34. Using tuning tool, carefully adjust potentiometer R3 on 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] until the peak detected voltage is 1 volt (+ 10 mV) or maximum value (CCW increases video level).

35. Disconnect BNC Test Cable 2 from Y connector on 1:2 Divider/Video Detector A20A1 [A20A2] connector J1. Leave Y connector in place.



37. Using an ESD Wrist Strap, disconnect BNC Test Cable 1 from the Long Pulse Trigger.

38. Return the PSR to normal operating condition.

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-485


11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-486

Figure 6-178. Driver Forward Power Video Detector

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-487

Figure 6-179. Driver Forward Video Detector

11/22/2013 SDR-ASR11-046 TI 6310.57A

6-488


Documents

SECTION 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-9 · 2018-04-09 · 07/22/2015 SDR-ASR11-051 TI 6310.57A 6-1 SECTION 6 Book 2, Section 6 with Appendix 6A and 6B CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLE OF